Appendix A to Part 35 - Guidance to Revisions to ADA Regulation on Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Disability in State and Local Government Services
28:1.0.1.1.36.9.32.1.11 : Appendix A
Appendix A to Part 35 - Guidance to Revisions to ADA Regulation on
Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Disability in State and Local
Government Services Note:
This Appendix contains guidance providing a section-by-section
analysis of the revisions to 28 CFR part 35 published on September
15, 2010.
Section-By-Section Analysis and Response to Public Comments
This section provides a detailed description of the Department's
changes to the title II regulation, the reasoning behind those
changes, and responses to public comments received on these topics.
The Section-by-Section Analysis follows the order of the title II
regulation itself, except that, if the Department has not changed a
regulatory section, the unchanged section has not been
mentioned.
Subpart A - General Section 35.104 Definitions. “1991 Standards”
and “2004 ADAAG”
The Department has included in the final rule new definitions of
both the “1991 Standards” and the “2004 ADAAG.” The term “1991
Standards” refers to the ADA Standards for Accessible Design,
originally published on July 26, 1991, and republished as Appendix
D to part 36. The term “2004 ADAAG” refers to ADA Chapter 1, ADA
Chapter 2, and Chapters 3 through 10 of the Americans with
Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility
Guidelines, which were issued by the Access Board on July 23, 2004,
36 CFR 1191, app. B and D (2009), and which the Department has
adopted in this final rule. These terms are included in the
definitions section for ease of reference.
“2010 Standards”
The Department has added to the final rule a definition of the
term “2010 Standards.” The term “2010 Standards” refers to the 2010
ADA Standards for Accessible Design, which consist of the 2004
ADAAG and the requirements contained in § 35.151.
“Auxiliary Aids and Services”
In the NPRM, the Department proposed revisions to the definition
of auxiliary aids and services under § 35.104 to include several
additional types of auxiliary aids that have become more readily
available since the promulgation of the 1991 title II regulation,
and in recognition of new technology and devices available in some
places that may provide effective communication in some
situations.
The NPRM proposed adding an explicit reference to written notes
in the definition of “auxiliary aids.” Although this policy was
already enunciated in the Department's 1993 Title II Technical
Assistance Manual at II-7.1000, the Department proposed inclusion
in the regulation itself because some Title II entities do not
understand that exchange of written notes using paper and pencil is
an available option in some circumstances. See Department of
Justice, The Americans with Disabilities Act, Title II Technical
Assistance Manual Covering State and Local Government Programs and
Services (1993), available at
http://www.ada.gov/taman2.html. Comments from several
disability advocacy organizations and individuals discouraged the
Department from including the exchange of written notes in the list
of available auxiliary aids in § 35.104. Advocates and persons with
disabilities requested explicit limits on the use of written notes
as a form of auxiliary aid because, they argue, most exchanges are
not simple and are not communicated effectively using handwritten
notes. One major advocacy organization, for example, noted that the
speed at which individuals communicate orally or use sign language
averages about 200 words per minute or more while exchange of notes
often leads to truncated or incomplete communication. For persons
whose primary language is American Sign Language (ASL), some
commenters pointed out, using written English in exchange of notes
often is ineffective because ASL syntax and vocabulary is
dissimilar from English. By contrast, some commenters from
professional medical associations sought more specific guidance on
when notes are allowed, especially in the context of medical
offices and health care situations.
Exchange of notes likely will be effective in situations that do
not involve substantial conversation, for example, blood work for
routine lab tests or regular allergy shots. Video Interpreting
Services (hereinafter referred to as “video remote interpreting
services” or VRI) or an interpreter should be used when the matter
involves greater complexity, such as in situations requiring
communication of medical history or diagnoses, in conversations
about medical procedures and treatment decisions, or when giving
instructions for care at home or elsewhere. In the
Section-By-Section Analysis of § 35.160 (Communications) below, the
Department discusses in greater detail the kinds of situations in
which interpreters or captioning would be necessary. Additional
guidance on this issue can be found in a number of agreements
entered into with health-care providers and hospitals that are
available on the Department's Web site at
http://www.ada.gov.
In the NPRM, in paragraph (1) of the definition in § 35.104, the
Department proposed replacing the term “telecommunications devices
for deaf persons (TDD)” with the term “text telephones (TTYs).” TTY
has become the commonly accepted term and is consistent with the
terminology used by the Access Board in the 2004 ADAAG. Commenters
representing advocates and persons with disabilities expressed
approval of the substitution of TTY for TDD in the proposed
regulation.
Commenters also expressed the view that the Department should
expand paragraph (1) of the definition of auxiliary aids to include
“TTY's and other voice, text, and video-based telecommunications
products and systems such as videophones and captioned telephones.”
The Department has considered these comments and has revised the
definition of “auxiliary aids” to include references to voice,
text, and video-based telecommunications products and systems, as
well as accessible electronic and information technology.
In the NPRM, the Department also proposed including a reference
in paragraph (1) to a new technology, Video Interpreting Services
(VIS). The reference remains in the final rule. VIS is discussed in
the Section-By-Section Analysis below in reference to § 35.160
(Communications), but is referred to as VRI in both the final rule
and Appendix A to more accurately reflect the terminology used in
other regulations and among users of the technology.
In the NPRM, the Department noted that technological advances in
the 18 years since the ADA's enactment had increased the range of
auxiliary aids and services for those who are blind or have low
vision. As a result the Department proposed additional examples to
paragraph (2) of the definition, including Brailled materials and
displays, screen reader software, optical readers, secondary
auditory programs (SAP), and accessible electronic and information
technology. Some commenters asked for more detailed requirements
for auxiliary aids for persons with vision disabilities. The
Department has decided it will not make additional changes to that
provision at this time.
Several comments suggested expanding the auxiliary aids
provision for persons who are both deaf and blind, and in
particular, to include in the list of auxiliary aids a new
category, “support service providers (SSP),” which was described in
comments as a navigator and communication facilitator. The
Department believes that services provided by communication
facilitators are already encompassed in the requirement to provide
qualified interpreters. Moreover, the Department is concerned that
as described by the commenters, the category of support service
providers would include some services that would be considered
personal services and that do not qualify as auxiliary aids.
Accordingly, the Department declines to add this new category to
the list at this time.
Some commenters representing advocacy organizations and
individuals asked the Department to explicitly require title II
entities to make any or all of the devices or technology available
in all situations upon the request of the person with a disability.
The Department recognizes that such devices or technology may
provide effective communication and in some circumstances may be
effective for some persons, but the Department does not intend to
require that every entity covered by title II provide every device
or all new technology at all times as long as the communication
that is provided is as effective as communication with others. The
Department recognized in the preamble to the 1991 title II
regulation that the list of auxiliary aids was “not an
all-inclusive or exhaustive catalogue of possible or available
auxiliary aids or services. It is not possible to provide an
exhaustive list, and an attempt to do so would omit the new devices
that will become available with emerging technology.” 28 CFR part
35, app. A at 560 (2009). The Department continues to endorse that
view; thus, the inclusion of a list of examples of possible
auxiliary aids in the definition of “auxiliary aids” should not be
read as a mandate for a title II entity to offer every possible
auxiliary aid listed in the definition in every situation.
“Direct Threat”
In Appendix A of the Department's 1991 title II regulation, the
Department included a detailed discussion of “direct threat” that,
among other things, explained that “the principles established in §
36.208 of the Department's [title III] regulation” were
“applicable” as well to title II, insofar as “questions of safety
are involved.” 28 CFR part 35, app. A at 565 (2009). In the final
rule, the Department has included an explicit definition of “direct
threat” that is parallel to the definition in the title III rule
and placed it in the definitions section at § 35.104.
“Existing Facility”
The 1991 title II regulation provided definitions for “new
construction” at § 35.151(a) and “alterations” at § 35.151(b). In
contrast, the term “existing facility” was not explicitly defined,
although it is used in the statute and regulations for title II.
See 42 U.S.C. 12134(b); 28 CFR 35.150. It has been the
Department's view that newly constructed or altered facilities are
also existing facilities with continuing program access
obligations, and that view is made explicit in this rule.
The classification of facilities under the ADA is neither static
nor mutually exclusive. Newly constructed or altered facilities are
also existing facilities. A newly constructed facility remains
subject to the accessibility standards in effect at the time of
design and construction, with respect to those elements for which,
at that time, there were applicable ADA Standards. And at some
point, the facility may undergo alterations, which are subject to
the alterations requirements in effect at the time. See §
35.151(b)-(c). The fact that the facility is also an existing
facility does not relieve the public entity of its obligations
under the new construction and alterations requirements in this
part.
For example, a facility constructed or altered after the
effective date of the original title II regulations but prior to
the effective date of the revised title II regulation and
Standards, must have been built or altered in compliance with the
Standards (or UFAS) in effect at that time, in order to be in
compliance with the ADA. In addition, a “newly constructed”
facility or “altered” facility is also an “existing facility” for
purposes of application of the title II program accessibility
requirements. Once the 2010 Standards take effect, they will become
the new reference point for determining the program accessibility
obligations of all existing facilities. This is because the ADA
contemplates that as our knowledge and understanding of
accessibility advances and evolves, this knowledge will be
incorporated into and result in increased accessibility in the
built environment. Under title II, this goal is accomplished
through the statute's program access framework. While newly
constructed or altered facilities must meet the accessibility
standards in effect at the time, the fact that these facilities are
also existing facilities ensures that the determination of whether
a program is accessible is not frozen at the time of construction
or alteration. Program access may require consideration of
potential barriers to access that were not recognized as such at
the time of construction or alteration, including, but not limited
to, the elements that are first covered in the 2010 Standards, as
that term is defined in § 35.104. Adoption of the 2010 Standards
establishes a new reference point for title II entities that choose
to make structural changes to existing facilities to meet their
program access requirements.
The NPRM included the following proposed definition of “existing
facility.” “A facility that has been constructed and remains in
existence on any given date.” 73 FR 34466, 34504 (June 17, 2008).
The Department received a number of comments on this issue. The
commenters urged the Department to clarify that all buildings
remain subject to the standards in effect at the time of their
construction, that is, that a facility designed and constructed for
first occupancy between January 26, 1992, and the effective date of
the final rule is still considered “new construction” and that
alterations occurring between January 26, 1992, and the effective
date of the final rule are still considered “alterations.”
The final rule includes clarifying language to ensure that the
Department's interpretation is accurately reflected. As established
by this rule, existing facility means a facility in existence on
any given date, without regard to whether the facility may also be
considered newly constructed or altered under this part. Thus, this
definition reflects the Department's interpretation that public
entities have program access requirements that are independent of,
but may coexist with, requirements imposed by new construction or
alteration requirements in those same facilities.
“Housing at a Place of Education”
The Department has added a new definition to § 35.104, “housing
at a place of education,” to clarify the types of educational
housing programs that are covered by this title. This section
defines “housing at a place of education” as “housing operated by
or on behalf of an elementary, secondary, undergraduate, or
postgraduate school, or other place of education, including
dormitories, suites, apartments, or other places of residence.”
This definition does not apply to social service programs that
combine residential housing with social services, such as a
residential job training program.
“Other Power-Driven Mobility Device” and “Wheelchair”
Because relatively few individuals with disabilities were using
nontraditional mobility devices in 1991, there was no pressing need
for the 1991 title II regulation to define the terms “wheelchair”
or “other power-driven mobility device,” to expound on what would
constitute a reasonable modification in policies, practices, or
procedures under § 35.130(b)(7), or to set forth within that
section specific requirements for the accommodation of mobility
devices. Since the issuance of the 1991 title II regulation,
however, the choices of mobility devices available to individuals
with disabilities have increased dramatically. The Department has
received complaints about and has become aware of situations where
individuals with mobility disabilities have utilized devices that
are not designed primarily for use by an individual with a mobility
disability, including the Segway ® Personal Transporter (Segway ®
PT), golf cars, all-terrain vehicles (ATVs), and other locomotion
devices.
The Department also has received questions from public entities
and individuals with mobility disabilities concerning which
mobility devices must be accommodated and under what circumstances.
Indeed, there has been litigation concerning the legal obligations
of covered entities to accommodate individuals with mobility
disabilities who wish to use an electronic personal assistance
mobility device (EPAMD), such as the Segway ® PT, as a mobility
device. The Department has participated in such litigation as
amicus curiae. See Ault v. Walt Disney World
Co., No. 6:07-cv-1785-Orl-31KRS, 2009 WL 3242028 (M.D. Fla.
Oct. 6, 2009). Much of the litigation has involved shopping malls
where businesses have refused to allow persons with disabilities to
use EPAMDs. See, e.g., McElroy v. Simon Property
Group, No. 08-404 RDR, 2008 WL 4277716 (D. Kan. Sept. 15, 2008)
(enjoining mall from prohibiting the use of a Segway ® PT as a
mobility device where an individual agrees to all of a mall's
policies for use of the device, except indemnification); Shasta
Clark, Local Man Fighting Mall Over Right to Use Segway,
WATE 6 News, July 26, 2005, available at
http://www.wate.com/Global/story.asp?s=3643674 (last visited
June 24, 2010).
In response to questions and complaints from individuals with
disabilities and covered entities concerning which mobility devices
must be accommodated and under what circumstances, the Department
began developing a framework to address the use of unique mobility
devices, concerns about their safety, and the parameters for the
circumstances under which these devices must be accommodated. As a
result, the Department's NPRM proposed two new approaches to
mobility devices. First, the Department proposed a two-tiered
mobility device definition that defined the term “wheelchair”
separately from “other power-driven mobility device.” Second, the
Department proposed requirements to allow the use of devices in
each definitional category. In § 35.137(a), the NPRM proposed that
wheelchairs and manually-powered mobility aids used by individuals
with mobility disabilities shall be permitted in any areas open to
pedestrian use. Section 35.137(b) of the NPRM provided that a
public entity “shall make reasonable modifications in its policies,
practices, and procedures to permit the use of other power-driven
mobility devices by individuals with disabilities, unless the
public entity can demonstrate that the use of the device is not
reasonable or that its use will result in a fundamental alteration
of the public entity's service, program, or activity.” 73 FR 34466,
34504 (June 17, 2008).
The Department sought public comment with regard to whether
these steps would, in fact, achieve clarity on these issues. Toward
this end, the Department's NPRM asked several questions relating to
the definitions of “wheelchair,” “other power-driven mobility
device,” and “manually-powered mobility aids”; the best way to
categorize different classes of mobility devices; the types of
devices that should be included in each category; and the
circumstances under which certain mobility devices must be
accommodated or may be excluded pursuant to the policy adopted by
the public entity.
Because the questions in the NPRM that concerned mobility
devices and their accommodation were interrelated, many of the
commenters' responses did not identify the specific question to
which they were responding. Instead, the commenters grouped the
questions together and provided comments accordingly. Most
commenters spoke to the issues addressed in the Department's
questions in broad terms and general concepts. As a result, the
responses to the questions posed are discussed below in broadly
grouped issue categories rather than on a question-by-question
basis.
Two-tiered definitional approach. Commenters supported
the Department's proposal to use a two-tiered definition of
mobility device. Commenters nearly universally said that
wheelchairs always should be accommodated and that they should
never be subject to an assessment with regard to their admission to
a particular public facility. In contrast, the vast majority of
commenters indicated they were in favor of allowing public entities
to conduct an assessment as to whether, and under which
circumstances, other power-driven mobility devices would be allowed
on-site.
Many commenters indicated their support for the two-tiered
approach in responding to questions concerning the definition of
“wheelchair” and “other-powered mobility device.” Nearly every
disability advocacy group said that the Department's two-tiered
approach strikes the proper balance between ensuring access for
individuals with disabilities and addressing fundamental alteration
and safety concerns held by public entities; however, a minority of
disability advocacy groups wanted other power-driven mobility
devices to be included in the definition of “wheelchair.” Most
advocacy, nonprofit, and individual commenters supported the
concept of a separate definition for “other power-driven mobility
device” because it maintains existing legal protections for
wheelchairs while recognizing that some devices that are not
designed primarily for individuals with mobility disabilities have
beneficial uses for individuals with mobility disabilities. They
also favored this concept because it recognizes technological
developments and that the innovative uses of varying devices may
provide increased access to individuals with mobility
disabilities.
Many environmental, transit system, and government commenters
indicated they opposed in its entirety the concept of “other
power-driven mobility devices” as a separate category. They believe
that the creation of a second category of mobility devices will
mean that other power-driven mobility devices, specifically ATVs
and off-highway vehicles, must be allowed to go anywhere on
national park lands, trails, recreational areas, etc.; will
conflict with other Federal land management laws and regulations;
will harm the environment and natural and cultural resources; will
pose safety risks to users of these devices, as well as to
pedestrians not expecting to encounter motorized devices in these
settings; will interfere with the recreational enjoyment of these
areas; and will require too much administrative work to regulate
which devices are allowed and under which circumstances. These
commenters all advocated a single category of mobility devices that
excludes all fuel-powered devices.
Whether or not they were opposed to the two-tier approach in its
entirety, virtually every environmental commenter and most
government commenters associated with providing public
transportation services or protecting land, natural resources, fish
and game, etc., said that the definition of “other power-driven
mobility device” is too broad. They suggested that they might be
able to support the dual category approach if the definition of
“other power-driven mobility device” were narrowed. They expressed
general and program-specific concerns about permitting the use of
other power-driven mobility devices. They noted the same concerns
as those who opposed the two-tiered concept - that these devices
create a host of environmental, safety, cost, administrative and
conflict of law issues. Virtually all of these commenters indicated
that their support for the dual approach and the concept of other
power-driven mobility devices is, in large measure, due to the
other power-driven mobility device assessment factors in §
35.137(c) of the NPRM.
By maintaining the two-tiered approach to mobility devices and
defining “wheelchair” separately from “other power-driven mobility
device,” the Department is able to preserve the protection users of
traditional wheelchairs and other manually powered mobility aids
have had since the ADA was enacted, while also recognizing that
human ingenuity, personal choice, and new technologies have led to
the use of devices that may be more beneficial for individuals with
certain mobility disabilities.
Moreover, the Department believes the two-tiered approach gives
public entities guidance to follow in assessing whether reasonable
modifications can be made to permit the use of other power-driven
mobility devices on-site and to aid in the development of policies
describing the circumstances under which persons with disabilities
may use such devices. The two-tiered approach neither mandates that
all other power-driven mobility devices be accommodated in every
circumstance, nor excludes these devices. This approach, in
conjunction with the factor assessment provisions in §
35.137(b)(2), will serve as a mechanism by which public entities
can evaluate their ability to accommodate other power-driven
mobility devices. As will be discussed in more detail below, the
assessment factors in § 35.137(b)(2) are designed to provide
guidance to public entities regarding whether it is appropriate to
bar the use of a specific “other power-driven mobility device in a
specific facility. In making such a determination, a public entity
must consider the device's type, size, weight, dimensions, and
speed; the facility's volume of pedestrian traffic; the facility's
design and operational characteristics; whether the device
conflicts with legitimate safety requirements; and whether the
device poses a substantial risk of serious harm to the immediate
environment or natural or cultural resources, or conflicts with
Federal land management laws or regulations. In addition, if under
§ 35.130(b)(7), the public entity claims that it cannot make
reasonable modifications to its policies, practices, or procedures
to permit the use of other power-driven mobility devices by
individuals with disabilities, the burden of proof to demonstrate
that such devices cannot be operated in accordance with legitimate
safety requirements rests upon the public entity.
Categorization of wheelchair versus other power-driven
mobility devices. Implicit in the creation of the two-tiered
mobility device concept is the question of how to categorize which
devices are wheelchairs and which are other power-driven mobility
devices. Finding weight and size to be too restrictive, the vast
majority of advocacy, nonprofit, and individual commenters opposed
using the Department of Transportation's definition of “common
wheelchair” to designate the mobility device's appropriate
category. Commenters who generally supported using weight and size
as the method of categorization did so because of their concerns
about potentially detrimental impacts on the environment and
cultural and natural resources; on the enjoyment of the facility by
other recreational users, as well as their safety; on the
administrative components of government agencies required to assess
which devices are appropriate on narrow, steeply sloped, or
foot-and-hoof only trails; and about the impracticality of
accommodating such devices in public transportation settings.
Many environmental, transit system, and government commenters
also favored using the device's intended-use to categorize which
devices constitute wheelchairs and which are other power-driven
mobility devices. Furthermore, the intended-use determinant
received a fair amount of support from advocacy, nonprofit, and
individual commenters, either because they sought to preserve the
broad accommodation of wheelchairs or because they sympathized with
concerns about individuals without mobility disabilities
fraudulently bringing other power-driven mobility devices into
public facilities.
Commenters seeking to have the Segway® PT included in the
definition of “wheelchair” objected to classifying mobility devices
on the basis of their intended use because they felt that such a
classification would be unfair and prejudicial to Segway® PT users
and would stifle personal choice, creativity, and innovation. Other
advocacy and nonprofit commenters objected to employing an
intended-use approach because of concerns that the focus would
shift to an assessment of the device, rather than the needs or
benefits to the individual with the mobility disability. They were
of the view that the mobility-device classification should be based
on its function - whether it is used for a mobility disability. A
few commenters raised the concern that an intended-use approach
might embolden public entities to assess whether an individual with
a mobility disability really needs to use the other power-driven
mobility device at issue or to question why a wheelchair would not
provide sufficient mobility. Those citing objections to the
intended use determinant indicated it would be more appropriate to
make the categorization determination based on whether the device
is being used for a mobility disability in the context of the
impact of its use in a specific environment. Some of these
commenters preferred this approach because it would allow the
Segway® PT to be included in the definition of “wheelchair.”
Many environmental and government commenters were inclined to
categorize mobility devices by the way in which they are powered,
such as battery-powered engines versus fuel or combustion engines.
One commenter suggested using exhaust level as the determinant.
Although there were only a few commenters who would make the
determination based on indoor or outdoor use, there was nearly
universal support for banning the indoor use of devices that are
powered by fuel or combustion engines.
A few commenters thought it would be appropriate to categorize
the devices based on their maximum speed. Others objected to this
approach, stating that circumstances should dictate the appropriate
speed at which mobility devices should be operated - for example, a
faster speed may be safer when crossing streets than it would be
for sidewalk use - and merely because a device can go a certain
speed does not mean it will be operated at that speed.
The Department has decided to maintain the device's intended use
as the appropriate determinant for which devices are categorized as
“wheelchairs.” However, because wheelchairs may be intended for use
by individuals who have temporary conditions affecting mobility,
the Department has decided that it is more appropriate to use the
phrase “primarily designed” rather than “solely designed” in making
such categorizations. The Department will not foreclose any future
technological developments by identifying or banning specific
devices or setting restrictions on size, weight, or dimensions.
Moreover, devices designed primarily for use by individuals with
mobility disabilities often are considered to be medical devices
and are generally eligible for insurance reimbursement on this
basis. Finally, devices designed primarily for use by individuals
with mobility disabilities are less subject to fraud concerns
because they were not designed to have a recreational component.
Consequently, rarely, if ever, is any inquiry or assessment as to
their appropriateness for use in a public entity necessary.
Definition of “wheelchair.” In seeking public feedback on
the NPRM's definition of “wheelchair,” the Department explained its
concern that the definition of “wheelchair” in section 508(c)(2) of
the ADA (formerly section 507(c)(2), July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 372,
42 U.S.C. 12207, renumbered section 508(c)(2), Public Law 110-325
section 6(a)(2), Sept. 25, 2008, 122 Stat. 3558), which pertains to
Federal wilderness areas, is not specific enough to provide clear
guidance in the array of settings covered by title II and that the
stringent size and weight requirements for the Department of
Transportation's definition of “common wheelchair” are not a good
fit in the context of most public entities. The Department noted in
the NPRM that it sought a definition of “wheelchair” that would
include manually-operated and power-driven wheelchairs and mobility
scooters (i.e., those that typically are single-user, have
three to four wheels, and are appropriate for both indoor and
outdoor pedestrian areas), as well as a variety of types of
wheelchairs and mobility scooters with individualized or unique
features or models with different numbers of wheels. The NPRM
defined a wheelchair as “a device designed solely for use by an
individual with a mobility impairment for the primary purpose of
locomotion in typical indoor and outdoor pedestrian areas. A
wheelchair may be manually-operated or power-driven.” 73 FR 34466,
34479 (June 17, 2008). Although the NPRM's definition of
“wheelchair” excluded mobility devices that are not designed solely
for use by individuals with mobility disabilities, the Department,
noting that the use of the Segway® PT by individuals with mobility
disabilities is on the upswing, inquired as to whether this device
should be included in the definition of “wheelchair.”
Many environment and Federal government employee commenters
objected to the Department's proposed definition of “wheelchair”
because it differed from the definition of “wheelchair” found in
section 508(c)(2) of the ADA - a definition used in the statute
only in connection with a provision relating to the use of a
wheelchair in a designated wilderness area. See 42 U.S.C.
12207(c)(1). Other government commenters associated with
environmental issues wanted the phrase “outdoor pedestrian use”
eliminated from the definition of “wheelchair.” Some transit system
commenters wanted size, weight, and dimensions to be part of the
definition because of concerns about costs associated with having
to accommodate devices that exceed the dimensions of the “common
wheelchair” upon which the 2004 ADAAG was based.
Many advocacy, nonprofit, and individual commenters indicated
that as long as the Department intends the scope of the term
“mobility impairments” to include other disabilities that cause
mobility impairments (e.g., respiratory, circulatory,
stamina, etc.), they were in support of the language. Several
commenters indicated a preference for the definition of
“wheelchair” in section 508(c)(2) of the ADA. One commenter
indicated a preference for the term “assistive device,” as it is
defined in the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, over the term
“wheelchair.” A few commenters indicated that strollers should be
added to the preamble's list of examples of wheelchairs because
parents of children with disabilities frequently use strollers as
mobility devices until their children get older.
In the final rule, the Department has rearranged some wording
and has made some changes in the terminology used in the definition
of “wheelchair,” but essentially has retained the definition, and
therefore the rationale, that was set forth in the NPRM. Again, the
text of the ADA makes the definition of “wheelchair” contained in
section 508(c)(2) applicable only to the specific context of uses
in designated wilderness areas, and therefore does not compel the
use of that definition for any other purpose. Moreover, the
Department maintains that limiting the definition to devices
suitable for use in an “indoor pedestrian area” as provided for in
section 508(c)(2) of the ADA, would ignore the technological
advances in wheelchair design that have occurred since the ADA went
into effect and that the inclusion of the phrase “indoor pedestrian
area” in the definition of “wheelchair” would set back progress
made by individuals with mobility disabilities who, for many years
now, have been using devices designed for locomotion in indoor
and outdoor settings. The Department has concluded that same
rationale applies to placing limits on the size, weight, and
dimensions of wheelchairs.
With regard to the term “mobility impairments,” the Department
intended a broad reading so that a wide range of disabilities,
including circulatory and respiratory disabilities, that make
walking difficult or impossible, would be included. In response to
comments on this issue, the Department has revisited the issue and
has concluded that the most apt term to achieve this intent is
“mobility disability.”
In addition, the Department has decided that it is more
appropriate to use the phrase “primarily” designed for use by
individuals with disabilities in the final rule, rather than
“solely” designed for use by individuals with disabilities - the
phrase proposed in the NPRM. The Department believes that this
phrase more accurately covers the range of devices the Department
intends to fall within the definition of “wheelchair.”
After receiving comments that the word “typical” is vague and
the phrase “pedestrian areas” is confusing to apply, particularly
in the context of similar, but not identical, terms used in the
proposed Standards, the Department decided to delete the term
“typical indoor and outdoor pedestrian areas” from the final rule.
Instead, the final rule references “indoor or of both indoor and
outdoor locomotion,” to make clear that the devices that fall
within the definition of “wheelchair” are those that are used for
locomotion on indoor and outdoor pedestrian paths or routes and not
those that are intended exclusively for traversing undefined,
unprepared, or unimproved paths or routes. Thus, the final rule
defines the term “wheelchair” to mean “a manually-operated or
power-driven device designed primarily for use by an individual
with a mobility disability for the main purpose of indoor or of
both indoor and outdoor locomotion.”
Whether the definition of “wheelchair” includes the Segway®
PT. As discussed above, because individuals with mobility
disabilities are using the Segway® PT as a mobility device, the
Department asked whether it should be included in the definition of
“wheelchair.” The basic Segway® PT model is a two-wheeled,
gyroscopically-stabilized, battery-powered personal transportation
device. The user stands on a platform suspended three inches off
the ground by wheels on each side, grasps a T-shaped handle, and
steers the device similarly to a bicycle. Most Segway® PTs can
travel up to 12 1/2 miles per hour, compared to the average
pedestrian walking speed of three to four miles per hour and the
approximate maximum speed for power-operated wheelchairs of six
miles per hour. In a study of trail and other non-motorized
transportation users including EPAMDs, the Federal Highway
Administration (FHWA) found that the eye height of individuals
using EPAMDs ranged from approximately 69 to 80 inches. See
Federal Highway Administration, Characteristics of Emerging Road
and Trail Users and Their Safety (Oct. 14, 2004), available at
http://www.tfhrc.gov/safety/pubs/04103 (last visited June
24, 2010). Thus, the Segway® PT can operate at much greater speeds
than wheelchairs, and the average user stands much taller than most
wheelchair users.
The Segway® PT has been the subject of debate among users,
pedestrians, disability advocates, State and local governments,
businesses, and bicyclists. The fact that the Segway® PT is not
designed primarily for use by individuals with disabilities, nor
used primarily by persons with disabilities, complicates the
question of to what extent individuals with disabilities should be
allowed to operate them in areas and facilities where other
power-driven mobility devices are not allowed. Those who question
the use of the Segway® PT in pedestrian areas argue that the speed,
size, and operating features of the devices make them too dangerous
to operate alongside pedestrians and wheelchair users.
Comments regarding whether to include the Segway® PT in the
definition of “wheelchair” were, by far, the most numerous received
in the category of comments regarding wheelchairs and other
power-driven mobility devices. Significant numbers of veterans with
disabilities, individuals with multiple sclerosis, and those
advocating on their behalf made concise statements of general
support for the inclusion of the Segway® PT in the definition of
“wheelchair.” Two veterans offered extensive comments on the topic,
along with a few advocacy and nonprofit groups and individuals with
disabilities for whom sitting is uncomfortable or impossible.
While there may be legitimate safety issues for EPAMD users and
bystanders in some circumstances, EPAMDs and other non-traditional
mobility devices can deliver real benefits to individuals with
disabilities. Among the reasons given by commenters to include the
Segway® PT in the definition of “wheelchair” were that the Segway®
PT is well-suited for individuals with particular conditions that
affect mobility including multiple sclerosis, Parkinson's disease,
chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, amputations, spinal cord
injuries, and other neurological disabilities, as well as
functional limitations, such as gait limitation, inability to sit
or discomfort in sitting, and diminished stamina issues. Such
individuals often find that EPAMDs are more comfortable and easier
to use than more traditional mobility devices and assist with
balance, circulation, and digestion in ways that wheelchairs do
not. See Rachel Metz, Disabled Embrace Segway, New
York Times, Oct. 14, 2004. Commenters specifically cited pressure
relief, reduced spasticity, increased stamina, and improved
respiratory, neurologic, and muscular health as secondary medical
benefits from being able to stand.
Other arguments for including the Segway® PT in the definition
of “wheelchair” were based on commenters' views that the Segway® PT
offers benefits not provided by wheelchairs and mobility scooters,
including its intuitive response to body movement, ability to
operate with less coordination and dexterity than is required for
many wheelchairs and mobility scooters, and smaller footprint and
turning radius as compared to most wheelchairs and mobility
scooters. Several commenters mentioned improved visibility, either
due to the Segway® PT's raised platform or simply by virtue of
being in a standing position. And finally, some commenters
advocated for the inclusion of the Segway® PT simply based on civil
rights arguments and the empowerment and self-esteem obtained from
having the power to select the mobility device of choice.
Many commenters, regardless of their position on whether to
include the Segway® PT in the definition of “wheelchair,” noted
that the Segway® PT's safety record is as good as, if not better,
than the record for wheelchairs and mobility scooters.
Most environmental, transit system, and government commenters
were opposed to including the Segway® PT in the definition of
“wheelchair” but were supportive of its inclusion as an “other
power-driven mobility device.” Their concerns about including the
Segway® PT in the definition of “wheelchair” had to do with the
safety of the operators of these devices (e.g., height
clearances on trains and sloping trails in parks) and of
pedestrians, particularly in confined and crowded facilities or in
settings where motorized devices might be unexpected; the potential
harm to the environment; the additional administrative, insurance,
liability, and defensive litigation costs; potentially detrimental
impacts on the environment and cultural and natural resources; and
the impracticality of accommodating such devices in public
transportation settings.
Other environmental, transit system, and government commenters
would have banned all fuel-powered devices as mobility devices. In
addition, these commenters would have classified non-motorized
devices as “wheelchairs” and would have categorized motorized
devices, such as the Segway® PT, battery-operated wheelchairs, and
mobility scooters as “other power-driven mobility devices.” In
support of this position, some of these commenters argued that
because their equipment and facilities have been designed to comply
with the dimensions of the “common wheelchair” upon which the ADAAG
is based, any device that is larger than the prototype wheelchair
would be misplaced in the definition of “wheelchair.”
Still others in this group of commenters wished for only a
single category of mobility devices and would have included
wheelchairs, mobility scooters, and the Segway® PT as “mobility
devices” and excluded fuel-powered devices from that
definition.
Many disability advocacy and nonprofit commenters did not
support the inclusion of the Segway® PT in the definition of
“wheelchair.” Paramount to these commenters was the maintenance of
existing protections for wheelchair users. Because there was
unanimous agreement that wheelchair use rarely, if ever, may be
restricted, these commenters strongly favored categorizing
wheelchairs separately from the Segway® PT and other power-driven
mobility devices and applying the intended-use determinant to
assign the devices to either category. They indicated that while
they support the greatest degree of access in public entities for
all persons with disabilities who require the use of mobility
devices, they recognize that under certain circumstances, allowing
the use of other power-driven mobility devices would result in a
fundamental alteration of programs, services, or activities, or run
counter to legitimate safety requirements necessary for the safe
operation of a public entity. While these groups supported
categorizing the Segway® PT as an “other power-driven mobility
device,” they universally noted that in their view, because the
Segway® PT does not present environmental concerns and is as safe
to use as, if not safer than, a wheelchair, it should be
accommodated in most circumstances.
The Department has considered all the comments and has concluded
that it should not include the Segway® PT in the definition of
“wheelchair.” The final rule provides that the test for
categorizing a device as a wheelchair or an other power-driven
mobility device is whether the device is designed primarily for use
by individuals with mobility disabilities. Mobility scooters are
included in the definition of “wheelchair” because they are
designed primarily for users with mobility disabilities. However,
because the current generation of EPAMDs, including the Segway® PT,
was designed for recreational users and not primarily for use by
individuals with mobility disabilities, the Department has decided
to continue its approach of excluding EPAMDs from the definition of
“wheelchair” and including them in the definition of “other
power-driven mobility device.” Although EPAMDs, such as the Segway®
PT, are not included in the definition of a “wheelchair,” public
entities must assess whether they can make reasonable modifications
to permit individuals with mobility disabilities to use such
devices on their premises. The Department recognizes that the
Segway® PT provides many benefits to those who use them as mobility
devices, including a measure of privacy with regard to the nature
of one's particular disability, and believes that in the vast
majority of circumstances, the application of the factors described
in § 35.137 for providing access to other-powered mobility devices
will result in the admission of the Segway® PT.
Treatment of “manually-powered mobility aids.” The
Department's NPRM did not define the term “manually-powered
mobility aids.” Instead, the NPRM included a non-exhaustive list of
examples in § 35.137(a). The NPRM queried whether the Department
should maintain this approach to manually-powered mobility aids or
whether it should adopt a more formal definition.
Only a few commenters addressed “manually-powered mobility
aids.” Virtually all commenters were in favor of maintaining a
non-exhaustive list of examples of “manually-powered mobility aids”
rather than adopting a definition of the term. Of those who
commented, a few sought clarification of the term
“manually-powered.” One commenter suggested that the term be
changed to “human-powered.” Other commenters requested that the
Department include ordinary strollers in the non-exhaustive list of
“manually-powered mobility aids.” Since strollers are not devices
designed primarily for individuals with mobility disabilities, the
Department does not consider them to be manually-powered mobility
aids; however, strollers used in the context of transporting
individuals with disabilities are subject to the same assessment
required by the ADA's title II reasonable modification standards at
§ 35.130(b)(7). The Department believes that because the existing
approach is clear and understood easily by the public, no formal
definition of the term “manually-powered mobility aids” is
required.
Definition of “other power-driven mobility device.” The
Department's NPRM defined the term “other power-driven mobility
device” in § 35.104 as “any of a large range of devices powered by
batteries, fuel, or other engines - whether or not designed solely
for use by individuals with mobility impairments - that are used by
individuals with mobility impairments for the purpose of
locomotion, including golf cars, bicycles, electronic personal
assistance mobility devices (EPAMDs), or any mobility aid designed
to operate in areas without defined pedestrian routes.” 73 FR
34466, 34504 (June 17, 2008).
Nearly all environmental, transit systems, and government
commenters who supported the two-tiered concept of mobility devices
said that the Department's definition of “other power-driven
mobility device” is overbroad because it includes fuel-powered
devices. These commenters sought a ban on fuel-powered devices in
their entirety because they believe they are inherently dangerous
and pose environmental and safety concerns. They also argued that
permitting the use of many of the contemplated other power-driven
mobility devices, fuel-powered ones especially, would fundamentally
alter the programs, services, or activities of public entities.
Advocacy, nonprofit, and several individual commenters supported
the definition of “other power-driven mobility device” because it
allows new technologies to be added in the future, maintains the
existing legal protections for wheelchairs, and recognizes that
some devices, particularly the Segway® PT, which are not designed
primarily for individuals with mobility disabilities, have
beneficial uses for individuals with mobility disabilities. Despite
support for the definition of “other power-driven mobility device,”
however, most advocacy and nonprofit commenters expressed at least
some hesitation about the inclusion of fuel-powered mobility
devices in the definition. While virtually all of these commenters
noted that a blanket exclusion of any device that falls under the
definition of “other power-driven mobility device” would violate
basic civil rights concepts, they also specifically stated that
certain devices, particularly, off-highway vehicles, cannot be
permitted in certain circumstances. They also made a distinction
between the Segway® PT and other power-driven mobility devices,
noting that the Segway® PT should be accommodated in most
circumstances because it satisfies the safety and environmental
elements of the policy analysis. These commenters indicated that
they agree that other power-driven mobility devices must be
assessed, particularly as to their environmental impact, before
they are accommodated.
Although many commenters had reservations about the inclusion of
fuel-powered devices in the definition of other power-driven
mobility devices, the Department does not want the definition to be
so narrow that it would foreclose the inclusion of new
technological developments (whether powered by fuel or by some
other means). It is for this reason that the Department has
maintained the phrase “any mobility device designed to operate in
areas without defined pedestrian routes” in the final rule's
definition of other power-driven mobility devices. The Department
believes that the limitations provided by “fundamental alteration”
and the ability to impose legitimate safety requirements will
likely prevent the use of fuel and combustion engine-driven devices
indoors, as well as in outdoor areas with heavy pedestrian traffic.
The Department notes, however, that in the future, technological
developments may result in the production of safe fuel-powered
mobility devices that do not pose environmental and safety
concerns. The final rule allows consideration to be given as to
whether the use of a fuel-powered device would create a substantial
risk of serious harm to the environment or natural or cultural
resources, and to whether the use of such a device conflicts with
Federal land management laws or regulations; this aspect of the
final rule will further limit the inclusion of fuel-powered devices
where they are not appropriate. Consequently, the Department has
maintained fuel-powered devices in the definition of “other
power-driven mobility device.” The Department has also added
language to the definition of “other power-driven mobility device”
to reiterate that the definition does not apply to Federal
wilderness areas, which are not covered by title II of the ADA; the
use of wheelchairs in such areas is governed by section 508(c)(2)
of the ADA, 42 U.S.C. 12207(c)(2).
“Qualified Interpreter”
In the NPRM, the Department proposed adding language to the
definition of “qualified interpreter” to clarify that the term
includes, but is not limited to, sign language interpreters, oral
interpreters, and cued-speech interpreters. As the Department
explained, not all interpreters are qualified for all situations.
For example, a qualified interpreter who uses American Sign
Language (ASL) is not necessarily qualified to interpret orally. In
addition, someone with only a rudimentary familiarity with sign
language or finger spelling is not qualified, nor is someone who is
fluent in sign language but unable to translate spoken
communication into ASL or to translate signed communication into
spoken words.
As further explained, different situations will require
different types of interpreters. For example, an oral interpreter
who has special skill and training to mouth a speaker's words
silently for individuals who are deaf or hard of hearing may be
necessary for an individual who was raised orally and taught to
read lips or was diagnosed with hearing loss later in life and does
not know sign language. An individual who is deaf or hard of
hearing may need an oral interpreter if the speaker's voice is
unclear, if there is a quick-paced exchange of communication
(e.g., in a meeting), or when the speaker does not directly
face the individual who is deaf or hard of hearing. A cued-speech
interpreter functions in the same manner as an oral interpreter
except that he or she also uses a hand code or cue to represent
each speech sound.
The Department received many comments regarding the proposed
modifications to the definition of “interpreter.” Many commenters
requested that the Department include within the definition a
requirement that interpreters be certified, particularly if they
reside in a State that licenses or certifies interpreters. Other
commenters opposed a certification requirement as unduly limiting,
noting that an interpreter may well be qualified even if that same
interpreter is not certified. These commenters noted the absence of
nationwide standards or universally accepted criteria for
certification.
On review of this issue, the Department has decided against
imposing a certification requirement under the ADA. It is
sufficient under the ADA that the interpreter be qualified.
However, as the Department stated in the original preamble, this
rule does not invalidate or limit State or local laws that impose
standards for interpreters that are equal to or more stringent than
those imposed by this definition. See 28 CFR part 35, app. A
at 566 (2009). For instance, the definition would not supersede any
requirement of State law for use of a certified interpreter in
court proceedings.
With respect to the proposed additions to the rule, most
commenters supported the expansion of the list of qualified
interpreters, and some advocated for the inclusion of other types
of interpreters on the list as well, such as deaf-blind
interpreters, certified deaf interpreters, and speech-to-speech
interpreters. As these commenters explained, deaf-blind
interpreters are interpreters who have specialized skills and
training to interpret for individuals who are deaf and blind;
certified deaf interpreters are deaf or hard of hearing
interpreters who work with hearing sign language interpreters to
meet the specific communication needs of deaf individuals; and
speech-to-speech interpreters have special skill and training to
interpret for individuals who have speech disabilities.
The list of interpreters in the definition of qualified
interpreter is illustrative, and the Department does not believe it
necessary or appropriate to attempt to provide an exhaustive list
of qualified interpreters. Accordingly, the Department has decided
not to expand the proposed list. However, if a deaf and blind
individual needs interpreter services, an interpreter who is
qualified to handle the needs of that individual may be required.
The guiding criterion is that the public entity must provide
appropriate auxiliary aids and services to ensure effective
communication with the individual. Commenters also suggested
various definitions for the term “cued-speech interpreters,” and
different descriptions of the tasks they performed. After reviewing
the various comments, the Department has determined that it is more
accurate and appropriate to refer to such individuals as
“cued-language transliterators.” Likewise, the Department has
changed the term “oral interpreters” to “oral transliterators.”
These two changes have been made to distinguish between sign
language interpreters, who translate one language into another
language (e.g., ASL to English and English to ASL), from
transliterators who interpret within the same language between deaf
and hearing individuals. A cued-language transliterator is an
interpreter who has special skill and training in the use of the
Cued Speech system of handshapes and placements, along with
non-manual information, such as facial expression and body
language, to show auditory information visually, including speech
and environmental sounds. An oral transliterator is an interpreter
who has special skill and training to mouth a speaker's words
silently for individuals who are deaf or hard of hearing. While the
Department included definitions for “cued-speech interpreter” and
“oral interpreter” in the regulatory text proposed in the NPRM, the
Department has decided that it is unnecessary to include such
definitions in the text of the final rule.
Many commenters questioned the proposed deletion of the
requirement that a qualified interpreter be able to interpret both
receptively and expressively, noting the importance of both these
skills. Commenters stated that this phrase was carefully crafted in
the original regulation to make certain that interpreters both (1)
are capable of understanding what a person with a disability is
saying and (2) have the skills needed to convey information back to
that individual. These are two very different skill sets and both
are equally important to achieve effective communication. For
example, in a medical setting, a sign language interpreter must
have the necessary skills to understand the grammar and syntax used
by an ASL user (receptive skills) and the ability to interpret
complicated medical information - presented by medical staff in
English - back to that individual in ASL (expressive skills). The
Department agrees and has put the phrase “both receptively and
expressively” back in the definition.
Several advocacy groups suggested that the Department make clear
in the definition of qualified interpreter that the interpreter may
appear either on-site or remotely using a video remote interpreting
(VRI) service. Given that the Department has included in this rule
both a definition of VRI services and standards that such services
must satisfy, such an addition to the definition of qualified
interpreter is appropriate.
After consideration of all relevant information submitted during
the public comment period, the Department has modified the
definition from that initially proposed in the NPRM. The final
definition now states that “[q]ualified interpreter means an
interpreter who, via a video remote interpreting (VRI) service or
an on-site appearance, is able to interpret effectively,
accurately, and impartially, both receptively and expressively,
using any necessary specialized vocabulary. Qualified interpreters
include, for example, sign language interpreters, oral
transliterators, and cued-language transliterators.”
“Qualified Reader”
The 1991 title II regulation identifies a qualified reader as an
auxiliary aid, but did not define the term. See 28 CFR
35.104(2). Based upon the Department's investigation of complaints
alleging that some entities have provided ineffective readers, the
Department proposed in the NPRM to define “qualified reader”
similarly to “qualified interpreter” to ensure that entities select
qualified individuals to read an examination or other written
information in an effective, accurate, and impartial manner. This
proposal was suggested in order to make clear to public entities
that a failure to provide a qualified reader to a person with a
disability may constitute a violation of the requirement to provide
appropriate auxiliary aids and services.
The Department received comments supporting inclusion in the
regulation of a definition of a “qualified reader.” Some commenters
suggested the Department add to the definition a requirement
prohibiting the use of a reader whose accent, diction, or
pronunciation makes full comprehension of material being read
difficult. Another commenter requested that the Department include
a requirement that the reader “will follow the directions of the
person for whom he or she is reading.” Commenters also requested
that the Department define “accurately” and “effectively” as used
in this definition.
While the Department believes that its proposed regulatory
definition adequately addresses these concerns, the Department
emphasizes that a reader, in order to be “qualified,” must be
skilled in reading the language and subject matter and must be able
to be easily understood by the individual with the disability. For
example, if a reader is reading aloud the questions for a college
microbiology examination, that reader, in order to be qualified,
must know the proper pronunciation of scientific terminology used
in the text, and must be sufficiently articulate to be easily
understood by the individual with a disability for whom he or she
is reading. In addition, the terms “effectively” and “accurately”
have been successfully used and understood in the Department's
existing definition of “qualified interpreter” since 1991 without
specific regulatory definitions. Instead, the Department has relied
upon the common use and understanding of those terms from standard
English dictionaries. Thus, the definition of “qualified reader”
has not been changed from that contained in the NPRM. The final
rule defines “qualified reader” to mean “a person who is able to
read effectively, accurately, and impartially using any necessary
specialized vocabulary.”
“Service Animal”
Although there is no specific language in the 1991 title II
regulation concerning service animals, title II entities have the
same legal obligations as title III entities to make reasonable
modifications in policies, practices, or procedures to allow
service animals when necessary in order to avoid discrimination on
the basis of disability, unless the entity can demonstrate that
making the modifications would fundamentally alter the nature of
the service, program, or activity. See 28 CFR 35.130(b)(7).
The 1991 title III regulation, 28 CFR 36.104, defines a “service
animal” as “any guide dog, signal dog, or other animal individually
trained to do work or perform tasks for the benefit of an
individual with a disability, including, but not limited to,
guiding individuals with impaired vision, alerting individuals with
impaired hearing to intruders or sounds, providing minimal
protection or rescue work, pulling a wheelchair, or fetching
dropped items.” Section 36.302(c)(1) of the 1991 title III
regulation requires that “[g]enerally, a public accommodation shall
modify policies, practices, or procedures to permit the use of a
service animal by an individual with a disability.” Section
36.302(c)(2) of the 1991 title III regulation states that “a public
accommodation [is not required] to supervise or care for a service
animal.”
The Department has issued guidance and provided technical
assistance and publications concerning service animals since the
1991 regulations became effective. In the NPRM, the Department
proposed to modify the definition of service animal, added the
definition to title II, and asked for public input on several
issues related to the service animal provisions of the title II
regulation: whether the Department should clarify the phrase
“providing minimal protection” in the definition or remove it;
whether there are any circumstances where a service animal
“providing minimal protection” would be appropriate or expected;
whether certain species should be eliminated from the definition of
“service animal,” and, if so, which types of animals should be
excluded; whether “common domestic animal” should be part of the
definition; and whether a size or weight limitation should be
imposed for common domestic animals even if the animal satisfies
the “common domestic animal” part of the NPRM definition.
The Department received extensive comments on these issues, as
well as requests to clarify the obligations of State and local
government entities to accommodate individuals with disabilities
who use service animals, and has modified the final rule in
response. In the interests of avoiding unnecessary repetition, the
Department has elected to discuss the issues raised in the NPRM
questions about service animals and the corresponding public
comments in the following discussion of the definition of “service
animal.”
The Department's final rule defines “service animal” as “any dog
that is individually trained to do work or perform tasks for the
benefit of an individual with a disability, including a physical,
sensory, psychiatric, intellectual, or other mental disability.
Other species of animals, whether wild or domestic, trained or
untrained, are not service animals for the purposes of this
definition. The work or tasks performed by a service animal must be
directly related to the individual's disability. Examples of work
or tasks include, but are not limited to, assisting individuals who
are blind or have low vision with navigation and other tasks,
alerting individuals who are deaf or hard of hearing to the
presence of people or sounds, providing non-violent protection or
rescue work, pulling a wheelchair, assisting an individual during a
seizure, alerting individuals to the presence of allergens,
retrieving items such as medicine or the telephone, providing
physical support and assistance with balance and stability to
individuals with mobility disabilities, and helping persons with
psychiatric and neurological disabilities by preventing or
interrupting impulsive or destructive behaviors. The crime
deterrent effects of an animal's presence and the provision of
emotional support, well-being, comfort, or companionship do not
constitute work or tasks for the purposes of this definition.”
This definition has been designed to clarify a key provision of
the ADA. Many covered entities indicated that they are confused
regarding their obligations under the ADA with regard to
individuals with disabilities who use service animals. Individuals
with disabilities who use trained guide or service dogs are
concerned that if untrained or unusual animals are termed “service
animals,” their own right to use guide or service dogs may become
unnecessarily restricted or questioned. Some individuals who are
not individuals with disabilities have claimed, whether
fraudulently or sincerely (albeit mistakenly), that their animals
are service animals covered by the ADA, in order to gain access to
courthouses, city or county administrative offices, and other title
II facilities. The increasing use of wild, exotic, or unusual
species, many of which are untrained, as service animals has also
added to the confusion.
Finally, individuals with disabilities who have the legal right
under the Fair Housing Act (FHAct) to use certain animals in their
homes as a reasonable accommodation to their disabilities have
assumed that their animals also qualify under the ADA. This is not
necessarily the case, as discussed below.
The Department recognizes the diverse needs and preferences of
individuals with disabilities protected under the ADA, and does not
wish to unnecessarily impede individual choice. Service animals
play an integral role in the lives of many individuals with
disabilities and, with the clarification provided by the final
rule, individuals with disabilities will continue to be able to use
their service animals as they go about their daily activities and
civic interactions. The clarification will also help to ensure that
the fraudulent or mistaken use of other animals not qualified as
service animals under the ADA will be deterred. A more detailed
analysis of the elements of the definition and the comments
responsive to the service animal provisions of the NPRM
follows.
Providing minimal protection. As previously noted, the
1991 title II regulation does not contain specific language
concerning service animals. The 1991 title III regulation included
language stating that “minimal protection” was a task that could be
performed by an individually trained service animal for the benefit
of an individual with a disability. In the Department's “ADA
Business Brief on Service Animals” (2002), the Department
interpreted the “minimal protection” language within the context of
a seizure (i.e., alerting and protecting a person who is
having a seizure). The Department received many comments in
response to the question of whether the “minimal protection”
language should be clarified. Many commenters urged the removal of
the “minimal protection” language from the service animal
definition for two reasons: (1) The phrase can be interpreted to
allow any dog that is trained to be aggressive to qualify as a
service animal simply by pairing the animal with a person with a
disability; and (2) the phrase can be interpreted to allow any
untrained pet dog to qualify as a service animal, since many
consider the mere presence of a dog to be a crime deterrent, and
thus sufficient to meet the minimal protection standard. These
commenters argued, and the Department agrees, that these
interpretations were not contemplated under the original title III
regulation, and, for the purposes of the final title II
regulations, the meaning of “minimal protection” must be made
clear.
While many commenters stated that they believe that the “minimal
protection” language should be eliminated, other commenters
recommended that the language be clarified, but retained.
Commenters favoring clarification of the term suggested that the
Department explicitly exclude the function of attack or exclude
those animals that are trained solely to be aggressive or
protective. Other commenters identified non-violent behavioral
tasks that could be construed as minimally protective, such as
interrupting self-mutilation, providing safety checks and room
searches, reminding the individual to take medications, and
protecting the individual from injury resulting from seizures or
unconsciousness.
Several commenters noted that the existing direct threat
defense, which allows the exclusion of a service animal if the
animal exhibits unwarranted or unprovoked violent behavior or poses
a direct threat, prevents the use of “attack dogs” as service
animals. One commenter noted that the use of a service animal
trained to provide “minimal protection” may impede access to care
in an emergency, for example, where the first responder, usually a
title II entity, is unable or reluctant to approach a person with a
disability because the individual's service animal is in a
protective posture suggestive of aggression.
Many organizations and individuals stated that in the general
dog training community, “protection” is code for attack or
aggression training and should be removed from the definition.
Commenters stated that there appears to be a broadly held
misconception that aggression-trained animals are appropriate
service animals for persons with post traumatic stress disorder
(PTSD). While many individuals with PTSD may benefit by using a
service animal, the work or tasks performed appropriately by such
an animal would not involve unprovoked aggression but could include
actively cuing the individual by nudging or pawing the individual
to alert to the onset of an episode and removing the individual
from the anxiety-provoking environment.
The Department recognizes that despite its best efforts to
provide clarification, the “minimal protection” language appears to
have been misinterpreted. While the Department maintains that
protection from danger is one of the key functions that service
animals perform for the benefit of persons with disabilities, the
Department recognizes that an animal individually trained to
provide aggressive protection, such as an attack dog, is not
appropriately considered a service animal. Therefore, the
Department has decided to modify the “minimal protection” language
to read “non-violent protection,” thereby excluding so-called
“attack dogs” or dogs with traditional “protection training” as
service animals. The Department believes that this modification to
the service animal definition will eliminate confusion, without
restricting unnecessarily the type of work or tasks that service
animals may perform. The Department's modification also clarifies
that the crime-deterrent effect of a dog's presence, by itself,
does not qualify as work or tasks for purposes of the service
animal definition.
Alerting to intruders. The phrase “alerting to intruders”
is related to the issues of minimal protection and the work or
tasks an animal may perform to meet the definition of a service
animal. In the original 1991 regulatory text, this phrase was
intended to identify service animals that alert individuals who are
deaf or hard of hearing to the presence of others. This language
has been misinterpreted by some to apply to dogs that are trained
specifically to provide aggressive protection, resulting in the
assertion that such training qualifies a dog as a service animal
under the ADA. The Department reiterates that title II entities are
not required to admit any animal whose use poses a direct threat
under § 35.139. In addition, the Department has decided to remove
the word “intruders” from the service animal definition and replace
it with the phrase “the presence of people or sounds.” The
Department believes this clarifies that so-called “attack training”
or other aggressive response types of training that cause a dog to
provide an aggressive response do not qualify a dog as a service
animal under the ADA.
Conversely, if an individual uses a breed of dog that is
perceived to be aggressive because of breed reputation, stereotype,
or the history or experience the observer may have with other dogs,
but the dog is under the control of the individual with a
disability and does not exhibit aggressive behavior, the title II
entity cannot exclude the individual or the animal from a State or
local government program, service, or facility. The animal can only
be removed if it engages in the behaviors mentioned in § 35.136(b)
(as revised in the final rule) or if the presence of the animal
constitutes a fundamental alteration to the nature of the service,
program, or activity of the title II entity.
Doing “work” or “performing tasks.” The NPRM proposed
that the Department maintain the requirement, first articulated in
the 1991 title III regulation, that in order to qualify as a
service animal, the animal must “perform tasks” or “do work” for
the individual with a disability. The phrases “perform tasks” and
“do work” describe what an animal must do for the benefit of an
individual with a disability in order to qualify as a service
animal.
The Department received a number of comments in response to the
NPRM proposal urging the removal of the term “do work” from the
definition of a service animal. These commenters argued that the
Department should emphasize the performance of tasks instead. The
Department disagrees. Although the common definition of work
includes the performance of tasks, the definition of work is
somewhat broader, encompassing activities that do not appear to
involve physical action.
One service dog user stated that in some cases, “critical forms
of assistance can't be construed as physical tasks,” noting that
the manifestations of “brain-based disabilities,” such as
psychiatric disorders and autism, are as varied as their physical
counterparts. The Department agrees with this statement but
cautions that unless the animal is individually trained to do
something that qualifies as work or a task, the animal is a pet or
support animal and does not qualify for coverage as a service
animal. A pet or support animal may be able to discern that the
individual is in distress, but it is what the animal is trained to
do in response to this awareness that distinguishes a service
animal from an observant pet or support animal.
The NPRM contained an example of “doing work” that stated “a
psychiatric service dog can help some individuals with dissociative
identity disorder to remain grounded in time or place.” 73 FR
34466, 34504 (June 17, 2008). Several commenters objected to the
use of this example, arguing that grounding was not a “task” and
therefore, the example inherently contradicted the basic premise
that a service animal must perform a task in order to mitigate a
disability. Other commenters stated that “grounding” should not be
included as an example of “work” because it could lead to some
individuals claiming that they should be able to use emotional
support animals in public because the dog makes them feel calm or
safe. By contrast, one commenter with experience in training
service animals explained that grounding is a trained task based
upon very specific behavioral indicators that can be observed and
measured. These tasks are based upon input from mental health
practitioners, dog trainers, and individuals with a history of
working with psychiatric service dogs.
It is the Department's view that an animal that is trained to
“ground” a person with a psychiatric disorder does work or performs
a task that would qualify it as a service animal as compared to an
untrained emotional support animal whose presence affects a
person's disability. It is the fact that the animal is trained to
respond to the individual's needs that distinguishes an animal as a
service animal. The process must have two steps: Recognition and
response. For example, if a service animal senses that a person is
about to have a psychiatric episode and it is trained to respond
for example, by nudging, barking, or removing the individual to a
safe location until the episode subsides, then the animal has
indeed performed a task or done work on behalf of the individual
with the disability, as opposed to merely sensing an event.
One commenter suggested defining the term “task,” presumably to
improve the understanding of the types of services performed by an
animal that would be sufficient to qualify the animal for coverage.
The Department believes that the common definition of the word
“task” is sufficiently clear and that it is not necessary to add to
the definitions section. However, the Department has added examples
of other kinds of work or tasks to help illustrate and provide
clarity to the definition. After careful evaluation of this issue,
the Department has concluded that the phrases “do work” and
“perform tasks” have been effective during the past two decades to
illustrate the varied services provided by service animals for the
benefit of individuals with all types of disabilities. Thus, the
Department declines to depart from its longstanding approach at
this time.
Species limitations. When the Department originally
issued its title III regulation in the early 1990s, the Department
did not define the parameters of acceptable animal species. At that
time, few anticipated the variety of animals that would be promoted
as service animals in the years to come, which ranged from pigs and
miniature horses to snakes, iguanas, and parrots. The Department
has followed this particular issue closely, keeping current with
the many unusual species of animals represented to be service
animals. Thus, the Department has decided to refine further this
aspect of the service animal definition in the final rule.
The Department received many comments from individuals and
organizations recommending species limitations. Several of these
commenters asserted that limiting the number of allowable species
would help stop erosion of the public's trust, which has resulted
in reduced access for many individuals with disabilities who use
trained service animals that adhere to high behavioral standards.
Several commenters suggested that other species would be acceptable
if those animals could meet nationally recognized behavioral
standards for trained service dogs. Other commenters asserted that
certain species of animals (e.g., reptiles) cannot be
trained to do work or perform tasks, so these animals would not be
covered.
In the NPRM, the Department used the term “common domestic
animal” in the service animal definition and excluded reptiles,
rabbits, farm animals (including horses, miniature horses, ponies,
pigs, and goats), ferrets, amphibians, and rodents from the service
animal definition. 73 FR 34466, 34478 (June 17, 2008). However, the
term “common domestic animal” is difficult to define with precision
due to the increase in the number of domesticated species. Also,
several State and local laws define a “domestic” animal as an
animal that is not wild. The Department agrees with commenters'
views that limiting the number and types of species recognized as
service animals will provide greater predictability for State and
local government entities as well as added assurance of access for
individuals with disabilities who use dogs as service animals. As a
consequence, the Department has decided to limit this rule's
coverage of service animals to dogs, which are the most common
service animals used by individuals with disabilities.
Wild animals, monkeys, and other nonhuman primates.
Numerous business entities endorsed a narrow definition of
acceptable service animal species, and asserted that there are
certain animals (e.g., reptiles) that cannot be trained to
do work or perform tasks. Other commenters suggested that the
Department should identify excluded animals, such as birds and
llamas, in the final rule. Although one commenter noted that wild
animals bred in captivity should be permitted to be service
animals, the Department has decided to make clear that all wild
animals, whether born or bred in captivity or in the wild, are
eliminated from coverage as service animals. The Department
believes that this approach reduces risks to health or safety
attendant with wild animals. Some animals, such as certain nonhuman
primates including certain monkeys, pose a direct threat; their
behavior can be unpredictably aggressive and violent without notice
or provocation. The American Veterinary Medical Association (AVMA)
issued a position statement advising against the use of monkeys as
service animals, stating that “[t]he AVMA does not support the use
of nonhuman primates as assistance animals because of animal
welfare concerns, and the potential for serious injury and zoonotic
[animal to human disease transmission] risks.” AVMA Position
Statement, Nonhuman Primates as Assistance Animals, (2005)
available at
http://www.avma.org/issues/policy/nonhuman_primates.asp
(last visited June 24, 2010).
An organization that trains capuchin monkeys to provide in-home
services to individuals with paraplegia and quadriplegia was in
substantial agreement with the AVMA's views but requested a limited
recognition in the service animal definition for the capuchin
monkeys it trains to provide assistance for persons with
disabilities. The organization commented that its trained capuchin
monkeys undergo scrupulous veterinary examinations to ensure that
the animals pose no health risks, and are used by individuals with
disabilities exclusively in their homes. The organization
acknowledged that the capuchin monkeys it trains are not
necessarily suitable for use in State or local government
facilities. The organization noted that several State and local
government entities have local zoning, licensing, health, and
safety laws that prohibit nonhuman primates, and that these
prohibitions would prevent individuals with disabilities from using
these animals even in their homes.
The organization argued that including capuchin monkeys under
the service animal umbrella would make it easier for individuals
with disabilities to obtain reasonable modifications of State and
local licensing, health, and safety laws that would permit the use
of these monkeys. The organization argued that this limited
modification to the service animal definition was warranted in view
of the services these monkeys perform, which enable many
individuals with paraplegia and quadriplegia to live and function
with increased independence.
The Department has carefully considered the potential risks
associated with the use of nonhuman primates as service animals in
State and local government facilities, as well as the information
provided to the Department about the significant benefits that
trained capuchin monkeys provide to certain individuals with
disabilities in residential settings. The Department has
determined, however, that nonhuman primates, including capuchin
monkeys, will not be recognized as service animals for purposes of
this rule because of their potential for disease transmission and
unpredictable aggressive behavior. The Department believes that
these characteristics make nonhuman primates unsuitable for use as
service animals in the context of the wide variety of public
settings subject to this rule. As the organization advocating the
inclusion of capuchin monkeys acknowledges, capuchin monkeys are
not suitable for use in public facilities.
The Department emphasizes that it has decided only that capuchin
monkeys will not be included in the definition of service animals
for purposes of its regulation implementing the ADA. This decision
does not have any effect on the extent to which public entities are
required to allow the use of such monkeys under other Federal
statutes. For example, under the FHAct, an individual with a
disability may have the right to have an animal other than a dog in
his or her home if the animal qualifies as a “reasonable
accommodation” that is necessary to afford the individual equal
opportunity to use and enjoy a dwelling, assuming that the use of
the animal does not pose a direct threat. In some cases, the right
of an individual to have an animal under the FHAct may conflict
with State or local laws that prohibit all individuals, with or
without disabilities, from owning a particular species. However, in
this circumstance, an individual who wishes to request a reasonable
modification of the State or local law must do so under the FHAct,
not the ADA.
Having considered all of the comments about which species should
qualify as service animals under the ADA, the Department has
determined the most reasonable approach is to limit acceptable
species to dogs.
Size or weight limitations. The vast majority of
commenters did not support a size or weight limitation. Commenters
were typically opposed to a size or weight limit because many tasks
performed by service animals require large, strong dogs. For
instance, service animals may perform tasks such as providing
balance and support or pulling a wheelchair. Small animals may not
be suitable for large adults. The weight of the service animal user
is often correlated with the size and weight of the service animal.
Others were concerned that adding a size and weight limit would
further complicate the difficult process of finding an appropriate
service animal. One commenter noted that there is no need for a
limit because “if, as a practical matter, the size or weight of an
individual's service animal creates a direct threat or fundamental
alteration to a particular public entity or accommodation, there
are provisions that allow for the animal's exclusion or removal.”
Some common concerns among commenters in support of a size and
weight limit were that a larger animal may be less able to fit in
various areas with its handler, such as toilet rooms and public
seating areas, and that larger animals are more difficult to
control.
Balancing concerns expressed in favor of and against size and
weight limitations, the Department has determined that such
limitations would not be appropriate. Many individuals of larger
stature require larger dogs. The Department believes it would be
inappropriate to deprive these individuals of the option of using a
service dog of the size required to provide the physical support
and stability these individuals may need to function independently.
Since large dogs have always served as service animals, continuing
their use should not constitute fundamental alterations or impose
undue burdens on title II entities.
Breed limitations. A few commenters suggested that
certain breeds of dogs should not be allowed to be used as service
animals. Some suggested that the Department should defer to local
laws restricting the breeds of dogs that individuals who reside in
a community may own. Other commenters opposed breed restrictions,
stating that the breed of a dog does not determine its propensity
for aggression and that aggressive and non-aggressive dogs exist in
all breeds.
The Department does not believe that it is either appropriate or
consistent with the ADA to defer to local laws that prohibit
certain breeds of dogs based on local concerns that these breeds
may have a history of unprovoked aggression or attacks. Such
deference would have the effect of limiting the rights of persons
with disabilities under the ADA who use certain service animals
based on where they live rather than on whether the use of a
particular animal poses a direct threat to the health and safety of
others. Breed restrictions differ significantly from jurisdiction
to jurisdiction. Some jurisdictions have no breed restrictions.
Others have restrictions that, while well-meaning, have the
unintended effect of screening out the very breeds of dogs that
have successfully served as service animals for decades without a
history of the type of unprovoked aggression or attacks that would
pose a direct threat, e.g., German Shepherds. Other
jurisdictions prohibit animals over a certain weight, thereby
restricting breeds without invoking an express breed ban. In
addition, deference to breed restrictions contained in local laws
would have the unacceptable consequence of restricting travel by an
individual with a disability who uses a breed that is acceptable
and poses no safety hazards in the individual's home jurisdiction
but is nonetheless banned by other jurisdictions. State and local
government entities have the ability to determine, on a
case-by-case basis, whether a particular service animal can be
excluded based on that particular animal's actual behavior or
history - not based on fears or generalizations about how an animal
or breed might behave. This ability to exclude an animal whose
behavior or history evidences a direct threat is sufficient to
protect health and safety.
Recognition of psychiatric service animals but not “emotional
support animals.” The definition of “service animal” in the
NPRM stated the Department's longstanding position that emotional
support animals are not included in the definition of “service
animal.” The proposed text in § 35.104 provided that “[a]nimals
whose sole function is to provide emotional support, comfort,
therapy, companionship, therapeutic benefits or to promote
emotional well-being are not service animals.” 73 FR 34466, 34504
(June 17, 2008).
Many advocacy organizations expressed concern and disagreed with
the exclusion of comfort and emotional support animals. Others have
been more specific, stating that individuals with disabilities may
need their emotional support animals in order to have equal access.
Some commenters noted that individuals with disabilities use
animals that have not been trained to perform tasks directly
related to their disability. These animals do not qualify as
service animals under the ADA. These are emotional support or
comfort animals.
Commenters asserted that excluding categories such as “comfort”
and “emotional support” animals recognized by laws such as the
FHAct or the Air Carrier Access Act (ACAA) is confusing and
burdensome. Other commenters noted that emotional support and
comfort animals perform an important function, asserting that
animal companionship helps individuals who experience depression
resulting from multiple sclerosis.
Some commenters explained the benefits emotional support animals
provide, including emotional support, comfort, therapy,
companionship, therapeutic benefits, and the promotion of emotional
well-being. They contended that without the presence of an
emotional support animal in their lives they would be disadvantaged
and unable to participate in society. These commenters were
concerned that excluding this category of animals will lead to
discrimination against, and the excessive questioning of,
individuals with non-visible or non-apparent disabilities. Other
commenters expressing opposition to the exclusion of individually
trained “comfort” or “emotional support” animals asserted that the
ability to soothe or de-escalate and control emotion is “work” that
benefits the individual with the disability.
Many commenters requested that the Department carve out an
exception that permits current or former members of the military to
use emotional support animals. They asserted that a significant
number of service members returning from active combat duty have
adjustment difficulties due to combat, sexual assault, or other
traumatic experiences while on active duty. Commenters noted that
some current or former members of the military service have been
prescribed animals for conditions such as PTSD. One commenter
stated that service women who were sexually assaulted while in the
military use emotional support animals to help them feel safe
enough to step outside their homes. The Department recognizes that
many current and former members of the military have disabilities
as a result of service-related injuries that may require emotional
support and that such individuals can benefit from the use of an
emotional support animal and could use such animal in their home
under the FHAct. However, having carefully weighed the issues, the
Department believes that its final rule appropriately addresses the
balance of issues and concerns of both the individual with a
disability and the public entity. The Department also notes that
nothing in this part prohibits a public entity from allowing
current or former military members or anyone else with disabilities
to utilize emotional support animals if it wants to do so.
Commenters asserted the view that if an animal's “mere presence”
legitimately provides such benefits to an individual with a
disability and if those benefits are necessary to provide equal
opportunity given the facts of the particular disability, then such
an animal should qualify as a “service animal.” Commenters noted
that the focus should be on the nature of a person's disability,
the difficulties the disability may impose and whether the
requested accommodation would legitimately address those
difficulties, not on evaluating the animal involved. The Department
understands this approach has benefitted many individuals under the
FHAct and analogous State law provisions, where the presence of
animals poses fewer health and safety issues, and where emotional
support animals provide assistance that is unique to residential
settings. The Department believes, however, that the presence of
such animals is not required in the context of title II entities
such as courthouses, State and local government administrative
buildings, and similar title II facilities.
Under the Department's previous regulatory framework, some
individuals and entities assumed that the requirement that service
animals must be individually trained to do work or perform tasks
excluded all individuals with mental disabilities from having
service animals. Others assumed that any person with a psychiatric
condition whose pet provided comfort to them was covered by the
1991 title II regulation. The Department reiterates that
psychiatric service animals that are trained to do work or perform
a task for individuals whose disability is covered by the ADA are
protected by the Department's present regulatory approach.
Psychiatric service animals can be trained to perform a variety of
tasks that assist individuals with disabilities to detect the onset
of psychiatric episodes and ameliorate their effects. Tasks
performed by psychiatric service animals may include reminding
individuals to take medicine, providing safety checks or room
searches for individuals with PTSD, interrupting self-mutilation,
and removing disoriented individuals from dangerous situations.
The difference between an emotional support animal and a
psychiatric service animal is the work or tasks that the animal
performs. Traditionally, service dogs worked as guides for
individuals who were blind or had low vision. Since the original
regulation was promulgated, service animals have been trained to
assist individuals with many different types of disabilities.
In the final rule, the Department has retained its position on
the exclusion of emotional support animals from the definition of
“service animal.” The definition states that “[t]he provision of
emotional support, well-being, comfort, or companionship, * * *
do[es] not constitute work or tasks for the purposes of this
definition.” The Department notes, however, that the exclusion of
emotional support animals from coverage in the final rule does not
mean that individuals with psychiatric or mental disabilities
cannot use service animals that meet the regulatory definition. The
final rule defines service animal as follows: “[s]ervice animal
means any dog that is individually trained to do work or perform
tasks for the benefit of an individual with a disability, including
a physical, sensory, psychiatric, intellectual, or other mental
disability.” This language simply clarifies the Department's
longstanding position.
The Department's position is based on the fact that the title II
and title III regulations govern a wider range of public settings
than the housing and transportation settings for which the
Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) and DOT
regulations allow emotional support animals or comfort animals. The
Department recognizes that there are situations not governed by the
title II and title III regulations, particularly in the context of
residential settings and transportation, where there may be a legal
obligation to permit the use of animals that do not qualify as
service animals under the ADA, but whose presence nonetheless
provides necessary emotional support to persons with disabilities.
Accordingly, other Federal agency regulations, case law, and
possibly State or local laws governing those situations may provide
appropriately for increased access for animals other than service
animals as defined under the ADA. Public officials, housing
providers, and others who make decisions relating to animals in
residential and transportation settings should consult the Federal,
State, and local laws that apply in those areas (e.g., the
FHAct regulations of HUD and the ACAA) and not rely on the ADA as a
basis for reducing those obligations.
Retain term “service animal.” Some commenters asserted
that the term “assistance animal” is a term of art and should
replace the term “service animal.” However, the majority of
commenters preferred the term “service animal” because it is more
specific. The Department has decided to retain the term “service
animal” in the final rule. While some agencies, like HUD, use the
term “assistance animal,” “assistive animal,” or “support animal,”
these terms are used to denote a broader category of animals than
is covered by the ADA. The Department has decided that changing the
term used in the final rule would create confusion, particularly in
view of the broader parameters for coverage under the FHAct,
cf., preamble to HUD's Final Rule for Pet Ownership for the
Elderly and Persons with Disabilities, 73 FR 63834-38 (Oct. 27,
2008); HUD Handbook No. 4350.3 Rev-1, Chapter 2, Occupancy
Requirements of Subsidized Multifamily Housing Programs (June
2007), available at
http://www.hud.gov/offices/adm/hudclips/handbooks/hsgh/4350.3
(last visited June 24, 2010). Moreover, as discussed above, the
Department's definition of “service animal” in the title II final
rule does not affect the rights of individuals with disabilities
who use assistance animals in their homes under the FHAct or who
use “emotional support animals” that are covered under the ACAA and
its implementing regulations. See 14 CFR 382.7 et seq.;
see also Department of Transportation, Guidance Concerning
Service Animals in Air Transportation, 68 FR 24874, 24877 (May
9, 2003) (discussing accommodation of service animals and emotional
support animals on aircraft).
“Video Remote Interpreting” (VRI) Services
In the NPRM, the Department proposed adding Video Interpreting
Services (VIS) to the list of auxiliary aids available to provide
effective communication described in § 35.104. In the preamble to
the NPRM, VIS was defined as “a technology composed of a video
phone, video monitors, cameras, a high-speed Internet connection,
and an interpreter. The video phone provides video transmission to
a video monitor that permits the individual who is deaf or hard of
hearing to view and sign to a video interpreter (i.e., a
live interpreter in another location), who can see and sign to the
individual through a camera located on or near the monitor, while
others can communicate by speaking. The video monitor can display a
split screen of two live images, with the interpreter in one image
and the individual who is deaf or hard of hearing in the other
image.” 73 FR 34446, 34479 (June 17, 2008). Comments from advocacy
organizations and individuals unanimously requested that the
Department use the term “video remote interpreting (VRI),” instead
of VIS, for consistency with Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) regulations. See FCC Public Notice, DA-0502417 (Sept.
7, 2005), and with common usage by consumers. The Department has
made that change throughout the regulation to avoid confusion and
to make the regulation more consistent with existing
regulations.
Many commenters also requested that the Department distinguish
between VRI and “video relay service (VRS).” Both VRI and VRS use a
remote interpreter who is able to see and communicate with a deaf
person and a hearing person, and all three individuals may be
connected by a video link. VRI is a fee-based interpreting service
conveyed via videoconferencing where at least one person, typically
the interpreter, is at a separate location. VRI can be provided as
an on-demand service or by appointment. VRI normally involves a
contract in advance for the interpreter who is usually paid by the
covered entity.
VRS is a telephone service that enables persons with
disabilities to use the telephone to communicate using video
connections and is a more advanced form of relay service than the
traditional voice to text telephones (TTY) relay systems that were
recognized in the 1991 title II regulation. More specifically, VRS
is a video relay service using interpreters connected to callers by
video hook-up and is designed to provide telephone services to
persons who are deaf and use American Sign Language that are
functionally equivalent to those provided to users who are hearing.
VRS is funded through the Interstate Telecommunications Relay
Services Fund and overseen by the FCC. See 47 CFR
64.601(a)(26). There are no fees for callers to use the VRS
interpreters and the video connection, although there may be
relatively inexpensive initial costs to the title II entities to
purchase the videophone or camera for on-line video connection, or
other equipment to connect to the VRS service. The FCC has made
clear that VRS functions as a telephone service and is not intended
to be used for interpreting services where both parties are in the
same room; the latter is reserved for VRI. The Department agrees
that VRS cannot be used as a substitute for in-person interpreters
or for VRI in situations that would not, absent one party's
disability, entail use of the telephone.
Many commenters strongly recommended limiting the use of VRI to
circumstances where it will provide effective communication.
Commenters from advocacy groups and persons with disabilities
expressed concern that VRI may not always be appropriate to provide
effective communication, especially in hospitals and emergency
rooms. Examples were provided of patients who are unable to see the
video monitor because they are semi-conscious or unable to focus on
the video screen; other examples were given of cases where the
video monitor is out of the sightline of the patient or the image
is out of focus; still other examples were given of patients who
could not see the image because the signal was interrupted, causing
unnatural pauses in the communication, or the image was grainy or
otherwise unclear. Many commenters requested more explicit
guidelines on the use of VRI, and some recommended requirements for
equipment maintenance, high-speed, wide-bandwidth video links using
dedicated lines or wireless systems, and training of staff using
VRI, especially in hospital and health care situations. Several
major organizations requested a requirement to include the
interpreter's face, head, arms, hands, and eyes in all
transmissions. Finally, one State agency asked for additional
guidance, outreach, and mandated advertising about the availability
of VRI in title II situations so that local government entities
would budget for and facilitate the use of VRI in libraries,
schools, and other places.
After consideration of the comments and the Department's own
research and experience, the Department has determined that VRI can
be an effective method of providing interpreting services in
certain circumstances, but not in others. For example, VRI should
be effective in many situations involving routine medical care, as
well as in the emergency room where urgent care is important, but
no in-person interpreter is available; however, VRI may not be
effective in situations involving surgery or other medical
procedures where the patient is limited in his or her ability to
see the video screen. Similarly, VRI may not be effective in
situations where there are multiple people in a room and the
information exchanged is highly complex and fast-paced. The
Department recognizes that in these and other situations, such as
where communication is needed for persons who are deaf-blind, it
may be necessary to summon an in-person interpreter to assist
certain individuals. To ensure that VRI is effective in situations
where it is appropriate, the Department has established performance
standards in § 35.160(d).
Subpart B - General Requirements Section 35.130(h) Safety.
Section 36.301(b) of the 1991 title III regulation provides that
a public accommodation “may impose legitimate safety requirements
that are necessary for safe operation. Safety requirements must be
based on actual risks, and not on mere speculation, stereotypes, or
generalizations about individuals with disabilities.” 28 CFR
36.301(b). Although the 1991 title II regulation did not include
similar language, the Department's 1993 ADA Title II Technical
Assistance Manual at II-3.5200 makes clear the Department's view
that public entities also have the right to impose legitimate
safety requirements necessary for the safe operation of services,
programs, or activities. To ensure consistency between the title II
and title III regulations, the Department has added a new §
35.130(h) in the final rule incorporating this longstanding
position relating to imposition of legitimate safety
requirements.
Section 35.133 Maintenance of accessible features.
Section 35.133 in the 1991 title II regulation provides that a
public entity must maintain in operable working condition those
features of facilities and equipment that are required to be
readily accessible to and usable by qualified individuals with
disabilities. See 28 CFR 35.133(a). In the NPRM, the
Department clarified the application of this provision and proposed
one change to the section to address the discrete situation in
which the scoping requirements provided in the 2010 Standards
reduce the number of required elements below the requirements of
the 1991 Standards. In that discrete event, a public entity may
reduce such accessible features in accordance with the requirements
in the 2010 Standards.
The Department received only four comments on this proposed
amendment. None of the commenters opposed the change. In the final
rule, the Department has revised the section to make it clear that
if the 2010 Standards reduce either the technical requirements or
the number of required accessible elements below that required by
the 1991 Standards, then the public entity may reduce the technical
requirements or the number of accessible elements in a covered
facility in accordance with the requirements of the 2010
Standards.
One commenter urged the Department to amend § 35.133(b) to
expand the language of the section to restocking of shelves as a
permissible activity for isolated or temporary interruptions in
service or access. It is the Department's position that a temporary
interruption that blocks an accessible route, such as restocking of
shelves, is already permitted by § 35.133(b), which clarifies that
“isolated or temporary interruptions in service or access due to
maintenance or repairs” are permitted. Therefore, the Department
will not make any additional changes in the final rule to the
language of § 35.133(b) other than those discussed in the preceding
paragraph.
Section 35.136 Service animals.
The 1991 title II regulation states that “[a] public entity
shall make reasonable modifications in policies, practices, or
procedures when the modifications are necessary to avoid
discrimination on the basis of disability, unless the public entity
can demonstrate that making the modifications would fundamentally
alter the nature of the service, program or activity.” 28 CFR
130(b)(7). Unlike the title III regulation, the 1991 title II
regulation did not contain a specific provision addressing service
animals.
In the NPRM, the Department stated the intention of providing
the broadest feasible access to individuals with disabilities and
their service animals, unless a public entity can demonstrate that
making the modifications to policies excluding animals would
fundamentally alter the nature of the public entity's service,
program, or activity. The Department proposed creating a new §
35.136 addressing service animals that was intended to retain the
scope of the 1991 title III regulation at § 36.302(c), while
clarifying the Department's longstanding policies and
interpretations, as outlined in published technical assistance,
Commonly Asked Questions About Service Animals in Places of
Business (1996), available at
http://www.ada.gov/qasrvc.ftm and ADA Guide for Small
Businesses (1999), available at
http://www.ada.gov/smbustxt.htm, and to add that a public
entity may exclude a service animal in certain circumstances where
the service animal fails to meet certain behavioral standards. The
Department received extensive comments in response to proposed §
35.136 from individuals, disability advocacy groups, organizations
involved in training service animals, and public entities. Those
comments and the Department's response are discussed below.
Exclusion of service animals. In the NPRM, the Department
proposed incorporating the title III regulatory language of §
36.302(c) into new § 35.136(a), which states that “[g]enerally, a
public entity shall modify its policies, practices, or procedures
to permit the use of a service animal by an individual with a
disability, unless the public entity can demonstrate that the use
of a service animal would fundamentally alter the public entity's
service, program, or activity.” The final rule retains this
language with some modifications.
In addition, in the NPRM, the Department proposed clarifying
those circumstances where otherwise eligible service animals may be
excluded by public entities from their programs or facilities. The
Department proposed in § 35.136(b)(1) of the NPRM that a public
entity may ask an individual with a disability to remove a service
animal from a title II service, program, or activity if: “[t]he
animal is out of control and the animal's handler does not take
effective action to control it.” 73 FR 34466, 34504 (June 17,
2008).
The Department has long held that a service animal must be under
the control of the handler at all times. Commenters overwhelmingly
were in favor of this language, but noted that there are occasions
when service animals are provoked to disruptive or aggressive
behavior by agitators or troublemakers, as in the case of a blind
individual whose service dog is taunted or pinched. While all
service animals are trained to ignore and overcome these types of
incidents, misbehavior in response to provocation is not always
unreasonable. In circumstances where a service animal misbehaves or
responds reasonably to a provocation or injury, the public entity
must give the handler a reasonable opportunity to gain control of
the animal. Further, if the individual with a disability asserts
that the animal was provoked or injured, or if the public entity
otherwise has reason to suspect that provocation or injury has
occurred, the public entity should seek to determine the facts and,
if provocation or injury occurred, the public entity should take
effective steps to prevent further provocation or injury, which may
include asking the provocateur to leave the public entity. This
language is unchanged in the final rule.
The NPRM also proposed language at § 35.136(b)(2) to permit a
public entity to exclude a service animal if the animal is not
housebroken (i.e., trained so that, absent illness or
accident, the animal controls its waste elimination) or the
animal's presence or behavior fundamentally alters the nature of
the service the public entity provides (e.g., repeated
barking during a live performance). Several commenters were
supportive of this NPRM language, but cautioned against
overreaction by the public entity in these instances. One commenter
noted that animals get sick, too, and that accidents occasionally
happen. In these circumstances, simple clean up typically addresses
the incident. Commenters noted that the public entity must be
careful when it excludes a service animal on the basis of
“fundamental alteration,” asserting for example that a public
entity should not exclude a service animal for barking in an
environment where other types of noise, such as loud cheering or a
child crying, is tolerated. The Department maintains that the
appropriateness of an exclusion can be assessed by reviewing how a
public entity addresses comparable situations that do not involve a
service animal. The Department has retained in § 35.136(b) of the
final rule the exception requiring animals to be housebroken. The
Department has not retained the specific NPRM language stating that
animals can be excluded if their presence or behavior fundamentally
alters the nature of the service provided by the public entity,
because the Department believes that this exception is covered by
the general reasonable modification requirement contained in §
35.130(b)(7).
The NPRM also proposed at § 35.136(b)(3) that a service animal
can be excluded where “[t]he animal poses a direct threat to the
health or safety of others that cannot be eliminated by reasonable
modifications.” 73 FR 34466, 34504 (June 17, 2008). Commenters were
universally supportive of this provision as it makes express the
discretion of a public entity to exclude a service animal that
poses a direct threat. Several commenters cautioned against the
overuse of this provision and suggested that the Department provide
an example of the rule's application. The Department has decided
not to include regulatory language specifically stating that a
service animal can be excluded if it poses a direct threat. The
Department believes that the addition of new § 35.139, which
incorporates the language of the title III provisions at § 36.302
relating to the general defense of direct threat, is sufficient to
establish the availability of this defense to public entities.
Access to a public entity following the proper exclusion of a
service animal. The NPRM proposed that in the event a public
entity properly excludes a service animal, the public entity must
give the individual with a disability the opportunity to access the
programs, services, and facilities of the public entity without the
service animal. Most commenters welcomed this provision as a common
sense approach. These commenters noted that they do not wish to
preclude individuals with disabilities from the full and equal
enjoyment of the State or local government's programs, services, or
facilities, simply because of an isolated problem with a service
animal. The Department has elected to retain this provision in §
35.136(a).
Other requirements. The NPRM also proposed that the
regulation include the following requirements: that the work or
tasks performed by the service animal must be directly related to
the handler's disability; that a service animal must be
individually trained to do work or perform a task, be housebroken,
and be under the control of the handler; and that a service animal
must have a harness, leash, or other tether. Most commenters
addressed at least one of these issues in their responses. Most
agreed that these provisions are important to clarify further the
1991 service animal regulation. The Department has moved the
requirement that the work or tasks performed by the service animal
must be related directly to the individual's disability to the
definition of ‘service animal’ in § 35.104. In addition, the
Department has modified the proposed language in § 35.136(d)
relating to the handler's control of the animal with a harness,
leash, or other tether to state that “[a] service animal shall have
a harness, leash, or other tether, unless either the handler is
unable because of a disability to use a harness, leash, or other
tether, or the use of a harness, leash, or other tether would
interfere with the service animal's safe, effective performance of
work or tasks, in which case the service animal must be otherwise
under the handler's control (e.g., voice control, signals,
or other effective means).” The Department has retained the
requirement that the service animal must be individually trained
(see Appendix A discussion of § 35.104, definition of
“service animal”), as well as the requirement that the service
animal be housebroken.
Responsibility for supervision and care of a service
animal. The NPRM proposed language at § 35.136(e) stating that
“[a] public entity is not responsible for caring for or supervising
a service animal.” 73 FR 34466, 34504 (June 17, 2008). Most
commenters did not address this particular provision. The
Department recognizes that there are occasions when a person with a
disability is confined to bed in a hospital for a period of time.
In such an instance, the individual may not be able to walk or feed
the service animal. In such cases, if the individual has a family
member, friend, or other person willing to take on these
responsibilities in the place of the individual with disabilities,
the individual's obligation to be responsible for the care and
supervision of the service animal would be satisfied. The language
of this section is retained, with minor modifications, in §
35.136(e) of the final rule.
Inquiries about service animals. The NPRM proposed
language at § 35.136(f) setting forth parameters about how a public
entity may determine whether an animal qualifies as a service
animal. The proposed section stated that a public entity may ask if
the animal is required because of a disability and what task or
work the animal has been trained to do but may not require proof of
service animal certification or licensing. Such inquiries are
limited to eliciting the information necessary to make a decision
without requiring disclosure of confidential disability-related
information that a State or local government entity does not need.
This language is consistent with the policy guidance outlined in
two Department publications, Commonly Asked Questions about
Service Animals in Places of Business (1996), available at
http://www.ada.gov/qasrvc.htm, and ADA Guide for Small
Businesses, (1999), available at
http://www.ada.gov/smbustxt.htm.
Although some commenters contended that the NPRM service animal
provisions leave unaddressed the issue of how a public entity can
distinguish between a psychiatric service animal, which is covered
under the final rule, and a comfort animal, which is not, other
commenters noted that the Department's published guidance has
helped public entities to distinguish between service animals and
pets on the basis of an individual's response to these questions.
Accordingly, the Department has retained the NPRM language
incorporating its guidance concerning the permissible questions
into the final rule.
Some commenters suggested that a title II entity be allowed to
require current documentation, no more than one year old, on
letterhead from a mental health professional stating the following:
(1) That the individual seeking to use the animal has a mental
health-related disability; (2) that having the animal accompany the
individual is necessary to the individual's mental health or
treatment or to assist the person otherwise; and (3) that the
person providing the assessment of the individual is a licensed
mental health professional and the individual seeking to use the
animal is under that individual's professional care. These
commenters asserted that this will prevent abuse and ensure that
individuals with legitimate needs for psychiatric service animals
may use them. The Department believes that this proposal would
treat persons with psychiatric, intellectual, and other mental
disabilities less favorably than persons with physical or sensory
disabilities. The proposal would also require persons with
disabilities to obtain medical documentation and carry it with them
any time they seek to engage in ordinary activities of daily life
in their communities - something individuals without disabilities
have not been required to do. Accordingly, the Department has
concluded that a documentation requirement of this kind would be
unnecessary, burdensome, and contrary to the spirit, intent, and
mandates of the ADA.
Areas of a public entity open to the public, participants in
services, programs, or activities, or invitees. The NPRM
proposed at § 35.136(g) that an individual with a disability who
uses a service animal has the same right of access to areas of a
title II entity as members of the public, participants in services,
programs, or activities, or invitees. Commenters indicated that
allowing individuals with disabilities to go with their service
animals into the same areas as members of the public, participants
in programs, services, or activities, or invitees is accepted
practice by most State and local government entities. The
Department has included a slightly modified version of this
provision in § 35.136(g) of the final rule.
The Department notes that under the final rule, a healthcare
facility must also permit a person with a disability to be
accompanied by a service animal in all areas of the facility in
which that person would otherwise be allowed. There are some
exceptions, however. The Department follows the guidance of the
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) on the use of
service animals in a hospital setting. Zoonotic diseases can be
transmitted to humans through bites, scratches, direct contact,
arthropod vectors, or aerosols.
Consistent with CDC guidance, it is generally appropriate to
exclude a service animal from limited-access areas that employ
general infection-control measures, such as operating rooms and
burn units. See Centers for Disease Control and Prevention,
Guidelines for Environmental Infection Control in Health-Care
Facilities: Recommendations of CDC and the Healthcare Infection
Control Practices Advisory Committee (June 2003), available at
http://www.cdc.gov/hicpac/pdf/guidelines/eic_in_HCF_03.pdf
(last visited June 24, 2010). A service animal may accompany its
handler to such areas as admissions and discharge offices, the
emergency room, inpatient and outpatient rooms, examining and
diagnostic rooms, clinics, rehabilitation therapy areas, the
cafeteria and vending areas, the pharmacy, restrooms, and all other
areas of the facility where healthcare personnel, patients, and
visitors are permitted without added precaution.
Prohibition against surcharges for use of a service
animal. In the NPRM, the Department proposed to incorporate the
previously mentioned policy guidance, which prohibits the
assessment of a surcharge for the use of a service animal, into
proposed § 35.136(h). Several commenters agreed that this provision
makes clear the obligation of a public entity to admit an
individual with a service animal without surcharges, and that any
additional costs imposed should be factored into the overall cost
of administering a program, service, or activity, and passed on as
a charge to all participants, rather than an individualized
surcharge to the service animal user. Commenters also noted that
service animal users cannot be required to comply with other
requirements that are not generally applicable to other persons. If
a public entity normally charges individuals for the damage they
cause, an individual with a disability may be charged for damage
caused by his or her service animal. The Department has retained
this language, with minor modifications, in the final rule at §
35.136(h).
Training requirement. Certain commenters recommended the
adoption of formal training requirements for service animals. The
Department has rejected this approach and will not impose any type
of formal training requirements or certification process, but will
continue to require that service animals be individually trained to
do work or perform tasks for the benefit of an individual with a
disability. While some groups have urged the Department to modify
this position, the Department has determined that such a
modification would not serve the full array of individuals with
disabilities who use service animals, since individuals with
disabilities may be capable of training, and some have trained,
their service animal to perform tasks or do work to accommodate
their disability. A training and certification requirement would
increase the expense of acquiring a service animal and might limit
access to service animals for individuals with limited financial
resources.
Some commenters proposed specific behavior or training standards
for service animals, arguing that without such standards, the
public has no way to differentiate between untrained pets and
service animals. Many of the suggested behavior or training
standards were lengthy and detailed. The Department believes that
this rule addresses service animal behavior sufficiently by
including provisions that address the obligations of the service
animal user and the circumstances under which a service animal may
be excluded, such as the requirements that an animal be housebroken
and under the control of its handler.
Miniature horses. The Department has been persuaded by
commenters and the available research to include a provision that
would require public entities to make reasonable modifications to
policies, practices, or procedures to permit the use of a miniature
horse by a person with a disability if the miniature horse has been
individually trained to do work or perform tasks for the benefit of
the individual with a disability. The traditional service animal is
a dog, which has a long history of guiding individuals who are
blind or have low vision, and over time dogs have been trained to
perform an even wider variety of services for individuals with all
types of disabilities. However, an organization that developed a
program to train miniature horses, modeled on the program used for
guide dogs, began training miniature horses in 1991.
Although commenters generally supported the species limitations
proposed in the NPRM, some were opposed to the exclusion of
miniature horses from the definition of a service animal. These
commenters noted that these animals have been providing assistance
to persons with disabilities for many years. Miniature horses were
suggested by some commenters as viable alternatives to dogs for
individuals with allergies, or for those whose religious beliefs
preclude the use of dogs. Another consideration mentioned in favor
of the use of miniature horses is the longer life span and strength
of miniature horses in comparison to dogs. Specifically, miniature
horses can provide service for more than 25 years while dogs can
provide service for approximately 7 years, and, because of their
strength, miniature horses can provide services that dogs cannot
provide. Accordingly, use of miniature horses reduces the cost
involved to retire, replace, and train replacement service
animals.
The miniature horse is not one specific breed, but may be one of
several breeds, with distinct characteristics that produce animals
suited to service animal work. The animals generally range in
height from 24 inches to 34 inches measured to the withers, or
shoulders, and generally weigh between 70 and 100 pounds. These
characteristics are similar to those of large breed dogs such as
Labrador Retrievers, Great Danes, and Mastiffs. Similar to dogs,
miniature horses can be trained through behavioral reinforcement to
be “housebroken.” Most miniature service horse handlers and
organizations recommend that when the animals are not doing work or
performing tasks, the miniature horses should be kept outside in a
designated area, instead of indoors in a house.
According to information provided by an organization that trains
service horses, these miniature horses are trained to provide a
wide array of services to their handlers, primarily guiding
individuals who are blind or have low vision, pulling wheelchairs,
providing stability and balance for individuals with disabilities
that impair the ability to walk, and supplying leverage that
enables a person with a mobility disability to get up after a fall.
According to the commenter, miniature horses are particularly
effective for large stature individuals. The animals can be trained
to stand (and in some cases, lie down) at the handler's feet in
venues where space is at a premium, such as assembly areas or
inside some vehicles that provide public transportation. Some
individuals with disabilities have traveled by train and have flown
commercially with their miniature horses.
The miniature horse is not included in the definition of service
animal, which is limited to dogs. However, the Department has added
a specific provision at § 35.136(i) of the final rule covering
miniature horses. Under this provision, a public entity must make
reasonable modifications in policies, practices, or procedures to
permit the use of a miniature horse by an individual with a
disability if the miniature horse has been individually trained to
do work or perform tasks for the benefit of the individual with a
disability. The public entity may take into account a series of
assessment factors in determining whether to allow a miniature
horse into a specific facility. These include the type, size, and
weight of the miniature horse; whether the handler has sufficient
control of the miniature horse; whether the miniature horse is
housebroken; and whether the miniature horse's presence in a
specific facility compromises legitimate safety requirements that
are necessary for safe operation. In addition, paragraphs (c)-(h)
of this section, which are applicable to dogs, also apply to
miniature horses.
Ponies and full-size horses are not covered by § 35.136(i).
Also, because miniature horses can vary in size and can be larger
and less flexible than dogs, covered entities may exclude this type
of service animal if the presence of the miniature horse, because
of its larger size and lower level of flexibility, results in a
fundamental alteration to the nature of the programs activities, or
services provided.
Section 35.137 Mobility devices.
Section 35.137 of the NPRM clarified the scope and circumstances
under which covered entities are legally obligated to accommodate
various “mobility devices.” Section 35.137 set forth specific
requirements for the accommodation of “mobility devices,” including
wheelchairs, manually-powered mobility aids, and other power-driven
mobility devices.
In both the NPRM and the final rule, § 35.137(a) states the
general rule that in any areas open to pedestrians, public entities
shall permit individuals with mobility disabilities to use
wheelchairs and manually-powered mobility aids, including walkers,
crutches, canes, braces, or similar devices. Because mobility
scooters satisfy the definition of “wheelchair” (i.e.,
“manually-operated or power-driven device designed primarily for
use by an individual with a mobility disability for the main
purpose of indoor, or of both indoor and outdoor locomotion”), the
reference to them in § 35.137(a) of the final rule has been omitted
to avoid redundancy.
Some commenters expressed concern that permitting the use of
other power-driven mobility devices by individuals with mobility
disabilities would make such devices akin to wheelchairs and would
require them to make physical changes to their facilities to
accommodate their use. This concern is misplaced. If a facility
complies with the applicable design requirements in the 1991
Standards or the 2010 Standards, the public entity will not be
required to exceed those standards to accommodate the use of
wheelchairs or other power-driven mobility devices that exceed
those requirements.
Legal standard for other power-driven mobility devices.
The NPRM version of § 35.137(b) provided that “[a] public entity
shall make reasonable modifications in its policies, practices, and
procedures to permit the use of other power-driven mobility devices
by individuals with disabilities, unless the public entity can
demonstrate that the use of the device is not reasonable or that
its use will result in a fundamental alteration in the public
entity's service, program, or activity.” 73 FR 34466, 34505 (June
17, 2008). In other words, public entities are by default required
to permit the use of other power-driven mobility devices; the
burden is on them to prove the existence of a valid exception.
Most commenters supported the notion of assessing whether the
use of a particular device is reasonable in the context of a
particular venue. Commenters, however, disagreed about the meaning
of the word “reasonable” as it is used in § 35.137(b) of the NPRM.
Advocacy and nonprofit groups almost universally objected to the
use of a general reasonableness standard with regard to the
assessment of whether a particular device should be allowed at a
particular venue. They argued that the assessment should be based
on whether reasonable modifications could be made to allow a
particular device at a particular venue, and that the only factors
that should be part of the calculus that results in the exclusion
of a particular device are undue burden, direct threat, and
fundamental alteration.
A few commenters opposed the proposed provision requiring public
entities to assess whether reasonable modifications can be made to
allow other power-driven mobility devices, preferring instead that
the Department issue guidance materials so that public entities
would not have to incur the cost of such analyses. Another
commenter noted a “fox guarding the hen house”-type of concern with
regard to public entities developing and enforcing their own
modification policy.
In response to comments received, the Department has revised §
35.137(b) to provide greater clarity regarding the development of
legitimate safety requirements regarding other power-driven
mobility devices and has added a new § 35.130(h) (Safety) to the
title II regulation which specifically permits public entities to
impose legitimate safety requirements necessary for the safe
operation of their services, programs, and activities. (See
discussion below.) The Department has not retained the proposed
NPRM language stating that an other power-driven mobility device
can be excluded if a public entity can demonstrate that its use is
unreasonable or will result in a fundamental alteration of the
entity's service, program, or activity, because the Department
believes that this exception is covered by the general reasonable
modification requirement contained in § 35.130(b)(7).
Assessment factors. Section 35.137(c) of the NPRM
required public entities to “establish policies to permit the use
of other power-driven mobility devices” and articulated four
factors upon which public entities must base decisions as to
whether a modification is reasonable to allow the use of a class of
other power-driven mobility devices by individuals with
disabilities in specific venues (e.g., parks, courthouses, office
buildings, etc.). 73 FR 34466, 34504 (June 17, 2008).
The Department has relocated and modified the NPRM text that
appeared in § 35.137(c) to new paragraph § 35.137(b)(2) to clarify
what factors the public entity shall use in determining whether a
particular other power-driven mobility device can be allowed in a
specific facility as a reasonable modification. Section
35.137(b)(2) now states that “[i]n determining whether a particular
other power-driven mobility device can be allowed in a specific
facility as a reasonable modification under (b)(1), a public entity
shall consider” certain enumerated factors. The assessment factors
are designed to assist public entities in determining whether
allowing the use of a particular other power-driven mobility device
in a specific facility is reasonable. Thus, the focus of the
analysis must be on the appropriateness of the use of the device at
a specific facility, rather than whether it is necessary for an
individual to use a particular device.
The NPRM proposed the following specific assessment factors: (1)
The dimensions, weight, and operating speed of the mobility device
in relation to a wheelchair; (2) the potential risk of harm to
others by the operation of the mobility device; (3) the risk of
harm to the environment or natural or cultural resources or
conflict with Federal land management laws and regulations; and (4)
the ability of the public entity to stow the mobility device when
not in use, if requested by the user.
Factor 1 was designed to help public entities assess whether a
particular device was appropriate, given its particular physical
features, for a particular location. Virtually all commenters said
the physical features of the device affected their view of whether
a particular device was appropriate for a particular location. For
example, while many commenters supported the use of another
power-driven mobility device if the device were a Segway® PT,
because of environmental and health concerns they did not offer the
same level of support if the device were an off-highway vehicle,
all-terrain vehicle (ATV), golf car, or other device with a
fuel-powered or combustion engine. Most commenters noted that
indicators such as speed, weight, and dimension really were an
assessment of the appropriateness of a particular device in
specific venues and suggested that factor 1 say this more
specifically.
The term “in relation to a wheelchair” in the NPRM's factor 1
apparently created some concern that the same legal standards that
apply to wheelchairs would be applied to other power-driven
mobility devices. The Department has omitted the term “in relation
to a wheelchair” from § 35.137(b)(2)(i) to clarify that if a
facility that is in compliance with the applicable provisions of
the 1991 Standards or the 2010 Standards grants permission for an
other power-driven mobility device to go on-site, it is not
required to exceed those standards to accommodate the use of other
power-driven mobility devices.
In response to requests that NPRM factor 1 state more
specifically that it requires an assessment of an other
power-driven mobility device's appropriateness under particular
circumstances or in particular venues, the Department has added
several factors and more specific language. In addition, although
the NPRM made reference to the operation of other power-driven
mobility devices in “specific venues,” the Department's intent is
captured more clearly by referencing “specific facility” in
paragraph (b)(2). The Department also notes that while speed is
included in factor 1, public entities should not rely solely on a
device's top speed when assessing whether the device can be
accommodated; instead, public entities should also consider the
minimum speeds at which a device can be operated and whether the
development of speed limit policies can be established to address
concerns regarding the speed of the device. Finally, since the
ability of the public entity to stow the mobility device when not
in use is an aspect of its design and operational characteristics,
the text proposed as factor 4 in the NPRM has been incorporated in
paragraph (b)(2)(iii).
The NPRM's version of factor 2 provided that the “risk of
potential harm to others by the operation of the mobility device”
is one of the determinants in the assessment of whether other
power-driven mobility devices should be excluded from a site. The
Department intended this requirement to be consistent with the
Department's longstanding interpretation, expressed in § II-3.5200
(Safety) of the 1993 Title II Technical Assistance Manual, which
provides that public entities may “impose legitimate safety
requirements that are necessary for safe operation.” (This language
parallels the provision in the title III regulation at §
36.301(b).) However, several commenters indicated that they read
this language, particularly the phrase “risk of potential harm,” to
mean that the Department had adopted a concept of risk analysis
different from that which is in the existing standards. The
Department did not intend to create a new standard and has changed
the language in paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) to clarify the
applicable standards, thereby avoiding the introduction of new
assessments of risk beyond those necessary for the safe operation
of the public entity. In addition, the Department has added a new
section, 35.130(h), which incorporates the existing safety standard
into the title II regulation.
While all applicable affirmative defenses are available to
public entities in the establishment and execution of their
policies regarding other power-driven mobility devices, the
Department did not explicitly incorporate the direct threat defense
into the assessment factors because § 35.130(h) provides public
entities the appropriate framework with which to assess whether
legitimate safety requirements that may preclude the use of certain
other power-driven mobility devices are necessary for the safe
operation of the public entities. In order to be legitimate, the
safety requirement must be based on actual risks and not mere
speculation regarding the device or how it will be operated. Of
course, public entities may enforce legitimate safety rules
established by the public entity for the operation of other
power-driven mobility devices (e.g., reasonable speed
restrictions). Finally, NPRM factor 3 concerning environmental
resources and conflicts of law has been relocated to §
35.137(b)(2)(v).
As a result of these comments and requests, NPRM factors 1, 2,
3, and 4 have been revised and renumbered within paragraph (b)(2)
in the final rule.
Several commenters requested that the Department provide
guidance materials or more explicit concepts of which
considerations might be appropriate for inclusion in a policy that
allows the use of other power-driven mobility devices. A public
entity that has determined that reasonable modifications can be
made in its policies, practices, or procedures to allow the use of
other power-driven mobility devices should develop a policy that
clearly states the circumstances under which the use of other
power-driven mobility devices by individuals with a mobility
disability will be permitted. It also should include clear, concise
statements of specific rules governing the operation of such
devices. Finally, the public entity should endeavor to provide
individuals with disabilities who use other power-driven mobility
devices with advanced notice of its policy regarding the use of
such devices and what rules apply to the operation of these
devices.
For example, the U.S. General Services Administration (GSA) has
developed a policy allowing the use of the Segway® PT and other
EPAMDs in all Federal buildings under GSA's jurisdiction.
See General Services Administration, Interim Segway®
Personal Transporter Policy (Dec. 3, 2007), available at
http://www.gsa.gov/graphics/pbs/Interim_Segway_Policy_121007.pdf
(last visited June 24, 2010). The GSA policy defines the policy's
scope of coverage by setting out what devices are and are not
covered by the policy. The policy also sets out requirements for
safe operation, such as a speed limit, prohibits the use of EPAMDs
on escalators, and provides guidance regarding security screening
of these devices and their operators.
A public entity that determines that it can make reasonable
modifications to permit the use of an other power-driven mobility
device by an individual with a mobility disability might include in
its policy the procedure by which claims that the other
power-driven mobility device is being used for a mobility
disability will be assessed for legitimacy (i.e., a credible
assurance that the device is being used for a mobility disability,
including a verbal representation by the person with a disability
that is not contradicted by observable fact, or the presentation of
a disability parking space placard or card, or State-issued proof
of disability); the type or classes of other power-driven mobility
devices are permitted to be used by individuals with mobility
disabilities; the size, weight, and dimensions of the other
power-driven mobility devices that are permitted to be used by
individuals with mobility disabilities; the speed limit for the
other power-driven mobility devices that are permitted to be used
by individuals with mobility disabilities; the places, times, or
circumstances under which the use of the other power-driven
mobility device is or will be restricted or prohibited; safety,
pedestrian, and other rules concerning the use of the other
power-driven mobility device; whether, and under which
circumstances, storage for the other power-driven mobility device
will be made available; and how and where individuals with a
mobility disability can obtain a copy of the other power-driven
mobility device policy.
Public entities also might consider grouping other power-driven
mobility devices by type (e.g., EPAMDs, golf cars,
gasoline-powered vehicles, and other devices). For example, an
amusement park may determine that it is reasonable to allow
individuals with disabilities to use EPAMDs in a variety of outdoor
programs and activities, but that it would not be reasonable to
allow the use of golf cars as mobility devices in similar
circumstances. At the same time, the entity may address its
concerns about factors such as space limitations by disallowing use
of EPAMDs by members of the general public who do not have mobility
disabilities.
The Department anticipates that, in many circumstances, public
entities will be able to develop policies that will allow the use
of other power-driven mobility devices by individuals with mobility
disabilities. Consider the following example:
A county courthouse has developed a policy whereby EPAMDs may be
operated in the pedestrian areas of the courthouse if the operator
of the device agrees not to operate the device faster than
pedestrians are walking; to yield to pedestrians; to provide a rack
or stand so that the device can stand upright; and to use the
device only in courtrooms that are large enough to accommodate such
devices. If the individual is selected for jury duty in one of the
smaller courtrooms, the county's policy indicates that if it is not
possible for the individual with the disability to park the device
and walk into the courtroom, the location of the trial will be
moved to a larger courtroom.
Inquiry into the use of other power-driven mobility
device. The NPRM version of § 35.137(d) provided that “[a]
public entity may ask a person using a power-driven mobility device
if the mobility device is needed due to the person's disability. A
public entity shall not ask a person using a mobility device
questions about the nature and extent of the person's disability.”
73 FR 34466, 34504 (June 17, 2008).
Many environmental, transit system, and government commenters
expressed concern about people feigning mobility disabilities to be
able to use other power-driven mobility devices in public entities
in which their use is otherwise restricted. These commenters felt
that a mere inquiry into whether the device is being used for a
mobility disability was an insufficient mechanism by which to
detect fraud by other power-driven mobility device users who do not
have mobility disabilities. These commenters believed they should
be given more latitude to make inquiries of other power-driven
mobility device users claiming a mobility disability than they
would be given for wheelchair users. They sought the ability to
establish a policy or method by which public entities may assess
the legitimacy of the mobility disability. They suggested some form
of certification, sticker, or other designation. One commenter
suggested a requirement that a sticker bearing the international
symbol for accessibility be placed on the device or that some other
identification be required to signal that the use of the device is
for a mobility disability. Other suggestions included displaying a
disability parking placard on the device or issuing EPAMDs, like
the Segway® PT, a permit that would be similar to permits
associated with parking spaces reserved for those with
disabilities.
Advocacy, nonprofit, and several individual commenters balked at
the notion of allowing any inquiry beyond whether the device is
necessary for a mobility disability and encouraged the Department
to retain the NPRM's language on this topic. Other commenters,
however, were empathetic with commenters who had concerns about
fraud. At least one Segway® PT advocate suggested it would be
permissible to seek documentation of the mobility disability in the
form of a simple sign or permit.
The Department has sought to find common ground by balancing the
needs of public entities and individuals with mobility disabilities
wishing to use other power-driven mobility devices with the
Department's longstanding, well-established policy of not allowing
public entities or establishments to require proof of a mobility
disability. There is no question that public entities have a
legitimate interest in ferreting out fraudulent representations of
mobility disabilities, especially given the recreational use of
other power-driven mobility devices and the potential safety
concerns created by having too many such devices in a specific
facility at one time. However, the privacy of individuals with
mobility disabilities and respect for those individuals, is also
vitally important.
Neither § 35.137(d) of the NPRM nor § 35.137(c) of the final
rule permits inquiries into the nature of a person's mobility
disability. However, the Department does not believe it is
unreasonable or overly intrusive for an individual with a mobility
disability seeking to use an other power-driven mobility device to
provide a credible assurance to verify that the use of the other
power-driven mobility device is for a mobility disability. The
Department sought to minimize the amount of discretion and
subjectivity exercised by public entities in assessing whether an
individual has a mobility disability and to allow public entities
to verify the existence of a mobility disability. The solution was
derived from comments made by several individuals who said they
have been admitted with their Segway® PTs into public entities and
public accommodations that ordinarily do not allow these devices
on-site when they have presented or displayed State-issued
disability parking placards. In the examples provided by
commenters, the parking placards were accepted as verification that
the Segway® PTs were being used as mobility devices.
Because many individuals with mobility disabilities avail
themselves of State programs that issue disability parking placards
or cards and because these programs have penalties for fraudulent
representations of identity and disability, utilizing the parking
placard system as a means to establish the existence of a mobility
disability strikes a balance between the need for privacy of the
individual and fraud protection for the public entity.
Consequently, the Department has decided to include regulatory text
in § 35.137(c)(2) of the final rule that requires public entities
to accept the presentation of a valid, State-issued disability
parking placard or card, or State-issued proof of disability, as
verification that an individual uses the other power-driven
mobility device for his or her mobility disability. A “valid”
disability placard or card is one that is presented by the
individual to whom it was issued and is otherwise in compliance
with the State of issuance's requirements for disability placards
or cards. Public entities are required to accept a valid,
State-issued disability parking placard or card, or State-issued
proof of disability as a credible assurance, but they cannot demand
or require the presentation of a valid disability placard or card,
or State-issued proof of disability, as a prerequisite for use of
an other power-driven mobility device, because not all persons with
mobility disabilities have such means of proof. If an individual
with a mobility disability does not have such a placard or card, or
State-issued proof of disability, he or she may present other
information that would serve as a credible assurance of the
existence of a mobility disability.
In lieu of a valid, State-issued disability parking placard or
card, or State-issued proof of disability, a verbal representation,
not contradicted by observable fact, shall be accepted as a
credible assurance that the other power-driven mobility device is
being used because of a mobility disability. This does not mean,
however, that a mobility disability must be observable as a
condition for allowing the use of an other power-driven mobility
device by an individual with a mobility disability, but rather that
if an individual represents that a device is being used for a
mobility disability and that individual is observed thereafter
engaging in a physical activity that is contrary to the nature of
the represented disability, the assurance given is no longer
credible and the individual may be prevented from using the
device.
Possession of a valid, State-issued disability parking placard
or card or a verbal assurance does not trump a public entity's
valid restrictions on the use of other power-driven mobility
devices. Accordingly, a credible assurance that the other
power-driven mobility device is being used because of a mobility
disability is not a guarantee of entry to a public entity because,
notwithstanding such credible assurance, use of the device in a
particular venue may be at odds with the legal standard in §
35.137(b)(1) or with one or more of the § 35.137(b)(2) factors.
Only after an individual with a disability has satisfied all of the
public entity's policies regarding the use of other power-driven
mobility devices does a credible assurance become a factor in
allowing the use of the device. For example, if an individual
seeking to use an other power-driven mobility device fails to
satisfy any of the public entity's stated policies regarding the
use of other power-driven mobility devices, the fact that the
individual legitimately possesses and presents a valid,
State-issued disability parking placard or card, or State-issued
proof of disability, does not trump the policy and require the
public entity to allow the use of the device. In fact, in some
instances, the presentation of a legitimately held placard or card,
or State-issued proof of disability, will have no relevance or
bearing at all on whether the other power-driven mobility device
may be used, because the public entity's policy does not permit the
device in question on-site under any circumstances (e.g.,
because its use would create a substantial risk of serious harm to
the immediate environment or natural or cultural resources). Thus,
an individual with a mobility disability who presents a valid
disability placard or card, or State-issued proof of disability,
will not be able to use an ATV as an other power-driven mobility
device in a State park if the State park has adopted a policy
banning their use for any or all of the above-mentioned reasons.
However, if a public entity permits the use of a particular other
power-driven mobility device, it cannot refuse to admit an
individual with a disability who uses that device if the individual
has provided a credible assurance that the use of the device is for
a mobility disability.
Section 35.138 Ticketing
The 1991 title II regulation did not contain specific regulatory
language on ticketing. The ticketing policies and practices of
public entities, however, are subject to title II's
nondiscrimination provisions. Through the investigation of
complaints, enforcement actions, and public comments related to
ticketing, the Department became aware that some venue operators,
ticket sellers, and distributors were violating title II's
nondiscrimination mandate by not providing individuals with
disabilities the same opportunities to purchase tickets for
accessible seating as they provided to spectators purchasing
conventional seats. In the NPRM, the Department proposed § 35.138
to provide explicit direction and guidance on discriminatory
practices for entities involved in the sale or distribution of
tickets.
The Department received comments from advocacy groups, assembly
area trade associations, public entities, and individuals. Many
commenters supported the addition of regulatory language pertaining
to ticketing and urged the Department to retain it in the final
rule. Several commenters, however, questioned why there were
inconsistencies between the title II and title III provisions and
suggested that the same language be used for both titles. The
Department has decided to retain ticketing regulatory language and
to ensure consistency between the ticketing provisions in title II
and title III.
Because many in the ticketing industry view season tickets and
other multi-event packages differently from individual tickets, the
Department bifurcated some season ticket provisions from those
concerning single-event tickets in the NPRM. This structure,
however, resulted in some provisions being repeated for both types
of tickets but not for others even though they were intended to
apply to both types of tickets. The result was that it was not
entirely clear that some of the provisions that were not repeated
also were intended to apply to season tickets. The Department is
addressing the issues raised by these commenters using a different
approach. For the purposes of this section, a single event
refers to an individual performance for which tickets may be
purchased. In contrast, a series of events includes, but is
not limited to, subscription events, event packages, season
tickets, or any other tickets that may be purchased for multiple
events of the same type over the course of a specified period of
time whose ownership right reverts to the public entity at the end
of each season or time period. Series-of-events tickets that give
their holders an enhanced ability to purchase such tickets from the
public entity in seasons or periods of time that follow, such as a
right of first refusal or higher ranking on waiting lists for more
desirable seats, are subject to the provisions in this section. In
addition, the final rule merges together some NPRM paragraphs that
dealt with related topics and has reordered and renamed some of the
paragraphs that were in the NPRM.
Ticket sales. In the NPRM, the Department proposed, in §
35.138(a), a general rule that a public entity shall modify its
policies, practices, or procedures to ensure that individuals with
disabilities can purchase tickets for accessible seating for an
event or series of events in the same way as others (i.e., during
the same hours and through the same distribution methods as other
seating is sold). 73 FR 34466, 34504 (June 17, 2008). “Accessible
seating” is defined in § 35.138(a)(1) of the final rule to mean
“wheelchair spaces and companion seats that comply with sections
221 and 802 of the 2010 Standards along with any other seats
required to be offered for sale to the individual with a disability
pursuant to paragraph (d) of this section.” The defined term does
not include designated aisle seats. A “wheelchair space” refers to
a space for a single wheelchair and its occupant.
The NPRM proposed requiring that accessible seats be sold
through the “same methods of distribution” as non-accessible seats.
Comments from venue managers and others in the business community,
in general, noted that multiple parties are involved in ticketing,
and because accessible seats may not be allotted to all parties
involved at each stage, such parties should be protected from
liability. For example, one commenter noted that a third-party
ticket vendor, like Ticketmaster, can only sell the tickets it
receives from its client. Because § 35.138(a)(2)(iii) of the final
rule requires venue operators to make available accessible seating
through the same methods of distribution they use for their regular
tickets, venue operators that provide tickets to third-party ticket
vendors are required to provide accessible seating to the
third-party ticket vendor. This provision will enhance third-party
ticket vendors' ability to acquire and sell accessible seating for
sale in the future. The Department notes that once third-party
ticket vendors acquire accessible tickets, they are obligated to
sell them in accordance with these rules.
The Department also has received frequent complaints that
individuals with disabilities have not been able to purchase
accessible seating over the Internet, and instead have had to
engage in a laborious process of calling a customer service line,
or sending an e-mail to a customer service representative and
waiting for a response. Not only is such a process burdensome, but
it puts individuals with disabilities at a disadvantage in
purchasing tickets for events that are popular and may sell out in
minutes. Because § 35.138(e) of the final rule authorizes venues to
release accessible seating in case of a sell-out, individuals with
disabilities effectively could be cut off from buying tickets
unless they also have the ability to purchase tickets in real time
over the Internet. The Department's new regulatory language is
designed to address this problem.
Several commenters representing assembly areas raised concerns
about offering accessible seating for sale over the Internet. They
contended that this approach would increase the incidence of fraud
since anyone easily could purchase accessible seating over the
Internet. They also asserted that it would be difficult
technologically to provide accessible seating for sale in real time
over the Internet, or that to do so would require simplifying the
rules concerning the purchase of multiple additional accompanying
seats. Moreover, these commenters argued that requiring an
individual purchasing accessible seating to speak with a customer
service representative would allow the venue to meet the patron's
needs most appropriately and ensure that wheelchair spaces are
reserved for individuals with disabilities who require wheelchair
spaces. Finally, these commenters argued that individuals who can
transfer effectively and conveniently from a wheelchair to a seat
with a movable armrest seat could instead purchase designated aisle
seats.
The Department considered these concerns carefully and has
decided to continue with the general approach proposed in the NPRM.
Although fraud is an important concern, the Department believes
that it is best combated by other means that would not have the
effect of limiting the ability of individuals with disabilities to
purchase tickets, particularly since restricting the purchase of
accessible seating over the Internet will, of itself, not curb
fraud. In addition, the Department has identified permissible means
for covered entities to reduce the incidence of fraudulent
accessible seating ticket purchases in § 35.138(h) of the final
rule.
Several commenters questioned whether ticket websites themselves
must be accessible to individuals who are blind or have low vision,
and if so, what that requires. The Department has consistently
interpreted the ADA to cover websites that are operated by public
entities and stated that such sites must provide their services in
an accessible manner or provide an accessible alternative to the
website that is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. The
final rule, therefore, does not impose any new obligation in this
area. The accessibility of websites is discussed in more detail in
the section of Appendix A entitled “Other Issues.”
In § 35.138(b) of the NPRM, the Department also proposed
requiring public entities to make accessible seating available
during all stages of tickets sales including, but not limited to,
presales, promotions, lotteries, waitlists, and general sales. For
example, if tickets will be presold for an event that is open only
to members of a fan club, or to holders of a particular credit
card, then tickets for accessible seating must be made available
for purchase through those means. This requirement does not mean
that any individual with a disability would be able to purchase
those seats. Rather, it means that an individual with a disability
who meets the requirement for such a sale (e.g., who is a
member of the fan club or holds that credit card) will be able to
participate in the special promotion and purchase accessible
seating. The Department has maintained the substantive provisions
of the NPRM's § 35.138(a) and (b) but has combined them in a single
paragraph at § 35.138(a)(2) of the final rule so that all of the
provisions having to do with the manner in which tickets are sold
are located in a single paragraph.
Identification of available accessible seating. In the
NPRM, the Department proposed § 35.138(c), which, as modified and
renumbered as paragraph (b)(3) in the final rule, requires a
facility to identify available accessible seating through seating
maps, brochures, or other methods if that information is made
available about other seats sold to the general public. This rule
requires public entities to provide information about accessible
seating to the same degree of specificity that it provides
information about general seating. For example, if a seating map
displays color-coded blocks pegged to prices for general seating,
then accessible seating must be similarly color-coded. Likewise, if
covered entities provide detailed maps that show exact seating and
pricing for general seating, they must provide the same for
accessible seating.
The NPRM did not specify a requirement to identify prices for
accessible seating. The final rule requires that if such
information is provided for general seating, it must be provided
for accessible seating as well.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed in § 35.138(d) that a
public entity, upon being asked, must inform persons with
disabilities and their companions of the locations of all unsold or
otherwise available seating. This provision is intended to prevent
the practice of “steering” individuals with disabilities to certain
accessible seating so that the facility can maximize potential
ticket sales by releasing unsold accessible seating, especially in
preferred or desirable locations, for sale to the general public.
The Department received no significant comment on this proposal.
The Department has retained this provision in the final rule but
has added it, with minor modifications, to § 35.138(b) as paragraph
(1).
Ticket prices. In the NPRM, the Department proposed §
35.138(e) requiring that ticket prices for accessible seating be
set no higher than the prices for other seats in that seating
section for that event. The NPRM's provision also required that
accessible seating be made available at every price range, and if
an existing facility has barriers to accessible seating within a
particular price range, a proportionate amount of seating
(determined by the ratio of the total number of seats at that price
level to the total number of seats in the assembly area) must be
offered in an accessible location at that same price. Under this
rule, for example, if a public entity has a 20,000-seat facility
built in 1980 with inaccessible seating in the $20-price category,
which is on the upper deck, and it chooses not to put accessible
seating in that section, then it must place a proportionate number
of seats in an accessible location for $20. If the upper deck has
2,000 seats, then the facility must place 10 percent of its
accessible seating in an accessible location for $20 provided that
it is part of a seating section where ticket prices are equal to or
more than $20 - a facility may not place the $20-accessible seating
in a $10-seating section. The Department received no significant
comment on this rule, and it has been retained, as amended, in the
final rule in § 35.138(c).
Purchase of multiple tickets. In the NPRM, the Department
proposed § 35.138(i) to address one of the most common ticketing
complaints raised with the Department: That individuals with
disabilities are not able to purchase more than two tickets. The
Department proposed this provision to facilitate the ability of
individuals with disabilities to attend events with friends,
companions, or associates who may or may not have a disability by
enabling individuals with disabilities to purchase the maximum
number of tickets allowed per transaction to other spectators; by
requiring venues to place accompanying individuals in general
seating as close as possible to accessible seating (in the event
that a group must be divided because of the large size of the
group); and by allowing an individual with a disability to purchase
up to three additional contiguous seats per wheelchair space if
they are available at the time of sale. Section 35.138(i)(2) of the
NPRM required that a group containing one or more wheelchair users
must be placed together, if possible, and that in the event that
the group could not be placed together, the individuals with
disabilities may not be isolated from the rest of the group.
The Department asked in the NPRM whether this rule was
sufficient to effectuate the integration of individuals with
disabilities. Many advocates and individuals praised it as a
welcome and much-needed change, stating that the trade-off of being
able to sit with their family or friends was worth reducing the
number of seats available for individuals with disabilities. Some
commenters went one step further and suggested that the number of
additional accompanying seats should not be restricted to
three.
Although most of the substance of the proposed provision on the
purchase of multiple tickets has been maintained in the final rule,
it has been renumbered as § 35.138(d), reorganized, and
supplemented. To preserve the availability of accessible seating
for other individuals with disabilities, the Department has not
expanded the rule beyond three additional contiguous seats. Section
35.138(d)(1) of the final rule requires public entities to make
available for purchase three additional tickets for seats in the
same row that are contiguous with the wheelchair space provided
that at the time of the purchase there are three such seats
available. The requirement that the additional seats be “contiguous
with the wheelchair space” does not mean that each of the
additional seats must be in actual contact or have a border in
common with the wheelchair space; however, at least one of the
additional seats should be immediately adjacent to the wheelchair
space. The Department recognizes that it will often be necessary to
use vacant wheelchair spaces to provide for contiguous seating.
The Department has added paragraphs (d)(2) and (d)(3) to clarify
that in situations where there are insufficient unsold seats to
provide three additional contiguous seats per wheelchair space or a
ticket office restricts sales of tickets to a particular event to
less than four tickets per customer, the obligation to make
available three additional contiguous seats per wheelchair space
would be affected. For example, if at the time of purchase, there
are only two additional contiguous seats available for purchase
because the third has been sold already, then the ticket purchaser
would be entitled to two such seats. In this situation, the public
entity would be required to make up the difference by offering one
additional ticket for sale that is as close as possible to the
accessible seats. Likewise, if ticket purchases for an event are
limited to two per customer, a person who uses a wheelchair who
seeks to purchase tickets would be entitled to purchase only one
additional contiguous seat for the event.
The Department also has added paragraph (d)(4) to clarify that
the requirement for three additional contiguous seats is not
intended to serve as a cap if the maximum number of tickets that
may be purchased by members of the general public exceeds the four
tickets an individual with a disability ordinarily would be allowed
to purchase (i.e., a wheelchair space and three additional
contiguous seats). If the maximum number of tickets that may be
purchased by members of the general public exceeds four, an
individual with a disability is to be allowed to purchase the
maximum number of tickets; however, additional tickets purchased by
an individual with a disability beyond the wheelchair space and the
three additional contiguous seats provided in § 35.138(d)(1) do not
have to be contiguous with the wheelchair space.
The NPRM proposed at § 35.138(i)(2) that for group sales, if a
group includes one or more individuals who use a wheelchair, then
the group shall be placed in a seating area with accessible seating
so that, if possible, the group can sit together. If it is
necessary to divide the group, it should be divided so that the
individuals in the group who use wheelchairs are not isolated from
the rest of the members of their group. The final rule retains the
NPRM language in paragraph (d)(5).
Hold-and-release of unsold accessible seating. The
Department recognizes that not all accessible seating will be sold
in all assembly areas for every event to individuals with
disabilities who need such seating and that public entities may
have opportunities to sell such seating to the general public. The
Department proposed in the NPRM a provision aimed at striking a
balance between affording individuals with disabilities adequate
time to purchase accessible seating and the entity's desire to
maximize ticket sales. In the NPRM, the Department proposed §
35.138(f), which allowed for the release of accessible seating
under the following circumstances: (i) When all seating in the
facility has been sold, excluding luxury boxes, club boxes, or
suites; (ii) when all seating in a designated area has been sold
and the accessible seating being released is in the same area; or
(iii) when all seating in a designated price range has been sold
and the accessible seating being released is within the same price
range.
The Department's NPRM asked “whether additional regulatory
guidance is required or appropriate in terms of a more detailed or
set schedule for the release of tickets in conjunction with the
three approaches described above. For example, does the proposed
regulation address the variable needs of assembly areas covered by
the ADA? Is additional regulatory guidance required to eliminate
discriminatory policies, practices and procedures related to the
sale, hold, and release of accessible seating? What considerations
should appropriately inform the determination of when unsold
accessible seating can be released to the general public?” 73 FR
34466, 34484 (June 17, 2008).
The Department received comments both supporting and opposing
the inclusion of a hold-and-release provision. One side proposed
loosening the restrictions on the release of unsold accessible
seating. One commenter from a trade association suggested that
tickets should be released regardless of whether there is a
sell-out, and that these tickets should be released according to a
set schedule. Conversely, numerous individuals, advocacy groups,
and at least one public entity urged the Department to tighten the
conditions under which unsold tickets for accessible seating may be
released. These commenters suggested that venues should not be
permitted to release tickets during the first two weeks of sale, or
alternatively, that they should not be permitted to be released
earlier than 48 hours before a sold-out event. Many of these
commenters criticized the release of accessible seating under the
second and third prongs of § 35.138(f) in the NPRM (when there is a
sell-out in general seating in a designated seating area or in a
price range), arguing that it would create situations where general
seating would be available for purchase while accessible seating
would not be.
Numerous commenters - both from the industry and from advocacy
groups - asked for clarification of the term “sell-out.” Business
groups commented that industry practice is to declare a sell-out
when there are only “scattered singles” available - isolated seats
that cannot be purchased as a set of adjacent pairs. Many of those
same commenters also requested that “sell-out” be qualified with
the phrase “of all seating available for sale” since it is industry
practice to hold back from release tickets to be used for groups
connected with that event (e.g., the promoter, home team, or
sports league). They argued that those tickets are not available
for sale and any return of these tickets to the general inventory
happens close to the event date. Noting the practice of holding
back tickets, one advocacy group suggested that covered entities be
required to hold back accessible seating in proportion to the
number of tickets that are held back for later release.
The Department has concluded that it would be inappropriate to
interfere with industry practice by defining what constitutes a
“sell-out” and that a public entity should continue to use its own
approach to defining a “sell-out.” If, however, a public entity
declares a sell-out by reference to those seats that are available
for sale, but it holds back tickets that it reasonably anticipates
will be released later, it must hold back a proportional percentage
of accessible seating to be released as well.
Adopting any of the alternatives proposed in the comments
summarized above would have upset the balance between protecting
the rights of individuals with disabilities and meeting venues'
concerns about lost revenue from unsold accessible seating. As a
result, the Department has retained § 35.138(f) (renumbered as §
35.138(e)) in the final rule.
The Department has, however, modified the regulation text to
specify that accessible seating may be released only when “all
non-accessible tickets in a designated seating area have been sold
and the tickets for accessible seating are being released in the
same designated area.” As stated in the NPRM, the Department
intended for this provision to allow, for example, the release of
accessible seating at the orchestra level when all other seating at
the orchestra level is sold. The Department has added this language
to the final rule at § 35.138(e)(1)(ii) to clarify that venues
cannot designate or redesignate seating areas for the purpose of
maximizing the release of unsold accessible seating. So, for
example, a venue may not determine on an ad hoc basis that a
group of seats at the orchestra level is a designated seating area
in order to release unsold accessible seating in that area.
The Department also has maintained the hold-and-release
provisions that appeared in the NPRM but has added a provision to
address the release of accessible seating for series-of-events
tickets on a series-of-events basis. Many commenters asked the
Department whether unsold accessible seating may be converted to
general seating and released to the general public on a
season-ticket basis or longer when tickets typically are sold as a
season-ticket package or other long-term basis. Several disability
rights organizations and individual commenters argued that such a
practice should not be permitted, and, if it were, that conditions
should be imposed to ensure that individuals with disabilities have
future access to those seats.
The Department interprets the fundamental principle of the ADA
as a requirement to give individuals with disabilities equal, not
better, access to those opportunities available to the general
public. Thus, for example, a public entity that sells out its
facility on a season-ticket only basis is not required to leave
unsold its accessible seating if no persons with disabilities
purchase those season-ticket seats. Of course, public entities may
choose to go beyond what is required by reserving accessible
seating for individuals with disabilities (or releasing such seats
for sale to the general public) on an individual-game basis.
If a covered entity chooses to release unsold accessible seating
for sale on a season-ticket or other long-term basis, it must meet
at least two conditions. Under § 35.138(g) of the final rule,
public entities must leave flexibility for game-day change-outs to
accommodate ticket transfers on the secondary market. And public
entities must modify their ticketing policies so that, in future
years, individuals with disabilities will have the ability to
purchase accessible seating on the same basis as other patrons
(e.g., as season tickets). Put differently, releasing accessible
seating to the general public on a season-ticket or other long-term
basis cannot result in that seating being lost to individuals with
disabilities in perpetuity. If, in future years, season tickets
become available and persons with disabilities have reached the top
of the waiting list or have met any other eligibility criteria for
season-ticket purchases, public entities must ensure that
accessible seating will be made available to the eligible
individuals. In order to accomplish this, the Department has added
§ 35.138(e)(3)(i) to require public entities that release
accessible season tickets to individuals who do not have
disabilities that require the features of accessible seating to
establish a process to prevent the automatic reassignment of such
ticket holders to accessible seating. For example, a public entity
could have in place a system whereby accessible seating that was
released because it was not purchased by individuals with
disabilities is not in the pool of tickets available for purchase
for the following season unless and until the conditions for ticket
release have been satisfied in the following season. Alternatively,
a public entity might release tickets for accessible seating only
when a purchaser who does not need its features agrees that he or
she has no guarantee of or right to the same seats in the following
season, or that if season tickets are guaranteed for the following
season, the purchaser agrees that the offer to purchase tickets is
limited to non-accessible seats having to the extent practicable,
comparable price, view, and amenities to the accessible seats such
individuals held in the prior year. The Department is aware that
this rule may require some administrative changes but believes that
this process will not create undue financial and administrative
burdens. The Department believes that this approach is balanced and
beneficial. It will allow public entities to sell all of their
seats and will leave open the possibility, in future seasons or
series of events, that persons who need accessible seating may have
access to it.
The Department also has added § 35.138(e)(3)(ii) to address how
season tickets or series-of-events tickets that have attached
ownership rights should be handled if the ownership right returns
to the public entity (e.g., when holders forfeit their ownership
right by failing to purchase season tickets or sell their ownership
right back to a public entity). If the ownership right is for
accessible seating, the public entity is required to adopt a
process that allows an eligible individual with a disability who
requires the features of such seating to purchase the rights and
tickets for such seating.
Nothing in the regulatory text prevents a public entity from
establishing a process whereby such ticket holders agree to be
voluntarily reassigned from accessible seating to another seating
area so that individuals with mobility disabilities or disabilities
that require the features of accessible seating and who become
newly eligible to purchase season tickets have an opportunity to do
so. For example, a public entity might seek volunteers to relocate
to another location that is at least as good in terms of its
location, price, and amenities, or a public entity might use a seat
with forfeited ownership rights as an inducement to get a ticket
holder to give up accessible seating he or she does not need.
Ticket transfer. The Department received many comments
asking whether accessible seating has the same transfer rights as
general seats. The proposed regulation at § 35.138(e) required that
individuals with disabilities must be allowed to purchase season
tickets for accessible seating on the same terms and conditions as
individuals purchasing season tickets for general seating,
including the right - if it exists for other ticket-holders - to
transfer individual tickets to friends or associates. Some
commenters pointed out that the NPRM proposed explicitly allowing
individuals with disabilities holding season tickets to transfer
tickets but did not address the transfer of tickets purchased for
individual events. Several commenters representing assembly areas
argued that persons with disabilities holding tickets for an
individual event should not be allowed to sell or transfer them to
third parties because such ticket transfers would increase the risk
of fraud or would make unclear the obligation of the entity to
accommodate secondary ticket transfers. They argued that
individuals holding accessible seating should either be required to
transfer their tickets to another individual with a disability or
return them to the facility for a refund.
Although the Department is sympathetic to concerns about
administrative burden, curtailing transfer rights for accessible
seating when other ticket holders are permitted to transfer tickets
would be inconsistent with the ADA's guiding principle that
individuals with disabilities must have rights equal to others.
Thus, the Department has added language in the final rule in §
35.138(f) that requires that individuals with disabilities holding
accessible seating for any event have the same transfer rights
accorded other ticket holders for that event. Section 35.138(f)
also preserves the rights of individuals with disabilities who hold
tickets to accessible seats for a series of events to transfer
individual tickets to others, regardless of whether the transferee
needs accessible seating. This approach recognizes the common
practice of individuals splitting season tickets or other
multi-event ticket packages with friends, colleagues, or other
spectators to make the purchase of season tickets affordable;
individuals with disabilities should not be placed in the
burdensome position of having to find another individual with a
disability with whom to share the package.
This provision, however, does not require public entities to
seat an individual who holds a ticket to an accessible seat in such
seating if the individual does not need the accessible features of
the seat. A public entity may reserve the right to switch these
individuals to different seats if they are available, but a public
entity is not required to remove a person without a disability who
is using accessible seating from that seating, even if a person who
uses a wheelchair shows up with a ticket from the secondary market
for a non-accessible seat and wants accessible seating.
Secondary ticket market. Section 35.138(g) is a new
provision in the final rule that requires a public entity to modify
its policies, practices, or procedures to ensure that an individual
with a disability, who acquires a ticket in the secondary ticket
market, may use that ticket under the same terms and conditions as
other ticket holders who acquire a ticket in the secondary market
for an event or series of events. This principle was discussed in
the NPRM in connection with § 35.138(e), pertaining to
season-ticket sales. There, the Department asked for public comment
regarding a public entity's proposed obligation to accommodate the
transfer of accessible seating tickets on the secondary ticket
market to those who do not need accessible seating and vice
versa.
The secondary ticket market, for the purposes of this rule,
broadly means any transfer of tickets after the public entity's
initial sale of tickets to individuals or entities. It thus
encompasses a wide variety of transactions, from ticket transfers
between friends to transfers using commercial exchange systems.
Many commenters noted that the distinction between the primary and
secondary ticket market has become blurred as a result of
agreements between teams, leagues, and secondary market sellers.
These commenters noted that the secondary market may operate
independently of the public entity, and parts of the secondary
market, such as ticket transfers between friends, undoubtedly are
outside the direct jurisdiction of the public entity.
To the extent that venues seat persons who have purchased
tickets on the secondary market, they must similarly seat persons
with disabilities who have purchased tickets on the secondary
market. In addition, some public entities may acquire ADA
obligations directly by formally entering the secondary ticket
market.
The Department's enforcement experience with assembly areas also
has revealed that venues regularly provide for and make last-minute
seat transfers. As long as there are vacant wheelchair spaces,
requiring venues to provide wheelchair spaces for patrons who
acquired inaccessible seats and need wheelchair spaces is an
example of a reasonable modification of a policy under title II of
the ADA. Similarly, a person who has a ticket for a wheelchair
space but who does not require its accessible features could be
offered non-accessible seating if such seating is available.
The Department's longstanding position that title II of the ADA
requires venues to make reasonable modifications in their policies
to allow individuals with disabilities who acquired non-accessible
tickets on the secondary ticket market to be seated in accessible
seating, where such seating is vacant, is supported by the only
Federal court to address this issue. See Independent Living
Resources v. Oregon Arena Corp., 1 F. Supp. 2d 1159,
1171 (D. Or. 1998). The Department has incorporated this position
into the final rule at § 35.138(g)(2).
The NPRM contained two questions aimed at gauging concern with
the Department's consideration of secondary ticket market sales.
The first question asked whether a secondary purchaser who does not
have a disability and who buys an accessible seat should be
required to move if the space is needed for someone with a
disability.
Many disability rights advocates answered that the individual
should move provided that there is a seat of comparable or better
quality available for him and his companion. Some venues, however,
expressed concerns about this provision, and asked how they are to
identify who should be moved and what obligations apply if there
are no seats available that are equivalent or better in
quality.
The Department's second question asked whether there are
particular concerns about the obligation to provide accessible
seating, including a wheelchair space, to an individual with a
disability who purchases an inaccessible seat through the secondary
market.
Industry commenters contended that this requirement would create
a “logistical nightmare,” with venues scrambling to reseat patrons
in the short time between the opening of the venues' doors and the
commencement of the event. Furthermore, they argued that they might
not be able to reseat all individuals and that even if they were
able to do so, patrons might be moved to inferior seats (whether in
accessible or non-accessible seating). These commenters also were
concerned that they would be sued by patrons moved under such
circumstances.
These commenters seem to have misconstrued the rule. Covered
entities are not required to seat every person who acquires a
ticket for inaccessible seating but needs accessible seating, and
are not required to move any individual who acquires a ticket for
accessible seating but does not need it. Covered entities that
allow patrons to buy and sell tickets on the secondary market must
make reasonable modifications to their policies to allow persons
with disabilities to participate in secondary ticket transfers. The
Department believes that there is no one-size-fits-all rule that
will suit all assembly areas. In those circumstances where a venue
has accessible seating vacant at the time an individual with a
disability who needs accessible seating presents his ticket for
inaccessible seating at the box office, the venue must allow the
individual to exchange his ticket for an accessible seat in a
comparable location if such an accessible seat is vacant. Where,
however, a venue has sold all of its accessible seating, the venue
has no obligation to provide accessible seating to the person with
a disability who purchased an inaccessible seat on the secondary
market. Venues may encourage individuals with disabilities who hold
tickets for inaccessible seating to contact the box office before
the event to notify them of their need for accessible seating, even
though they may not require ticketholders to provide such
notice.
The Department notes that public entities are permitted, though
not required, to adopt policies regarding moving patrons who do not
need the features of an accessible seat. If a public entity chooses
to do so, it might mitigate administrative concerns by marking
tickets for accessible seating as such, and printing on the ticket
that individuals who purchase such seats but who do not need
accessible seating are subject to being moved to other seats in the
facility if the accessible seating is required for an individual
with a disability. Such a venue might also develop and publish a
ticketing policy to provide transparency to the general public and
to put holders of tickets for accessible seating who do not require
it on notice that they may be moved.
Prevention of fraud in purchase of accessible seating.
Assembly area managers and advocacy groups have informed the
Department that the fraudulent purchase of accessible seating is a
pressing concern. Curbing fraud is a goal that public entities and
individuals with disabilities share. Steps taken to prevent fraud,
however, must be balanced carefully against the privacy rights of
individuals with disabilities. Such measures also must not impose
burdensome requirements upon, nor restrict the rights of,
individuals with disabilities.
In the NPRM, the Department struck a balance between these
competing concerns by proposing § 35.138(h), which prohibited
public entities from asking for proof of disability before the
purchase of accessible seating but provided guidance in two
paragraphs on appropriate measures for curbing fraud. Paragraph (1)
proposed allowing a public entity to ask individuals purchasing
single-event tickets for accessible seating whether they are
wheelchair users. Paragraph (2) proposed allowing a public entity
to require the individuals purchasing accessible seating for season
tickets or other multi-event ticket packages to attest in writing
that the accessible seating is for a wheelchair user. Additionally,
the NPRM proposed to permit venues, when they have good cause to
believe that an individual has fraudulently purchased accessible
seating, to investigate that individual.
Several commenters objected to this rule on the ground that it
would require a wheelchair user to be the purchaser of tickets. The
Department has reworded this paragraph to reflect that the
individual with a disability does not have to be the ticket
purchaser. The final rule allows third parties to purchase
accessible tickets at the request of an individual with a
disability.
Commenters also argued that other individuals with disabilities
who do not use wheelchairs should be permitted to purchase
accessible seating. Some individuals with disabilities who do not
use wheelchairs urged the Department to change the rule, asserting
that they, too, need accessible seating. The Department agrees that
such seating, although designed for use by a wheelchair user, may
be used by non-wheelchair users, if those persons are persons with
a disability who need to use accessible seating because of a
mobility disability or because their disability requires the use of
the features that accessible seating provides (e.g.,
individuals who cannot bend their legs because of braces, or
individuals who, because of their disability, cannot sit in a
straight-back chair).
Some commenters raised concerns that allowing venues to ask
questions to determine whether individuals purchasing accessible
seating are doing so legitimately would burden individuals with
disabilities in the purchase of accessible seating. The Department
has retained the substance of this provision in § 35.138(h) of the
final rule, but emphasizes that such questions should be asked at
the initial time of purchase. For example, if the method of
purchase is via the Internet, then the question(s) should be
answered by clicking a yes or no box during the transaction. The
public entity may warn purchasers that accessible seating is for
individuals with disabilities and that individuals purchasing such
tickets fraudulently are subject to relocation.
One commenter argued that face-to-face contact between the venue
and the ticket holder should be required in order to prevent fraud
and suggested that individuals who purchase accessible seating
should be required to pick up their tickets at the box office and
then enter the venue immediately. The Department has declined to
adopt that suggestion. It would be discriminatory to require
individuals with disabilities to pick up tickets at the box office
when other spectators are not required to do so. If the assembly
area wishes to make face-to-face contact with accessible seating
ticket holders to curb fraud, it may do so through its ushers and
other customer service personnel located within the seating
area.
Some commenters asked whether it is permissible for assembly
areas to have voluntary clubs where individuals with disabilities
self-identify to the public entity in order to become a member of a
club that entitles them to purchase accessible seating reserved for
club members or otherwise receive priority in purchasing accessible
seating. The Department agrees that such clubs are permissible,
provided that a reasonable amount of accessible seating remains
available at all prices and dispersed at all locations for
individuals with disabilities who are non-members.
§ 35.139 Direct threat
In Appendix A of the Department's 1991 title II regulation, the
Department included a detailed discussion of “direct threat” that,
among other things, explained that “the principles established in §
36.208 of the Department's [title III] regulation” were
“applicable” as well to title II, insofar as “questions of safety
are involved.” 28 CFR part 35, app. A at 565 (2009). In the final
rule, the Department has included specific requirements related to
“direct threat” that parallel those in the title III rule. These
requirements are found in new § 35.139.
Subpart D - Program Accessibility Section 35.150(b)(2) Safe harbor
The “program accessibility” requirement in regulations
implementing title II of the Americans with Disabilities Act
requires that each service, program, or activity, when viewed in
its entirety, be readily accessible to and usable by
individuals with disabilities. 28 CFR 35.150(a). Because title II
evaluates a public entity's programs, services, and activities in
their entirety, public entities have flexibility in addressing
accessibility issues. Program access does not necessarily require a
public entity to make each of its existing facilities accessible to
and usable by individuals with disabilities, and public entities
are not required to make structural changes to existing facilities
where other methods are effective in achieving program access.
See id. 3 Public entities do, however, have program access
considerations that are independent of, but may coexist with,
requirements imposed by new construction or alteration requirements
in those same facilities.
3 The term “existing facility” is defined in § 35.104 as amended
by this rule.
Where a public entity opts to alter existing facilities to
comply with its program access requirements, the entity must meet
the accessibility requirements for alterations set out in § 35.151.
Under the final rule, these alterations will be subject to the 2010
Standards. The 2010 Standards introduce technical and scoping
specifications for many elements not covered by the 1991 Standards.
In existing facilities, these supplemental requirements need to be
taken into account by a public entity in ensuring program access.
Also included in the 2010 Standards are revised technical and
scoping requirements for a number of elements that were addressed
in the 1991 Standards. These revised requirements reflect
incremental changes that were added either because of additional
study by the Access Board or in order to harmonize requirements
with the model codes.
Although the program accessibility standard offers public
entities a level of discretion in determining how to achieve
program access, in the NPRM, the Department proposed an addition to
§ 35.150 at § 35.150(b)(2), denominated “Safe Harbor,” to clarify
that “[i]f a public entity has constructed or altered elements * *
* in accordance with the specifications in either the 1991
Standards or the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standard, such
public entity is not, solely because of the Department's adoption
of the [2010] Standards, required to retrofit such elements to
reflect incremental changes in the proposed standards.” 73 FR
34466, 34505 (June 17, 2008). In these circumstances, the public
entity would be entitled to a safe harbor for the already compliant
elements until those elements are altered. The safe harbor does not
negate a public entity's new construction or alteration
obligations. A public entity must comply with the new construction
or alteration requirements in effect at the time of the
construction or alteration. With respect to existing facilities
designed and constructed after January 26, 1992, but before the
public entities are required to comply with the 2010 Standards, the
rule is that any elements in these facilities that were not
constructed in conformance with UFAS or the 1991 Standards are in
violation of the ADA and must be brought into compliance. If
elements in existing facilities were altered after January 26,
1992, and those alterations were not made in conformance with the
alteration requirements in effect at the time, then those
alteration violations must be corrected. Section 35.150(b)(2) of
the final rule specifies that until the compliance date for the
Standards (18 months from the date of publication of the rule),
facilities or elements covered by § 35.151(a) or (b) that are
noncompliant with either the 1991 Standards or UFAS shall be made
accessible in accordance with the 1991 Standards, UFAS, or the 2010
Standards. Once the compliance date is reached, such noncompliant
facilities or elements must be made accessible in accordance with
the 2010 Standards.
The Department received many comments on the safe harbor during
the 60-day public comment period. Advocacy groups were opposed to
the safe harbor for compliant elements in existing facilities.
These commenters objected to the Department's characterization of
revisions between the 1991 and 2010 Standards as incremental
changes and assert that these revisions represent important
advances in accessibility for individuals with disabilities.
Commenters saw no basis for “grandfathering” outdated accessibility
standards given the flexibility inherent in the program access
standard. Others noted that title II's “undue financial and
administrative burdens” and “fundamental alteration” defenses
eliminate any need for further exemptions from compliance. Some
commenters suggested that entities' past efforts to comply with the
program access standard of 28 CFR 35.150(a) might appropriately be
a factor in determining what is required in the future.
Many public entities welcomed the Department's proposed safe
harbor. These commenters contend that the safe harbor allows public
entities needed time to evaluate program access in light of the
2010 Standards, and incorporate structural changes in a careful and
thoughtful way toward increasing accessibility entity-wide. Many
felt that it would be an ineffective use of public funds to update
buildings to retrofit elements that had already been constructed or
modified to Department-issued and sanctioned specifications. One
entity pointed to the “possibly budget-breaking” nature of forcing
compliance with incremental changes.
The Department has reviewed and considered all information
received during the 60-day public comment period. Upon review, the
Department has decided to retain the title II safe harbor with
minor revisions. The Department believes that the safe harbor
provides an important measure of clarity and certainty for public
entities as to the effect of the final rule with respect to
existing facilities. Additionally, by providing a safe harbor for
elements already in compliance with the technical and scoping
specifications in the 1991 Standards or UFAS, funding that would
otherwise be spent on incremental changes and repeated retrofitting
is freed up to be used toward increased entity-wide program access.
Public entities may thereby make more efficient use of the
resources available to them to ensure equal access to their
services, programs, or activities for all individuals with
disabilities.
The safe harbor adopted with this final rule is a narrow one, as
the Department recognizes that this approach may delay, in some
cases, the increased accessibility that the revised requirements
would provide, and that for some individuals with disabilities the
impact may be significant. This safe harbor operates only with
respect to elements that are in compliance with the scoping and
technical specifications in either the 1991 Standards or UFAS; it
does not apply to supplemental requirements, those elements for
which scoping and technical specifications are first provided in
the 2010 Standards.
Existing Facilities
Existing play areas. The 1991 Standards do not include
specific requirements for the design and construction of play
areas. To meet program accessibility requirements where structural
changes are necessary, public entities have been required to apply
the general new construction and alteration standards to the
greatest extent possible, including with respect to accessible
parking, routes to the playground, playground equipment, and
playground amenities (e.g., picnic tables and restrooms). The
Access Board published final guidelines for play areas in October
2000. The guidelines extended beyond general playground access to
establish specific scoping and technical requirements for
ground-level and elevated play components, accessible routes
connecting the components, accessible ground surfaces, and
maintenance of those surfaces. These guidelines filled a void left
by the 1991 Standards. They have been referenced in Federal
playground construction and safety guidelines and have been used
voluntarily when many play areas across the country have been
altered or constructed.
In adopting the 2004 ADAAG (which includes the 2000 play area
guidelines), the Department acknowledges both the importance of
integrated, full access to play areas for children and parents with
disabilities, as well as the need to avoid placing an untenable
fiscal burden on public entities. In the NPRM, the Department
stated it was proposing two specific provisions to reduce the
impact on existing facilities that undertake structural
modifications pursuant to the program accessibility requirement.
First, the Department proposed in § 35.150(b)(4) that existing play
areas that are not being altered would be permitted to meet a
reduced scoping requirement with respect to their elevated play
components. Elevated play components, which are found on most
playgrounds, are the individual components that are linked together
to form large-scale composite playground equipment (e.g.,
the monkey bars attached to the suspension bridge attached to the
tube slide, etc.) The 2010 Standards provide that a play area that
includes both ground level and elevated play components must ensure
that a specified number of the ground-level play components and at
least 50 percent of the elevated play components are
accessible.
In the NPRM, the Department asked for specific public comment
with regard to whether existing play areas should be permitted to
substitute additional ground-level play components for the elevated
play components they would otherwise have been required to make
accessible. The Department also queried if there were other
requirements applicable to play areas in the 2004 ADAAG for which
the Department should consider exemptions or reduced scoping. Many
commenters opposed permitting existing play areas to make such
substitutions. Several commenters stated that the Access Board
already completed significant negotiation and cost balancing in its
rulemaking, so no additional exemptions should be added in either
meeting program access requirements or in alterations. Others noted
that elevated components are generally viewed as the more
challenging and exciting by children, so making more ground than
elevated play components accessible would result in discrimination
against children with disabilities in general and older children
with disabilities in particular. They argued that the ground
components would be seen as equipment for younger children and
children with disabilities, while elevated components would serve
only older children without disabilities. In addition, commenters
advised that including additional ground-level play components
would require more accessible route and use zone surfacing, which
would result in a higher cost burden than making elevated
components accessible.
The Department also asked for public comment on whether it would
be appropriate for the Access Board to consider issuing guidelines
for alterations to play and recreational facilities that would
permit reduced scoping of accessible components or substitution of
ground-level play components in lieu of elevated play components.
Most commenters opposed any additional reductions in scoping and
substitutions. These commenters uniformly stated that the Access
Board completed sufficient negotiation during its rulemaking on its
play area guidelines published in 2000 and that those guidelines
consequently should stand as is. One commenter advocated reduced
scoping and substitution of ground play components during
alterations only for those play areas built prior to the
finalization of the guidelines.
The Department has considered the comments it has received and
has determined that it is not necessary to provide a specific
exemption to the scoping for components for existing play areas or
to recommend reduced scoping or additional exemptions for
alteration, and has deleted the reduced scoping proposed in NPRM §
35.150(b)(4)(i) from the final rule. The Department believes that
it is preferable for public entities to try to achieve compliance
with the design standards established in the 2010 Standards. If
this is not possible to achieve in an existing setting, the
requirements for program accessibility provide enough flexibility
to permit the covered entity to pursue alternative approaches to
provide accessibility.
Second, in § 35.150(b)(5)(i) of the NPRM, the Department
proposed language stating that existing play areas that are less
than 1,000 square feet in size and are not otherwise being altered,
need not comply with the scoping and technical requirements for
play areas in section 240 of the 2004 ADAAG. The Department stated
it selected this size based on the provision in section 1008.2.4.1
of the 2004 ADAAG, Exception 1, which permits play areas less than
1,000 square feet in size to provide accessible routes with a
reduced clear width (44 inches instead of 60 inches). In its 2000
regulatory assessment for the play area guidelines, the Access
Board assumed that such “small” play areas represented only about
20 percent of the play areas located in public schools, and none of
the play areas located in city and State parks (which the Board
assumed were typically larger than 1,000 square feet).
In the NPRM, the Department asked if existing play areas less
than 1,000 square feet should be exempt from the requirements
applicable to play areas. The vast majority of commenters objected
to such an exemption. One commenter stated that many localities
that have parks this size are already making them accessible; many
cited concerns that this would leave all or most public playgrounds
in small towns inaccessible; and two commenters stated that, since
many of New York City's parks are smaller than 1,000 square feet,
only scattered larger parks in the various boroughs would be
obliged to become accessible. Residents with disabilities would
then have to travel substantial distances outside their own
neighborhoods to find accessible playgrounds. Some commenters
responded that this exemption should not apply in instances where
the play area is the only one in the program, while others said
that if a play area is exempt for reasons of size, but is the only
one in the area, then it should have at least an accessible route
and 50 percent of its ground-level play components accessible. One
commenter supported the exemption as presented in the question.
The Department is persuaded by these comments that it is
inappropriate to exempt public play areas that are less than 1,000
square feet in size. The Department believes that the factors used
to determine program accessibility, including the limits
established by the undue financial and administrative burdens
defense, provide sufficient flexibility to public entities in
determining how to make their existing play areas accessible. In
those cases where a title II entity believes that present economic
concerns make it an undue financial and administrative burden to
immediately make its existing playgrounds accessible in order to
comply with program accessibility requirements, then it may be
reasonable for the entity to develop a multi-year plan to bring its
facilities into compliance.
In addition to requesting public comment about the specific
sections in the NPRM, the Department also asked for public comment
about the appropriateness of a general safe harbor for existing
play areas and a safe harbor for public entities that have complied
with State or local standards specific to play areas. In the almost
200 comments received on title II play areas, the vast majority of
commenters strongly opposed all safe harbors, exemptions, and
reductions in scoping. By contrast, one commenter advocated a safe
harbor from compliance with the 2004 ADAAG play area requirements
along with reduced scoping and exemptions for both program
accessibility and alterations; a second commenter advocated only
the general safe harbor from compliance with the supplemental
requirements.
In response to the question of whether the Department should
exempt public entities from specific compliance with the
supplemental requirements for play areas, commenters stated that
since no specific standards previously existed, play areas are more
than a decade behind in providing full access for individuals with
disabilities. When accessible play areas were created, public
entities, acting in good faith, built them according to the 2004
ADAAG requirements; many equipment manufacturers also developed
equipment to meet those guidelines. If existing playgrounds were
exempted from compliance with the supplemental guidelines,
commenters said, those entities would be held to a lesser standard
and left with confusion, a sense of wasted resources, and federally
condoned discrimination and segregation. Commenters also cited
Federal agency settlement agreements on play areas that required
compliance with the guidelines. Finally, several commenters
observed that the provision of a safe harbor in this instance was
invalid for two reasons: (1) The rationale for other safe harbors -
that entities took action to comply with the 1991 Standards and
should not be further required to comply with new standards - does
not exist; and (2) concerns about financial and administrative
burdens are adequately addressed by program access
requirements.
The question of whether accessibility of play areas should
continue to be assessed on the basis of case-by-case evaluations
elicited conflicting responses. One commenter asserted that there
is no evidence that the case-by-case approach is not working and so
it should continue until found to be inconsistent with the ADA's
goals. Another commenter argued that case-by-case evaluations
result in unpredictable outcomes which result in costly and long
court actions. A third commenter, advocating against case-by-case
evaluations, requested instead increased direction and scoping to
define what constitutes an accessible play area program.
The Department has considered all of the comments it received in
response to its questions and has concluded that there is
insufficient basis to establish a safe harbor from compliance with
the supplemental guidelines. Thus, the Department has eliminated
the proposed exemption contained in § 35.150(b)(5)(i) of the NPRM
for existing play areas that are less than 1,000 square feet. The
Department believes that the factors used to determine program
accessibility, including the limits established by the undue
financial and administrative burdens defense, provide sufficient
flexibility to public entities in determining how to make their
existing play areas accessible.
In the NPRM, the Department also asked whether there are State
and local standards addressing play and recreation area
accessibility and, to the extent that there are such standards,
whether facilities currently governed by, and in compliance with,
such State and local standards or codes should be subject to a safe
harbor from compliance with applicable requirements in the 2004
ADAAG. The Department also asked whether it would be appropriate
for the Access Board to consider the implementation of guidelines
that would permit such a safe harbor with respect to play and
recreation areas undertaking alterations. In response, commenters
stated that few State or local governments have standards that
address issues of accessibility in play areas, and one commenter
organization said that it was unaware of any State or local
standards written specifically for accessible play areas. One
commenter observed from experience that most State and local
governments were waiting for the Access Board guidelines to become
enforceable standards as they had no standards themselves to
follow. Another commenter offered that public entities across the
United States already include in their playground construction bid
specifications language that requires compliance with the Access
Board's guidelines. A number of commenters advocated for the Access
Board's guidelines to become comprehensive Federal standards that
would complement any abbreviated State and local standards. One
commenter, however, supported a safe harbor for play areas
undergoing alterations if the areas currently comply with State or
local standards.
The Department is persuaded by these comments that there is
insufficient basis to establish a safe harbor for program access or
alterations for play areas built in compliance with State or local
laws.
In the NPRM, the Department asked whether “a reasonable number,
but at least one” is a workable standard to determine the
appropriate number of existing play areas that a public entity must
make accessible. Many commenters objected to this standard,
expressing concern that the phrase “at least one” would be
interpreted as a maximum rather than a minimum requirement. Such
commenters feared that this language would allow local governments
to claim compliance by making just one public park accessible,
regardless of the locality's size, budget, or other factors, and
would support segregation, forcing children with disabilities to
leave their neighborhoods to enjoy an accessible play area. While
some commenters criticized what they viewed as a new analysis of
program accessibility, others asserted that the requirements of
program accessibility should be changed to address issues related
to play areas that are not the main program in a facility but are
essential components of a larger program (e.g., drop-in
child care for a courthouse).
The Department believes that those commenters who opposed the
Department's “reasonable number, but at least one” standard for
program accessibility misunderstood the Department's proposal. The
Department did not intend any change in its longstanding
interpretation of the program accessibility requirement. Program
accessibility requires that each service, program, or activity be
operated “so that the service, program, or activity, when viewed in
its entirety, is readily accessible to and usable by individuals
with disabilities,” 28 CFR 35.150(a), subject to the undue
financial and administrative burdens and fundamental alterations
defenses provided in 28 CFR 35.150. In determining how many
facilities of a multi-site program must be made accessible in order
to make the overall program accessible, the standard has always
been an assessment of what is reasonable under the circumstances to
make the program readily accessible to and usable by individuals
with disabilities, taking into account such factors as the size of
the public entity, the particular program features offered at each
site, the geographical distance between sites, the travel times to
the sites, the number of sites, and availability of public
transportation to the sites. In choosing among available methods
for meeting this requirement, public entities are required to give
priority “to those methods that offer services, programs, and
activities * * * in the most integrated setting appropriate.” 28
CFR 35.150(b)(1). As a result, in cases where the sites are widely
dispersed with difficult travel access and where the program
features offered vary widely between sites, program accessibility
will require a larger number of facilities to be accessible in
order to ensure program accessibility than where multiple sites are
located in a concentrated area with easy travel access and
uniformity in program offerings.
Commenters responded positively to the Department's question in
the NPRM whether the final rule should provide a list of factors
that a public entity should use to determine how many of its
existing play areas should be made accessible. Commenters also
asserted strongly that the number of existing parks in the locality
should not be the main factor. In addition to the Department's
initial list - including number of play areas in an area, travel
times or geographic distances between play areas, and the size of
the public entity - commenters recommended such factors as
availability of accessible pedestrian routes to the playgrounds,
ready availability of accessible transportation, comparable
amenities and services in and surrounding the play areas, size of
the playgrounds, and sufficient variety in accessible play
components within the playgrounds. The Department agrees that these
factors should be considered, where appropriate, in any
determination of whether program accessibility has been achieved.
However, the Department has decided that it need not address these
factors in the final rule itself because the range of factors that
might need to be considered would vary depending upon the
circumstances of particular public entities. The Department does
not believe any list would be sufficiently comprehensive to cover
every situation.
The Department also requested public comment about whether there
was a “tipping point” at which the costs of compliance with the new
requirements for existing play areas would be so burdensome that
the entity would simply shut down the playground. Commenters
generally questioned the feasibility of determining a “tipping
point.” No commenters offered a recommended “tipping point.”
Moreover, most commenters stated that a “tipping point” is not a
valid consideration for various reasons, including that “tipping
points” will vary based upon each entity's budget and other
mandates, and costs that are too high will be addressed by the
limitations of the undue financial and administrative burdens
defense in the program accessibility requirement and that a
“tipping point” must be weighed against quality of life issues,
which are difficult to quantify. The Department has decided that
comments did not establish any clear “tipping point” and therefore
provides no regulatory requirement in this area.
Swimming pools. The 1991 Standards do not contain
specific scoping or technical requirements for swimming pools. As a
result, under the 1991 title II regulation, title II entities that
operate programs or activities that include swimming pools have not
been required to provide an accessible route into those pools via a
ramp or pool lift, although they are required to provide an
accessible route to such pools. In addition, these entities
continue to be subject to the general title II obligation to make
their programs usable and accessible to persons with
disabilities.
The 2004 ADAAG includes specific technical and scoping
requirements for new and altered swimming pools at sections 242 and
1009. In the NPRM, the Department sought to address the impact of
these requirements on existing swimming pools. Section 242.2 of the
2004 ADAAG states that swimming pools must provide two accessible
means of entry, except that swimming pools with less than 300
linear feet of swimming pool wall are only required to provide one
accessible means of entry, provided that the accessible means of
entry is either a swimming pool lift complying with section 1009.2
or a sloped entry complying with section 1009.3.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed, in § 35.150(b)(4)(ii),
that for measures taken to comply with title II's program
accessibility requirements, existing swimming pools with at least
300 linear feet of swimming pool wall would be required to provide
only one accessible means of access that complied with section
1009.2 or section 1009.3 of the 2004 ADAAG.
The Department specifically sought comment from public entities
and individuals with disabilities on the question whether the
Department should “allow existing public entities to provide only
one accessible means of access to swimming pools more than 300
linear feet long?” The Department received significant public
comment on this proposal.
Most commenters opposed any reduction in the scoping required in
the 2004 ADAAG, citing the fact that swimming is a common
therapeutic form of exercise for many individuals with
disabilities. Many commenters also stated that the cost of a
swimming pool lift, approximately $5,000, or other nonstructural
options for pool access such as transfer steps, transfer walls, and
transfer platforms, would not be an undue financial and
administrative burden for most title II entities. Other commenters
pointed out that the undue financial and administrative burdens
defense already provided public entities with a means to reduce
their scoping requirements. A few commenters cited safety concerns
resulting from having just one accessible means of access, and
stated that because pools typically have one ladder for every 75
linear feet of pool wall, they should have more than one accessible
means of access. One commenter stated that construction costs for a
public pool are approximately $4,000-4,500 per linear foot, making
the cost of a pool with 300 linear feet of swimming pool wall
approximately $1.2 million, compared to $5,000 for a pool lift.
Some commenters did not oppose the one accessible means of access
for larger pools so long as a lift was used. A few commenters
approved of the one accessible means of access for larger pools.
The Department also considered the American National Standard for
Public Swimming Pools, ANSI/NSPI-1 2003, section 23 of which states
that all pools should have at least two means of egress.
In the NPRM, the Department also proposed at § 35.150(b)(5)(ii)
that existing swimming pools with less than 300 linear feet of
swimming pool wall be exempted from having to comply with the
provisions of section 242.2. The Department's NPRM requested public
comment about the potential effect of this approach, asking whether
existing swimming pools with less than 300 linear feet of pool wall
should be exempt from the requirements applicable to swimming
pools.
Most commenters were opposed to this proposal. A number of
commenters stated, based on the Access Board estimates that 90
percent of public high school pools, 40 percent of public park and
community center pools, and 30 percent of public college and
university pools have less than 300 linear feet of pool wall, that
a large number of public swimming pools would fall under this
exemption. Other commenters pointed to the existing undue financial
and administrative burdens defenses as providing public entities
with sufficient protection from excessive compliance costs. Few
commenters supported this exemption.
The Department also considered the fact that many existing
swimming pools owned or operated by public entities are recipients
of Federal financial assistance and therefore, are also subject to
the program accessibility requirements of section 504 of the
Rehabilitation Act.
The Department has carefully considered all the information
available to it including the comments submitted on these two
proposed exemptions for swimming pools owned or operated by title
II entities. The Department acknowledges that swimming provides
important therapeutic, exercise, and social benefits for many
individuals with disabilities and is persuaded that exemption of
many publicly owned or operated pools from the 2010 Standards is
neither appropriate nor necessary. The Department agrees with the
commenters that title II already contains sufficient limitations on
public entities' obligations to make their programs accessible. In
particular, the Department agrees that those public entities that
can demonstrate that making particular existing swimming pools
accessible in accordance with the 2010 Standards would be an undue
financial and administrative burden are sufficiently protected from
excessive compliance costs. Thus, the Department has eliminated
proposed §§ 35.150(b)(4)(ii) and (b)(5)(ii) from the final
rule.
In addition, although the NPRM contained no specific proposed
regulatory language on this issue, the NPRM sought comment on what
would be a workable standard for determining the appropriate number
of existing swimming pools that a public entity must make
accessible for its program to be accessible. The Department asked
whether a “reasonable number, but at least one” would be a workable
standard and, if not, whether there was a more appropriate specific
standard. The Department also asked if, in the alternative, the
Department should provide “a list of factors that a public entity
could use to determine how many of its existing swimming pools to
make accessible, e.g., number of swimming pools, travel times or
geographic distances between swimming pools, and the size of the
public entity?”
A number of commenters expressed concern over the “reasonable
number, but at least one” standard and contended that, in reality,
public entities would never provide more than one accessible
existing pool, thus segregating individuals with disabilities.
Other commenters felt that the existing program accessibility
standard was sufficient. Still others suggested that one in every
three existing pools should be made accessible. One commenter
suggested that all public pools should be accessible. Some
commenters proposed a list of factors to determine how many
existing pools should be accessible. Those factors include the
total number of pools, the location, size, and type of pools
provided, transportation availability, and lessons and activities
available. A number of commenters suggested that the standard
should be based on geographic areas, since pools serve specific
neighborhoods. One commenter argued that each pool should be
examined individually to determine what can be done to improve its
accessibility.
The Department did not include any language in the final rule
that specifies the “reasonable number, but at least one” standard
for program access. However, the Department believes that its
proposal was misunderstood by many commenters. Each service,
program, or activity conducted by a public entity, when viewed in
its entirety, must still be readily accessible to and usable by
individuals with disabilities unless doing so would result in a
fundamental alteration in the nature of the program or activity or
in undue financial and administrative burdens. Determining which
pool(s) to make accessible and whether more than one accessible
pool is necessary to provide program access requires analysis of a
number of factors, including, but not limited to, the size of the
public entity, geographical distance between pool sites, whether
more than one community is served by particular pools, travel times
to the pools, the total number of pools, the availability of
lessons and other programs and amenities at each pool, and the
availability of public transportation to the pools. In many
instances, making one existing swimming pool accessible will not be
sufficient to ensure program accessibility. There may, however, be
some circumstances where a small public entity can demonstrate that
modifying one pool is sufficient to provide access to the public
entity's program of providing public swimming pools. In all cases,
a public entity must still demonstrate that its programs, including
the program of providing public swimming pools, when viewed in
their entirety, are accessible.
Wading pools. The 1991 Standards do not address wading
pools. Section 242.3 of the 2004 ADAAG requires newly constructed
or altered wading pools to provide at least one sloped means of
entry to the deepest part of the pool. The Department was concerned
about the potential impact of this new requirement on existing
wading pools. Therefore, in the NPRM, the Department sought
comments on whether existing wading pools that are not being
altered should be exempt from this requirement, asking, “[w]hat
site constraints exist in existing facilities that could make it
difficult or infeasible to install a sloped entry in an existing
wading pool? Should existing wading pools that are not being
altered be exempt from the requirement to provide a sloped entry?”
73 FR 34466, 34487-88 (June 17, 2008). Most commenters agreed that
existing wading pools that are not being altered should be exempt
from this requirement. Almost all commenters felt that during
alterations a sloped entry should be provided unless it was
technically infeasible to do so. Several commenters felt that the
required clear deck space surrounding a pool provided sufficient
space for a sloped entry during alterations.
The Department also solicited comments on the possibility of
exempting existing wading pools from the obligation to provide
program accessibility. Most commenters argued that installing a
sloped entry in an existing wading pool is not very feasible.
Because covered entities are not required to undertake
modifications that would be technically infeasible, the Department
believes that the rule as drafted provides sufficient protection
from unwarranted expense to the operators of small existing wading
pools. Other existing wading pools, particularly those larger pools
associated with facilities such as aquatic centers or water parks,
must be assessed on a case-by-case basis. Therefore, the Department
has not included such an exemption for wading pools in its final
rule.
Saunas and steam rooms. The 1991 Standards do not address
saunas and steam rooms. Section 35.150(b)(5)(iii) of the NPRM
exempted existing saunas and steam rooms that seat only two
individuals and were not being altered from section 241 of the 2004
ADAAG, which requires an accessible turning space. Two commenters
objected to this exemption as unnecessary, and argued that the cost
of accessible saunas is not high and public entities still have an
undue financial and administrative burdens defense.
The Department considered these comments and has decided to
eliminate the exemption for existing saunas and steam rooms that
seat only two people. Such an exemption is unnecessary because
covered entities will not be subject to program accessibility
requirements to make existing saunas and steam rooms accessible if
doing so constitutes an undue financial and administrative burden.
The Department believes it is likely that because of their
pre-fabricated forms, which include built-in seats, it would be
either technically infeasible or an undue financial and
administrative burden to modify such saunas and steams rooms.
Consequently, a separate exemption for saunas and steam rooms would
have been superfluous. Finally, employing the program accessibility
standard for small saunas and steam rooms is consistent with the
Department's decisions regarding the proposed exemptions for play
areas and swimming pools.
Several commenters also argued in favor of a specific exemption
for existing spas. The Department notes that the technical
infeasibility and program accessibility defenses are applicable
equally to existing spas and declines to adopt such an
exemption.
Other recreational facilities. In the NPRM, the
Department asked about a number of issues relating to recreation
facilities such as team or player seating areas, areas of sport
activity, exercise machines, boating facilities, fishing piers and
platforms, and miniature golf courses. The Department's questions
addressed the costs and benefits of applying the 2004 ADAAG to
these spaces and facilities and the application of the specific
technical requirements in the 2004 ADAAG for these spaces and
facilities. The discussion of the comments received by the
Department on these issues and the Department's response to those
comments can be found in either the section of Appendix A to this
rule entitled “Other Issues,” or in Appendix B to the final title
III rule, which will be published today elsewhere in this
volume.
Section 35.151 New construction and alterations
Section 35.151(a), which provided that those facilities that are
constructed or altered by, on behalf of, or for the use of a public
entity shall be designed, constructed, or altered to be readily
accessible to and usable by individuals with disabilities, is
unchanged in the final rule, but has been redesignated as §
35.151(a)(1). The Department has added a new section, designated as
§ 35.151(a)(2), to provide that full compliance with the
requirements of this section is not required where an entity can
demonstrate that it is structurally impracticable to meet the
requirements. Full compliance will be considered structurally
impracticable only in those rare circumstances when the unique
characteristics of terrain prevent the incorporation of
accessibility features. This exception was contained in the title
III regulation and in the 1991 Standards (applicable to both public
accommodations and facilities used by public entities), so it has
applied to any covered facility that was constructed under the 1991
Standards since the effective date of the ADA. The Department added
it to the text of § 35.151 to maintain consistency between the
design requirements that apply under title II and those that apply
under title III. The Department received no significant comments
about this section.
Section 35.151(b) Alterations
The 1991 title II regulation does not contain any specific
regulatory language comparable to the 1991 title III regulation
relating to alterations and path of travel for covered entities,
although the 1991 Standards describe standards for path of travel
during alterations to a primary function. See 28 CFR part
36, app A., section 4.1.6(a) (2009).
The path of travel requirements contained in the title III
regulation are based on section 303(a)(2) of the ADA, 42 U.S.C.
12183(a)(2), which provides that when an entity undertakes an
alteration to a place of public accommodation or commercial
facility that affects or could affect the usability of or access to
an area that contains a primary function, the entity shall ensure
that, to the maximum extent feasible, the path of travel to the
altered area - and the restrooms, telephones, and drinking
fountains serving it - is readily accessible to and usable by
individuals with disabilities, including individuals who use
wheelchairs.
The NPRM proposed amending § 35.151 to add both the path of
travel requirements and the exemption relating to barrier removal
(as modified to apply to the program accessibility standard in
title II) that are contained in the title III regulation to the
title II regulation. Proposed § 35.151(b)(4) contained the
requirements for path of travel. Proposed § 35.151(b)(2) stated
that the path of travel requirements of § 35.151(b)(4) shall not
apply to measures taken solely to comply with program accessibility
requirements.
Where the specific requirements for path of travel apply under
title III, they are limited to the extent that the cost and scope
of alterations to the path of travel are disproportionate to the
cost of the overall alteration, as determined under criteria
established by the Attorney General.
The Access Board included the path of travel requirement for
alterations to facilities covered by the standards (other than
those subject to the residential facilities standards) in section
202.4 of 2004 ADAAG. Section 35.151(b)(4)(iii) of the final rule
establishes the criteria for determining when the cost of
alterations to the path of travel is “disproportionate” to the cost
of the overall alteration.
The NPRM also provided that areas such as supply storage rooms,
employee lounges and locker rooms, janitorial closets, entrances,
and corridors are not areas containing a primary function. Nor are
restroom areas considered to contain a primary function unless the
provision of restrooms is a primary purpose of the facility, such
as at a highway rest stop. In that situation, a restroom would be
considered to be an “area containing a primary function” of the
facility.
The Department is not changing the requirements for program
accessibility. As provided in § 35.151(b)(2) of the regulation, the
path of travel requirements of § 35.151(b)(4) only apply to
alterations undertaken solely for purposes other than to meet the
program accessibility requirements. The exemption for the specific
path of travel requirement was included in the regulation to ensure
that the specific requirements and disproportionality exceptions
for path of travel are not applied when areas are being altered to
meet the title II program accessibility requirements in § 35.150.
In contrast, when areas are being altered to meet program
accessibility requirements, they must comply with all of the
applicable requirements referenced in section 202 of the 2010
Standards. A covered title II entity must provide accessibility to
meet the requirements of § 35.150 unless doing so is an undue
financial and administrative burden in accordance with §
35.150(a)(3). A covered title II entity may not use the
disproportionality exception contained in the path of travel
provisions as a defense to providing an accessible route as part of
its obligation to provide program accessibility. The undue
financial and administrative burden standard does not
contain any bright line financial tests.
The Department's proposed § 35.151(b)(4) adopted the language
now contained in § 36.403 of the title III regulation, including
the disproportionality limitation (i.e., alterations made to
provide an accessible path of travel to the altered area would be
deemed disproportionate to the overall alteration when the cost
exceeds 20 percent of the cost of the alteration to the primary
function area). Proposed § 35.151(b)(2) provided that the path of
travel requirements do not apply to alterations undertaken solely
to comply with program accessibility requirements.
The Department received a substantial number of comments
objecting to the Department's adoption of the exemption for the
path of travel requirements when alterations are undertaken solely
to meet program accessibility requirements. These commenters argued
that the Department had no statutory basis for providing this
exemption nor does it serve any purpose. In addition, these
commenters argued that the path of travel exemption has the effect
of placing new limitations on the obligations to provide program
access. A number of commenters argued that doing away with the path
of travel requirement would render meaningless the concept of
program access. They argued that just as the requirement to provide
an accessible path of travel to an altered area (regardless of the
reason for the alteration), including making the restrooms,
telephones, and drinking fountains that serve the altered area
accessible, is a necessary requirement in other alterations, it is
equally necessary for alterations made to provide program access.
Several commenters expressed concern that a readily accessible path
of travel be available to ensure that persons with disabilities can
get to the physical location in which programs are held. Otherwise,
they will not be able to access the public entity's service,
program, or activity. Such access is a cornerstone of the
protections provided by the ADA. Another commenter argued that it
would be a waste of money to create an accessible facility without
having a way to get to the primary area. This commenter also stated
that the International Building Code (IBC) requires the path of
travel to a primary function area, up to 20 percent of the cost of
the project. Another commenter opposed the exemption, stating that
the trigger of an alteration is frequently the only time that a
facility must update its facilities to comply with evolving
accessibility standards.
In the Department's view, the commenters objecting to the path
of travel exemption contained in § 35.151(b)(2) did not understand
the intention behind the exemption. The exemption was not intended
to eliminate any existing requirements related to accessibility for
alterations undertaken in order to meet program access obligations
under § 35.149 and § 35.150. Rather, it was intended to ensure that
covered entities did not apply the path of travel requirements in
lieu of the overarching requirements in this Subpart that apply
when making a facility accessible in order to comply with program
accessibility. The exemption was also intended to make it clear
that the disproportionality test contained in the path of travel
standards is not applicable in determining whether providing
program access results in an undue financial and administration
burden within the meaning of § 35.150(a)(3). The exemption was also
provided to maintain consistency with the title III path of travel
exemption for barrier removal, see § 36.304(d), in keeping
with the Department's regulatory authority under title II of the
ADA. See 42 U.S.C. 12134(b); see also H. R Rep. No.
101B485, pt. 2, at 84 (1990) (“The committee intends, however, that
the forms of discrimination prohibited by section 202 be identical
to those set out in the applicable provisions of titles I and III
of this legislation.”).
For title II entities, the path of travel requirements are of
significance in those cases where an alteration is being made
solely for reasons other than program accessibility. For example, a
public entity might have six courtrooms in two existing buildings
and might determine that only three of those courtrooms and the
public use and common use areas serving those courtrooms in one
building are needed to be made accessible in order to satisfy its
program access obligations. When the public entity makes those
courtrooms and the public use and common use areas serving them
accessible in order to meet its program access obligations, it will
have to comply with the 2010 Standards unless the public entity can
demonstrate that full compliance would result in undue financial
and administrative burdens as described in § 35.150(a)(3). If such
action would result in an undue financial or administrative burden,
the public entity would nevertheless be required to take some other
action that would not result in such an alteration or such burdens
but would ensure that the benefits and services provided by the
public entity are readily accessible to persons with disabilities.
When the public entity is making modifications to meet its program
access obligation, it may not rely on the path of travel exception
under § 35.151(b)(4), which limits the requirement to those
alterations where the cost and scope of the alterations are not
disproportionate to the cost and scope of the overall alterations.
If the public entity later decides to alter courtrooms in the other
building, for purposes of updating the facility (and, as previously
stated, has met its program access obligations) then in that case,
the public entity would have to comply with the path of travel
requirements in the 2010 Standards subject to the
disproportionality exception set forth in § 35.151(b)(4).
The Department has slightly revised proposed § 35.151(b)(2) to
make it clearer that the path of travel requirements only apply
when alterations are undertaken solely for purposes other than
program accessibility.
Section 35.151(b)(4)(ii)(C) Path of travel - safe harbor
In § 35.151(b)(4)(ii)(C) of the NPRM, the Department included a
provision that stated that public entities that have brought
required elements of path of travel into compliance with the 1991
Standards are not required to retrofit those elements in order to
reflect incremental changes in the 2010 Standards solely because of
an alteration to a primary function area that is served by that
path of travel. In these circumstances, the public entity is
entitled to a safe harbor and is only required to modify elements
to comply with the 2010 Standards if the public entity is planning
an alteration to the element.
A substantial number of commenters objected to the Department's
imposition of a safe harbor for alterations to facilities of public
entities that comply with the 1991 Standards. These commenters
argued that if a public entity is already in the process of
altering its facility, there should be a legal requirement that
individuals with disabilities be entitled to increased
accessibility by using the 2010 Standards for path of travel work.
They also stated that they did not believe there was a statutory
basis for “grandfathering” facilities that comply with the 1991
Standards.
The ADA is silent on the issue of “grandfathering” or
establishing a safe harbor for measuring compliance in situations
where the covered entity is not undertaking a planned alteration to
specific building elements. The ADA delegates to the Attorney
General the responsibility for issuing regulations that define the
parameters of covered entities' obligations when the statute does
not directly address an issue. This regulation implements that
delegation of authority.
One commenter proposed that a previous record of barrier removal
be one of the factors in determining, prospectively, what renders a
facility, when viewed in its entirety, usable and accessible to
persons with disabilities. Another commenter asked the Department
to clarify, at a minimum, that to the extent compliance with the
1991 Standards does not provide program access, particularly with
regard to areas not specifically addressed in the 1991 Standards,
the safe harbor will not operate to relieve an entity of its
obligations to provide program access.
One commenter supported the proposal to add a safe harbor for
path of travel.
The final rule retains the safe harbor for required elements of
a path of travel to altered primary function areas for public
entities that have already complied with the 1991 Standards with
respect to those required elements. The Department believes that
this safe harbor strikes an appropriate balance between ensuring
that individuals with disabilities are provided access to buildings
and facilities and potential financial burdens on existing public
entities that are undertaking alterations subject to the 2010
Standards. This safe harbor is not a blanket exemption for
facilities. If a public entity undertakes an alteration to a
primary function area, only the required elements of a path of
travel to that area that already comply with the 1991 Standards are
subject to the safe harbor. If a public entity undertakes an
alteration to a primary function area and the required elements of
a path of travel to the altered area do not comply with the 1991
Standards, then the public entity must bring those elements into
compliance with the 2010 Standards.
Section 35.151(b)(3) Alterations to historic facilities
The final rule renumbers the requirements for alterations to
historic facilities enumerated in current § 35.151(d)(1) and (2) as
§ 35.151(b)(3)(i) and (ii). Currently, the regulation provides that
alterations to historic facilities shall comply to the maximum
extent feasible with section 4.1.7 of UFAS or section 4.1.7 of the
1991 Standards. See 28 CFR 35.151(d)(1). Section
35.151(b)(3)(i) of the final rule eliminates the option of using
UFAS for alterations that commence on or after March 15, 2012. The
substantive requirement in current § 35.151(d)(2) - that
alternative methods of access shall be provided pursuant to the
requirements of § 35.150 if it is not feasible to provide physical
access to an historic property in a manner that will not threaten
or destroy the historic significance of the building or facility -
is contained in § 35.151(b)(3)(ii).
Section 35.151(c) Accessibility standards for new construction and
alterations
Section 35.151(c) of the NPRM proposed to adopt ADA Chapter 1,
ADA Chapter 2, and Chapters 3 through 10 of the Americans with
Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act Guidelines (2004
ADAAG) into the ADA Standards for Accessible Design (2010
Standards). As the Department has noted, the development of these
standards represents the culmination of a lengthy effort by the
Access Board to update its guidelines, to make the Federal
guidelines consistent to the extent permitted by law, and to
harmonize the Federal requirements with the private sector model
codes that form the basis of many State and local building code
requirements. The full text of the 2010 Standards is available for
public review on the ADA Home Page (http://www.ada.gov) and
on the Access Board's Web site
(http://www.access-board.gov/gs.htm) (last visited June 24,
2010). The Access Board site also includes an extensive discussion
of the development of the 2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines, and a detailed
comparison of the 1991 Standards, the 2004 ADA/ABA Guidelines, and
the 2003 International Building Code.
Section 204 of the ADA, 42 U.S.C. 12134, directs the Attorney
General to issue regulations to implement title II that are
consistent with the minimum guidelines published by the Access
Board. The Attorney General (or his designee) is a statutory member
of the Access Board (see 29 U.S.C. 792(a)(1)(B(vii)) and was
involved in the development of the 2004 ADAAG. Nevertheless, during
the process of drafting the NPRM, the Department reviewed the 2004
ADAAG to determine if additional regulatory provisions were
necessary. As a result of this review, the Department decided to
propose new sections, which were contained in § 35.151(e)-(h) of
the NPRM, to clarify how the Department will apply the proposed
standards to social service center establishments, housing at
places of education, assembly areas, and medical care facilities.
Each of these provisions is discussed below.
Congress anticipated that there would be a need for close
coordination of the ADA building requirements with State and local
building code requirements. Therefore, the ADA authorized the
Attorney General to establish an ADA code certification process
under title III of the ADA. That process is addressed in 28 CFR
part 36, subpart F. Revisions to that process are addressed in the
regulation amending the title III regulation published elsewhere in
the Federal Register today. In addition, the Department operates an
extensive technical assistance program. The Department anticipates
that once this rule is final, revised technical assistance material
will be issued to provide guidance about its implementation.
Section 35.151(c) of the 1991 title II regulation establishes
two standards for accessible new construction and alteration. Under
paragraph (c), design, construction, or alteration of facilities in
conformance with UFAS or with the 1991 Standards (which, at the
time of the publication of the rule were also referred to as the
Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities (1991 ADAAG)) is deemed to comply with the
requirements of this section with respect to those facilities
(except that if the 1991 Standards are chosen, the elevator
exemption does not apply). The 1991 Standards were based on the
1991 ADAAG, which was initially developed by the Access Board as
guidelines for the accessibility of buildings and facilities that
are subject to title III. The Department adopted the 1991 ADAAG as
the standards for places of public accommodation and commercial
facilities under title III of the ADA and it was published as
Appendix A to the Department's regulation implementing title III,
56 FR 35592 (July 26, 1991) as amended, 58 FR 17522 (April 5,
1993), and as further amended, 59 FR 2675 (Jan. 18, 1994), codified
at 28 CFR part 36 (2009).
Section 35.151(c) of the final rule adopts the 2010 Standards
and establishes the compliance date and triggering events for the
application of those standards to both new construction and
alterations. Appendix B of the final title III rule (Analysis and
Commentary on the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design) (which
will be published today elsewhere in this volume and codified as
Appendix B to 28 CFR part 36) provides a description of the major
changes in the 2010 Standards (as compared to the 1991 ADAAG) and a
discussion of the public comments that the Department received on
specific sections of the 2004 ADAAG. A number of commenters asked
the Department to revise certain provisions in the 2004 ADAAG in a
manner that would reduce either the required scoping or specific
technical accessibility requirements. As previously stated,
although the ADA requires the enforceable standards issued by the
Department under title II and title III to be consistent with the
minimum guidelines published by the Access Board, it is the sole
responsibility of the Attorney General to promulgate standards and
to interpret and enforce those standards. The guidelines adopted by
the Access Board are “minimum guidelines.” 42 U.S.C. 12186(c).
Compliance date. When the ADA was enacted, the effective
dates for various provisions were delayed in order to provide time
for covered entities to become familiar with their new obligations.
Titles II and III of the ADA generally became effective on January
26, 1992, six months after the regulations were published.
See 42 U.S.C. 12131 note; 42 U.S.C. 12181 note. New
construction under title II and alterations under either title II
or title III had to comply with the design standards on that date.
See 42 U.S.C. 12183(a)(1). For new construction under title
III, the requirements applied to facilities designed and
constructed for first occupancy after January 26, 1993 - 18 months
after the 1991 Standards were published by the Department. In the
NPRM, the Department proposed to amend § 35.151(c)(1) by revising
the current language to limit the application of the 1991 standards
to facilities on which construction commences within six months of
the final rule adopting revised standards. The NPRM also proposed
adding paragraph (c)(2) to § 35.151, which states that facilities
on which construction commences on or after the date six months
following the effective date of the final rule shall comply with
the proposed standards adopted by that rule.
As a result, under the NPRM, for the first six months after the
effective date, public entities would have the option to use either
UFAS or the 1991 Standards and be in compliance with title II. Six
months after the effective date of the rule, the new standards
would take effect. At that time, construction in accordance with
UFAS would no longer satisfy ADA requirements. The Department
stated that in order to avoid placing the burden of complying with
both standards on public entities, the Department would coordinate
a government-wide effort to revise Federal agencies' section 504
regulations to adopt the 2004 ADAAG as the standard for new
construction and alterations.
The purpose of the proposed six-month delay in requiring
compliance with the 2010 Standards was to allow covered entities a
reasonable grace period to transition between the existing and the
proposed standards. For that reason, if a title II entity preferred
to use the 2010 Standards as the standard for new construction or
alterations commenced within the six-month period after the
effective date of the final rule, such entity would be considered
in compliance with title II of the ADA.
The Department received a number of comments about the proposed
six-month effective date for the title II regulation that were
similar in content to those received on this issue for the proposed
title III regulation. Several commenters supported the six-month
effective date. One commenter stated that any revisions to its
State building code becomes effective six months after adoption and
that this has worked well. In addition, this commenter stated that
since 2004 ADAAG is similar to IBC 2006 and ICC/ANSI A117.1-2003,
the transition should be easy. By contrast, another commenter
advocated for a minimum 12-month effective date, arguing that a
shorter effective date could cause substantial economic hardships
to many cities and towns because of the lengthy lead time necessary
for construction projects. This commenter was concerned that a
six-month effective date could lead to projects having to be
completely redrawn, rebid, and rescheduled to ensure compliance
with the new standards. Other commenters advocated that the
effective date be extended to at least 18 months after the
publication of the rule. One of these commenters expressed concern
that the kinds of bureaucratic organizations subject to the title
II regulations lack the internal resources to quickly evaluate the
regulatory changes, determine whether they are currently compliant
with the 1991 standards, and determine what they have to do to
comply with the new standards. The other commenter argued that 18
months is the minimum amount of time necessary to ensure that
projects that have already been designed and approved do not have
to undergo costly design revisions at taxpayer expense.
The Department is persuaded by the concerns raised by commenters
for both the title II and III regulations that the six-month
compliance date proposed in the NPRM for application of the 2010
Standards may be too short for certain projects that are already in
the midst of the design and permitting process. The Department has
determined that for new construction and alterations, compliance
with the 2010 Standards will not be required until 18 months from
the date the final rule is published. Until the time compliance
with the 2010 Standards is required, public entities will have the
option of complying with the 2010 Standards, the UFAS, or the 1991
Standards. However, public entities that choose to comply with the
2010 Standards in lieu of the 1991 Standards or UFAS prior to the
compliance date described in this rule must choose one of the three
standards, and may not rely on some of the requirements contained
in one standard and some of the requirements contained in the other
standards.
Triggering event. In § 35.151(c)(2) of the NPRM, the
Department proposed that the commencement of construction serve as
the triggering event for applying the proposed standards to new
construction and alterations under title II. This language is
consistent with the triggering event set forth in § 35.151(a) of
the 1991 title II regulation. The Department received only four
comments on this section of the title II rule. Three commenters
supported the use of “start of construction” as the triggering
event. One commenter argued that the Department should use the
“last building permit or start of physical construction, whichever
comes first,” stating that “altering a design after a building
permit has been issued can be an undue burden.”
After considering these comments, the Department has decided to
continue to use the commencement of physical construction as the
triggering event for application of the 2010 Standards for entities
covered by title II. The Department has also added clarifying
language at § 35.151(c)(4) to the regulation to make it clear that
the date of ceremonial groundbreaking or the date a structure is
razed to make it possible for construction of a facility to take
place does not qualify as the commencement of physical
construction.
Section 234 of the 2010 Standards provides accessibility
guidelines for newly designed and constructed amusement rides. The
amusement ride provisions do not provide a “triggering event” for
new construction or alteration of an amusement ride. An industry
commenter requested that the triggering event of “first use,” as
noted in the Advisory note to section 234.1 of the 2004 ADAAG, be
included in the final rule. The Advisory note provides that “[a]
custom designed and constructed ride is new upon its first use,
which is the first time amusement park patrons take the ride.” The
Department declines to treat amusement rides differently than other
types of new construction and alterations. Under the final rule,
they are subject to § 35.151(c). Thus, newly constructed and
altered amusement rides shall comply with the 2010 Standards if the
start of physical construction or the alteration is on or after 18
months from the publication date of this rule. The Department also
notes that section 234.4.2 of the 2010 Standards only applies where
the structural or operational characteristics of an amusement ride
are altered. It does not apply in cases where the only change to a
ride is the theme.
Noncomplying new construction and alterations. The
element-by-element safe harbor referenced in § 35.150(b)(2) has no
effect on new or altered elements in existing facilities that were
subject to the 1991 Standards or UFAS on the date that they were
constructed or altered, but do not comply with the technical and
scoping specifications for those elements in the 1991 Standards or
UFAS. Section 35.151(c)(5) of the final rule sets forth the rules
for noncompliant new construction or alterations in facilities that
were subject to the requirements of this part. Under those
provisions, noncomplying new construction and alterations
constructed or altered after the effective date of the applicable
ADA requirements and before March 15, 2012 shall, before March 15,
2012, be made accessible in accordance with either the 1991
Standards, UFAS, or the 2010 Standards. Noncomplying new
construction and alterations constructed or altered after the
effective date of the applicable ADA requirements and before March
15, 2012, shall, on or after March 15, 2012 be made accessible in
accordance with the 2010 Standards.
Section 35.151(d) Scope of coverage
In the NPRM, the Department proposed a new provision, §
35.151(d), to clarify that the requirements established by §
35.151, including those contained in the 2004 ADAAG, prescribe what
is necessary to ensure that buildings and facilities, including
fixed or built-in elements in new or altered facilities, are
accessible to individuals with disabilities. Once the construction
or alteration of a facility has been completed, all other aspects
of programs, services, and activities conducted in that facility
are subject to the operational requirements established in this
final rule. Although the Department may use the requirements of the
2010 Standards as a guide to determining when and how to make
equipment and furnishings accessible, those determinations fall
within the discretionary authority of the Department.
The Department also wishes to clarify that the advisory notes,
appendix notes, and figures that accompany the 1991 and 2010
Standards do not establish separately enforceable requirements
unless specifically stated otherwise in the text of the standards.
This clarification has been made to address concerns expressed by
ANPRM commenters who mistakenly believed that the advisory notes in
the 2004 ADAAG established requirements beyond those established in
the text of the guidelines (e.g., Advisory 504.4 suggests, but does
not require, that covered entities provide visual contrast on stair
tread nosing to make them more visible to individuals with low
vision). The Department received no significant comments on this
section and it is unchanged in the final rule.
Definitions of residential facilities and transient
lodging. The 2010 Standards add a definition of “residential
dwelling unit” and modify the current definition of “transient
lodging.” Under section 106.5 of the 2010 Standards, “residential
dwelling unit” is defined as “[a] unit intended to be used as a
residence, that is primarily long-term in nature” and does not
include transient lodging, inpatient medical care, licensed
long-term care, and detention or correctional facilities.
Additionally, section 106.5 of the 2010 Standards changes the
definition of “transient lodging” to a building or facility
“containing one or more guest room(s) for sleeping that provides
accommodations that are primarily short-term in nature.” “Transient
lodging” does not include residential dwelling units intended to be
used as a residence. The references to “dwelling units” and
“dormitories” that are in the definition of the 1991 Standards are
omitted from the 2010 Standards.
The comments about the application of transient lodging or
residential standards to social service center establishments, and
housing at a place of education are addressed separately below. The
Department received one additional comment on this issue from an
organization representing emergency response personnel seeking an
exemption from the transient lodging accessibility requirements for
crew quarters and common use areas serving those crew quarters
(e.g., locker rooms, exercise rooms, day room) that are used
exclusively by on-duty emergency response personnel and that are
not used for any public purpose. The commenter argued that since
emergency response personnel must meet certain physical
qualifications that have the effect of exempting persons with
mobility disabilities, there is no need to build crew quarters and
common use areas serving those crew quarters to meet the 2004
ADAAG. In addition, the commenter argued that applying the
transient lodging standards would impose significant costs and
create living space that is less usable for most emergency response
personnel.
The ADA does not exempt spaces because of a belief or policy
that excludes persons with disabilities from certain work. However,
the Department believes that crew quarters that are used
exclusively as a residence by emergency response personnel and the
kitchens and bathrooms exclusively serving those quarters are more
like residential dwelling units and are therefore covered by the
residential dwelling standards in the 2010 Standards, not the
transient lodging standards. The residential dwelling standards
address most of the concerns of the commenter. For example, the
commenter was concerned that sinks in kitchens and lavatories in
bathrooms that are accessible under the transient lodging standards
would be too low to be comfortably used by emergency response
personnel. The residential dwelling standards allow such features
to be adaptable so that they would not have to be lowered until
accessibility was needed. Similarly, grab bars and shower seats
would not have to be installed at the time of construction provided
that reinforcement has been installed in walls and located so as to
permit their installation at a later date.
Section 35.151(e) Social service center establishments
In the NPRM, the Department proposed a new § 35.151(e) requiring
group homes, halfway houses, shelters, or similar social service
center establishments that provide temporary sleeping
accommodations or residential dwelling units to comply with the
provisions of the 2004 ADAAG that apply to residential facilities,
including, but not limited to, the provisions in sections 233 and
809.
The NPRM explained that this proposal was based on two important
changes in the 2004 ADAAG. First, for the first time, residential
dwelling units are explicitly covered in the 2004 ADAAG in section
233. Second, the 2004 ADAAG eliminates the language contained in
the 1991 Standards addressing scoping and technical requirements
for homeless shelters, group homes, and similar social service
center establishments. Currently, such establishments are covered
in section 9.5 of the transient lodging section of the 1991
Standards. The deletion of section 9.5 creates an ambiguity of
coverage that must be addressed.
The NPRM explained the Department's belief that transferring
coverage of social service center establishments from the transient
lodging standards to the residential facilities standards would
alleviate conflicting requirements for social service center
providers. The Department believes that a substantial percentage of
social service center establishments are recipients of Federal
financial assistance from the Department of Housing and Urban
Development (HUD). The Department of Health and Human Services
(HHS) also provides financial assistance for the operation of
shelters through the Administration for Children and Families
programs. As such, these establishments are covered both by the ADA
and section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act. UFAS is currently the
design standard for new construction and alterations for entities
subject to section 504. The two design standards for accessibility
- the 1991 Standards and UFAS - have confronted many social service
providers with separate, and sometimes conflicting, requirements
for design and construction of facilities. To resolve these
conflicts, the residential facilities standards in the 2004 ADAAG
have been coordinated with the section 504 requirements. The
transient lodging standards, however, are not similarly
coordinated. The deletion of section 9.5 of the 1991 Standards from
the 2004 ADAAG presented two options: (1) Require coverage under
the transient lodging standards, and subject such facilities to
separate, conflicting requirements for design and construction; or
(2) require coverage under the residential facilities standards,
which would harmonize the regulatory requirements under the ADA and
section 504. The Department chose the option that harmonizes the
regulatory requirements: coverage under the residential facilities
standards.
In the NPRM, the Department expressed concern that the
residential facilities standards do not include a requirement for
clear floor space next to beds similar to the requirement in the
transient lodging standards and as a result, the Department
proposed adding a provision that would require certain social
service center establishments that provide sleeping rooms with more
than 25 beds to ensure that a minimum of 5 percent of the beds have
clear floor space in accordance with section 806.2.3 or of the 2004
ADAAG.
In the NPRM, the Department requested information from providers
who operate homeless shelters, transient group homes, halfway
houses, and other social service center establishments, and from
the clients of these facilities who would be affected by this
proposed change, asking, “[t]o what extent have conflicts between
the ADA and section 504 affected these facilities? What would be
the effect of applying the residential dwelling unit requirements
to these facilities, rather than the requirements for transient
lodging guest rooms?” 73 FR 34466, 34491 (June 17, 2008).
Many of the commenters supported applying the residential
facilities requirements to social service center establishments,
stating that even though the residential facilities requirements
are less demanding in some instances, the existence of one clear
standard will result in an overall increased level of accessibility
by eliminating the confusion and inaction that are sometimes caused
by the current existence of multiple requirements. One commenter
also stated that “it makes sense to treat social service center
establishments like residential facilities because this is how
these establishments function in practice.”
Two commenters agreed with applying the residential facilities
requirements to social service center establishments but
recommended adding a requirement for various bathing options, such
as a roll-in shower (which is not required under the residential
standards).
One commenter objected to the change and asked the Department to
require that social service center establishments continue to
comply with the transient lodging standards. One commenter stated
that it did not agree that the standards for residential coverage
would serve persons with disabilities as well as the 1991 transient
lodging standards. This commenter expressed concern that the
Department had eliminated guidance for social service agencies and
that the rule should be put on hold until those safeguards are
restored. Another commenter argued that the rule that would provide
the greatest access for persons with disabilities should
prevail.
Several commenters argued for the application of the transient
lodging standards to all social service center establishments
except those that were “intended as a person's place of abode,”
referencing the Department's question related to the definition of
“place of lodging” in the title III NPRM. One commenter stated that
the International Building Code requires accessible units in all
transient facilities. The commenter expressed concern that group
homes should be built to be accessible, rather than adaptable.
The Department continues to be concerned about alleviating the
challenges for social service providers that are also subject to
section 504 and would likely be subject to conflicting requirements
if the transient lodging standards were applied. Thus, the
Department has retained the requirement that social service center
establishments comply with the residential dwelling standards. The
Department believes, however, that social service center
establishments that provide emergency shelter to large transient
populations should be able to provide bathing facilities that are
accessible to persons with mobility disabilities who need roll-in
showers. Because of the transient nature of the population of these
large shelters, it will not be feasible to modify bathing
facilities in a timely manner when faced with a need to provide a
roll-in shower with a seat when requested by an overnight visitor.
As a result, the Department has added a requirement that social
service center establishments with sleeping accommodations for more
than 50 individuals must provide at least one roll-in shower with a
seat that complies with the relevant provisions of section 608 of
the 2010 Standards. Transfer-type showers are not permitted in lieu
of a roll-in shower with a seat and the exceptions in sections
608.3 and 608.4 for residential dwelling units are not permitted.
When separate shower facilities are provided for men and for women,
at least one roll-in shower shall be provided for each group. This
supplemental requirement to the residential facilities standards is
in addition to the supplemental requirement that was proposed in
the NPRM for clear floor space in sleeping rooms with more than 25
beds.
The Department also notes that while dwelling units at some
social service center establishments are also subject to the Fair
Housing Act (FHAct) design and construction requirements that
require certain features of adaptable and accessible design, FHAct
units do not provide the same level of accessibility that is
required for residential facilities under the 2010 Standards. The
FHAct requirements, where also applicable, should not be considered
a substitute for the 2010 Standards. Rather, the 2010 Standards
must be followed in addition to the FHAct requirements.
The Department also notes that whereas the NPRM used the term
“social service establishment,” the final rule uses the term
“social service center establishment.” The Department has made this
editorial change so that the final rule is consistent with the
terminology used in the ADA. See 42 U.S.C. 12181(7)(k).
Section 35.151(f) Housing at a place of education
The Department of Justice and the Department of Education share
responsibility for regulation and enforcement of the ADA in
postsecondary educational settings, including its requirements for
architectural features. In addition, the Department of Housing and
Urban Development (HUD) has enforcement responsibility for housing
subject to title II of the ADA. Housing facilities in educational
settings range from traditional residence halls and dormitories to
apartment or townhouse-style residences. In addition to title II of
the ADA, public universities and schools that receive Federal
financial assistance are also subject to section 504, which
contains its own accessibility requirements through the application
of UFAS. Residential housing in an educational setting is also
covered by the FHAct, which requires newly constructed multifamily
housing to include certain features of accessible and adaptable
design. Covered entities subject to the ADA must always be aware
of, and comply with, any other Federal statutes or regulations that
govern the operation of residential properties.
Although the 1991 Standards mention dormitories as a form of
transient lodging, they do not specifically address how the ADA
applies to dormitories or other types of residential housing
provided in an educational setting. The 1991 Standards also do not
contain any specific provisions for residential facilities,
allowing covered entities to elect to follow the residential
standards contained in UFAS. Although the 2004 ADAAG contains
provisions for both residential facilities and transient lodging,
the guidelines do not indicate which requirements apply to housing
provided in an educational setting, leaving it to the adopting
agencies to make that choice. After evaluating both sets of
standards, the Department concluded that the benefits of applying
the transient lodging standards outweighed the benefits of applying
the residential facilities standards. Consequently, in the NPRM,
the Department proposed a new § 35.151(f) that provided that
residence halls or dormitories operated by or on behalf of places
of education shall comply with the provisions of the proposed
standards for transient lodging, including, but not limited to, the
provisions in sections 224 and 806 of the 2004 ADAAG.
Both public and private school housing facilities have varied
characteristics. College and university housing facilities
typically provide housing for up to one academic year, but may be
closed during school vacation periods. In the summer, they are
often used for short-term stays of one to three days, a week, or
several months. Graduate and faculty housing is often provided
year-round in the form of apartments, which may serve individuals
or families with children. These housing facilities are diverse in
their layout. Some are double-occupancy rooms with a shared toilet
and bathing room, which may be inside or outside the unit. Others
may contain cluster, suite, or group arrangements where several
rooms are located inside a defined unit with bathing, kitchen, and
similar common facilities. In some cases, these suites are
indistinguishable in features from traditional apartments.
Universities may build their own housing facilities or enter into
agreements with private developers to build, own, or lease housing
to the educational institution or to its students. Academic housing
may be located on the campus of the university or may be located in
nearby neighborhoods.
Throughout the school year and the summer, academic housing can
become program areas in which small groups meet, receptions and
educational sessions are held, and social activities occur. The
ability to move between rooms - both accessible rooms and standard
rooms - in order to socialize, to study, and to use all public use
and common use areas is an essential part of having access to these
educational programs and activities. Academic housing is also used
for short-term transient educational programs during the time
students are not in regular residence and may be rented out to
transient visitors in a manner similar to a hotel for special
university functions.
The Department was concerned that applying the new construction
requirements for residential facilities to educational housing
facilities could hinder access to educational programs for students
with disabilities. Elevators are not generally required under the
2004 ADAAG residential facilities standards unless they are needed
to provide an accessible route from accessible units to public use
and common use areas, while under the 2004 ADAAG as it applies to
other types of facilities, multistory public facilities must have
elevators unless they meet very specific exceptions. In addition,
the residential facilities standards do not require accessible
roll-in showers in bathrooms, while the transient lodging
requirements require some of the accessible units to be served by
bathrooms with roll-in showers. The transient lodging standards
also require that a greater number of units have accessible
features for persons with communication disabilities. The transient
lodging standards provide for installation of the required
accessible features so that they are available immediately, but the
residential facilities standards allow for certain features of the
unit to be adaptable. For example, only reinforcements for grab
bars need to be provided in residential dwellings, but the actual
grab bars must be installed under the transient lodging standards.
By contrast, the residential facilities standards do require
certain features that provide greater accessibility within units,
such as more usable kitchens, and an accessible route throughout
the dwelling. The residential facilities standards also require 5
percent of the units to be accessible to persons with mobility
disabilities, which is a continuation of the same scoping that is
currently required under UFAS, and is therefore applicable to any
educational institution that is covered by section 504. The
transient lodging standards require a lower percentage of
accessible sleeping rooms for facilities with large numbers of
rooms than is required by UFAS. For example, if a dormitory had 150
rooms, the transient lodging standards would require seven
accessible rooms while the residential standards would require
eight. In a large dormitory with 500 rooms, the transient lodging
standards would require 13 accessible rooms and the residential
facilities standards would require 25. There are other differences
between the two sets of standards as well with respect to
requirements for accessible windows, alterations, kitchens,
accessible route throughout a unit, and clear floor space in
bathrooms allowing for a side transfer.
In the NPRM, the Department requested public comment on how to
scope educational housing facilities, asking, “[w]ould the
residential facility requirements or the transient lodging
requirements in the 2004 ADAAG be more appropriate for housing at
places of education? How would the different requirements affect
the cost when building new dormitories and other student housing?”
73 FR 34466, 34492 (June 17, 2008).
The vast majority of the comments received by the Department
advocated using the residential facilities standards for housing at
a place of education instead of the transient lodging standards,
arguing that housing at places of public education are in fact
homes for the students who live in them. These commenters argued,
however, that the Department should impose a requirement for a
variety of options for accessible bathing and should ensure that
all floors of dormitories be accessible so that students with
disabilities have the same opportunities to participate in the life
of the dormitory community that are provided to students without
disabilities. Commenters representing persons with disabilities and
several individuals argued that, although the transient lodging
standards may provide a few more accessible features (such as
roll-in showers), the residential facilities standards would ensure
that students with disabilities have access to all rooms in their
assigned unit, not just to the sleeping room, kitchenette, and wet
bar. One commenter stated that, in its view, the residential
facilities standards were congruent with overlapping requirements
from HUD, and that access provided by the residential facilities
requirements within alterations would ensure dispersion of
accessible features more effectively. This commenter also argued
that while the increased number of required accessible units for
residential facilities as compared to transient lodging may
increase the cost of construction or alteration, this cost would be
offset by a reduced need to adapt rooms later if the demand for
accessible rooms exceeds the supply. The commenter also encouraged
the Department to impose a visitability (accessible doorways and
necessary clear floor space for turning radius) requirement for
both the residential facilities and transient lodging requirements
to allow students with mobility impairments to interact and
socialize in a fully integrated fashion.
Two commenters supported the Department's proposed approach. One
commenter argued that the transient lodging requirements in the
2004 ADAAG would provide greater accessibility and increase the
opportunity of students with disabilities to participate fully in
campus life. A second commenter generally supported the provision
of accessible dwelling units at places of education, and pointed
out that the relevant scoping in the International Building Code
requires accessible units “consistent with hotel
accommodations.”
The Department has considered the comments recommending the use
of the residential facilities standards and acknowledges that they
require certain features that are not included in the transient
lodging standards and that should be required for housing provided
at a place of education. In addition, the Department notes that
since educational institutions often use their academic housing
facilities as short-term transient lodging in the summers, it is
important that accessible features be installed at the outset. It
is not realistic to expect that the educational institution will be
able to adapt a unit in a timely manner in order to provide
accessible accommodations to someone attending a one-week program
during the summer.
The Department has determined that the best approach to this
type of housing is to continue to require the application of
transient lodging standards, but at the same time to add several
requirements drawn from the residential facilities standards
related to accessible turning spaces and work surfaces in kitchens,
and the accessible route throughout the unit. This will ensure the
maintenance of the transient lodging standard requirements related
to access to all floors of the facility, roll-in showers in
facilities with more than 50 sleeping rooms, and other important
accessibility features not found in the residential facilities
standards, but will also ensure usable kitchens and access to all
the rooms in a suite or apartment.
The Department has added a new definition to § 35.104, “Housing
at a Place of Education,” and has revised § 35.151(f) to reflect
the accessible features that now will be required in addition to
the requirements set forth under the transient lodging standards.
The Department also recognizes that some educational institutions
provide some residential housing on a year-round basis to graduate
students and staff which is comparable to private rental housing,
and which contains no facilities for educational programming.
Section 35.151(f)(3) exempts from the transient lodging standards
apartments or townhouse facilities provided by or on behalf of a
place of education that are leased on a year-round basis
exclusively to graduate students or faculty, and do not contain any
public use or common use areas available for educational
programming; instead, such housing shall comply with the
requirements for residential facilities in sections 233 and 809 of
the 2010 Standards.
Section 35.151(f) uses the term “sleeping room” in lieu of the
term “guest room,” which is the term used in the transient lodging
standards. The Department is using this term because it believes
that, for the most part, it provides a better description of the
sleeping facilities used in a place of education than “guest room.”
The final rule states that the Department intends the terms to be
used interchangeably in the application of the transient lodging
standards to housing at a place of education.
Section 35.151(g) Assembly areas
In the NPRM, the Department proposed § 35.151(g) to supplement
the assembly area requirements of the 2004 ADAAG, which the
Department is adopting as part of the 2010 Standards. The NPRM
proposed at § 35.151(g)(1) to require wheelchair spaces and
companion seating locations to be dispersed to all levels of the
facility and are served by an accessible route. The Department
received no significant comments on this paragraph and has decided
to adopt the proposed language with minor modifications. The
Department has retained the substance of this section in the final
rule but has clarified that the requirement applies to stadiums,
arenas, and grandstands. In addition, the Department has revised
the phrase “wheelchair and companion seating locations” to
“wheelchair spaces and companion seats.”
Section 35.151(g)(1) ensures that there is greater dispersion of
wheelchair spaces and companion seats throughout stadiums, arenas,
and grandstands than would otherwise be required by sections 221
and 802 of the 2004 ADAAG. In some cases, the accessible route may
not be the same route that other individuals use to reach their
seats. For example, if other patrons reach their seats on the field
by an inaccessible route (e.g., by stairs), but there is an
accessible route that complies with section 206.3 of the 2010
Standards that could be connected to seats on the field, wheelchair
spaces and companion seats must be placed on the field even if that
route is not generally available to the public.
Regulatory language that was included in the 2004 ADAAG
advisory, but that did not appear in the NPRM, has been added by
the Department in § 35.151(g)(2). Section 35.151(g)(2) now requires
an assembly area that has seating encircling, in whole or in part,
a field of play or performance area such as an arena or stadium, to
place wheelchair spaces and companion seats around the entire
facility. This rule, which is designed to prevent a public entity
from placing wheelchair spaces and companion seats on one side of
the facility only, is consistent with the Department's enforcement
practices and reflects its interpretation of section 4.33.3 of the
1991 Standards.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed § 35.151(g)(2) which
prohibits wheelchair spaces and companion seating locations from
being “located on, (or obstructed by) temporary platforms or other
moveable structures.” Through its enforcement actions, the
Department discovered that some venues place wheelchair spaces and
companion seats on temporary platforms that, when removed, reveal
conventional seating underneath, or cover the wheelchair spaces and
companion seats with temporary platforms on top of which they place
risers of conventional seating. These platforms cover groups of
conventional seats and are used to provide groups of wheelchair
seats and companion seats.
Several commenters requested an exception to the prohibition of
the use of temporary platforms for public entities that sell most
of their tickets on a season-ticket or other multi-event basis.
Such commenters argued that they should be able to use temporary
platforms because they know, in advance, that the patrons sitting
in certain areas for the whole season do not need wheelchair spaces
and companion seats. The Department declines to adopt such an
exception. As it explained in detail in the NPRM, the Department
believes that permitting the use of movable platforms that seat
four or more wheelchair users and their companions have the
potential to reduce the number of available wheelchair seating
spaces below the level required, thus reducing the opportunities
for persons who need accessible seating to have the same choice of
ticket prices and amenities that are available to other patrons in
the facility. In addition, use of removable platforms may result in
instances where last minute requests for wheelchair and companion
seating cannot be met because entire sections of accessible seating
will be lost when a platform is removed. See 73 FR 34466,
34493 (June 17, 2008). Further, use of temporary platforms allows
facilities to limit persons who need accessible seating to certain
seating areas, and to relegate accessible seating to less desirable
locations. The use of temporary platforms has the effect of
neutralizing dispersion and other seating requirements
(e.g., line of sight) for wheelchair spaces and companion
seats. Cf. Independent Living Resources v. Oregon Arena
Corp., 1 F. Supp. 2d 1159, 1171 (D. Or. 1998) (holding that
while a public accommodation may “infill” wheelchair spaces with
removable seats when the wheelchair spaces are not needed to
accommodate individuals with disabilities, under certain
circumstances “[s]uch a practice might well violate the rule that
wheelchair spaces must be dispersed throughout the arena in a
manner that is roughly proportionate to the overall distribution of
seating”). In addition, using temporary platforms to convert unsold
wheelchair spaces to conventional seating undermines the
flexibility facilities need to accommodate secondary ticket markets
exchanges as required by § 35.138(g) of the final rule.
As the Department explained in the NPRM, however, this provision
was not designed to prohibit temporary seating that increases
seating for events (e.g., placing temporary seating on the
floor of a basketball court for a concert). Consequently, the final
rule, at § 35.151(g)(3), has been amended to clarify that if an
entire seating section is on a temporary platform for a particular
event, then wheelchair spaces and companion seats may be in that
seating section. However, adding a temporary platform to create
wheelchair spaces and companion seats that are otherwise dissimilar
from nearby fixed seating and then simply adding a small number of
additional seats to the platform would not qualify as an “entire
seating section” on the platform. In addition, § 35.151(g)(3)
clarifies that facilities may fill in wheelchair spaces with
removable seats when the wheelchair spaces are not needed by
persons who use wheelchairs.
The Department has been responsive to assembly areas' concerns
about reduced revenues due to unused accessible seating.
Accordingly, the Department has reduced scoping requirements
significantly - by almost half in large assembly areas - and
determined that allowing assembly areas to infill unsold wheelchair
spaces with readily removable temporary individual seats
appropriately balances their economic concerns with the rights of
individuals with disabilities. See section 221.2 of the 2010
Standards.
For stadium-style movie theaters, in § 35.151(g)(4) of the NPRM
the Department proposed requiring placement of wheelchair seating
spaces and companion seats on a riser or cross-aisle in the stadium
section of the theater and placement of such seating so that it
satisfies at least one of the following criteria: (1) It is located
within the rear 60 percent of the seats provided in the auditorium;
or (2) it is located within the area of the auditorium where the
vertical viewing angles are between the 40th to 100th percentile of
vertical viewing angles for all seats in that theater as ranked
from the first row (1st percentile) to the back row (100th
percentile). The vertical viewing angle is the angle between a
horizontal line perpendicular to the seated viewer's eye to the
screen and a line from the seated viewer's eye to the top of the
screen.
The Department proposed this bright-line rule for two reasons:
(1) The movie theater industry petitioned for such a rule; and (2)
the Department has acquired expertise on the design of stadium
style theaters from litigation against several major movie theater
chains. See U.S. v. AMC Entertainment, 232 F. Supp.
2d 1092 (C.D. Ca. 2002), rev'd in part, 549 F. 3d 760 (9th
Cir. 2008); U.S. v. Cinemark USA, Inc., 348 F. 3d 569
(6th Cir. 2003), cert. denied, 542 U.S. 937 (2004). Two
industry commenters - at least one of whom otherwise supported this
rule - requested that the Department explicitly state that this
rule does not apply retroactively to existing theaters. Although
this rule on its face applies to new construction and alterations,
these commenters were concerned that the rule could be interpreted
to apply retroactively because of the Department's statement in the
ANPRM that this bright-line rule, although newly-articulated, does
not represent a “substantive change from the existing line-of-sight
requirements” of section 4.33.3 of the 1991 Standards. See
69 FR 58768, 58776 (Sept. 30, 2004).
Although the Department intends for § 35.151(g)(4) of this rule
to apply prospectively to new construction and alterations, this
rule is not a departure from, and is consistent with, the
line-of-sight requirements in the 1991 Standards. The Department
has always interpreted the line-of-sight requirements in the 1991
Standards to require viewing angles provided to patrons who use
wheelchairs to be comparable to those afforded to other spectators.
Section 35.151(g)(4) merely represents the application of these
requirements to stadium-style movie theaters.
One commenter from a trade association sought clarification
whether § 35.151(g)(4) applies to stadium-style theaters with more
than 300 seats, and argued that it should not since dispersion
requirements apply in those theaters. The Department declines to
limit this rule to stadium-style theaters with 300 or fewer seats;
stadium-style theaters of all sizes must comply with this rule. So,
for example, stadium-style theaters that must vertically disperse
wheelchair and companion seats must do so within the parameters of
this rule.
The NPRM included a provision that required assembly areas with
more than 5,000 seats to provide at least five wheelchair spaces
with at least three companion seats for each of those five
wheelchair spaces. The Department agrees with commenters who
asserted that group seating is better addressed through ticketing
policies rather than design and has deleted that provision from
this section of the final rule.
Section 35.151(h) Medical care facilities
In the 1991 title II regulation, there was no provision
addressing the dispersion of accessible sleeping rooms in medical
care facilities. The Department is aware, however, of problems that
individuals with disabilities face in receiving full and equal
medical care when accessible sleeping rooms are not adequately
dispersed. When accessible rooms are not fully dispersed, a person
with a disability is often placed in an accessible room in an area
that is not medically appropriate for his or her condition, and is
thus denied quick access to staff with expertise in that medical
specialty and specialized equipment. While the Access Board did not
establish specific design requirements for dispersion in the 2004
ADAAG, in response to extensive comments in support of dispersion
it added an advisory note, Advisory 223.1 General, encouraging
dispersion of accessible rooms within the facility so that
accessible rooms are more likely to be proximate to appropriate
qualified staff and resources.
In the NPRM, the Department sought additional comment on the
issue, asking whether it should require medical care facilities,
such as hospitals, to disperse their accessible sleeping rooms, and
if so, by what method (by specialty area, floor, or other
criteria). All of the comments the Department received on this
issue supported dispersing accessible sleeping rooms proportionally
by specialty area. These comments, from individuals, organizations,
and a building code association, argued that it would not be
difficult for hospitals to disperse rooms by specialty area, given
the high level of regulation to which hospitals are subject and the
planning that hospitals do based on utilization trends. Further,
commenters suggested that without a requirement, it is unlikely
that hospitals would disperse the rooms. In addition, concentrating
accessible rooms in one area perpetuates segregation of individuals
with disabilities, which is counter to the purpose of the ADA.
The Department has decided to require medical care facilities to
disperse their accessible sleeping rooms in a manner that is
proportionate by type of medical specialty. This does not require
exact mathematical proportionality, which at times would be
impossible. However, it does require that medical care facilities
disperse their accessible rooms by medical specialty so that
persons with disabilities can, to the extent practical, stay in an
accessible room within the wing or ward that is appropriate for
their medical needs. The language used in this rule (“in a manner
that is proportionate by type of medical specialty”) is more
specific than that used in the NPRM (“in a manner that enables
patients with disabilities to have access to appropriate specialty
services”) and adopts the concept of proportionality proposed by
the commenters. Accessible rooms should be dispersed throughout all
medical specialties, such as obstetrics, orthopedics, pediatrics,
and cardiac care.
Section 35.151(i) Curb ramps
Section 35.151(e) on curb ramps in the 1991 rule has been
redesignated as § 35.151(i). In the NPRM, the Department proposed
making a minor editorial change to this section, deleting the
phrase “other sloped areas” from the two places in which it appears
in the 1991 title II regulation. In the NPRM, the Department stated
that the phrase “other sloped areas” lacks technical precision. The
Department received no significant public comments on this
proposal. Upon further consideration, however, the Department has
concluded that the regulation should acknowledge that there are
times when there are transitions from sidewalk to road surface that
do not technically qualify as “curb ramps” (sloped surfaces that
have a running slope that exceed 5 percent). Therefore, the
Department has decided not to delete the phrase “other sloped
areas.”
Section 35.151(j) Residential housing for sale to individual owners
Although public entities that operate residential housing
programs are subject to title II of the ADA, and therefore must
provide accessible residential housing, the 1991 Standards did not
contain scoping or technical standards that specifically applied to
residential housing units. As a result, under the Department's
title II regulation, these agencies had the choice of complying
with UFAS, which contains specific scoping and technical standards
for residential housing units, or applying the ADAAG transient
lodging standards to their housing. Neither UFAS nor the 1991
Standards distinguish between residential housing provided for rent
and those provided for sale to individual owners. Thus, under the
1991 title II regulation, public entities that construct
residential housing units to be sold to individual owners must
ensure that some of those units are accessible. This requirement is
in addition to any accessibility requirements imposed on housing
programs operated by public entities that receive Federal financial
assistance from Federal agencies such as HUD.
The 2010 Standards contain scoping and technical standards for
residential dwelling units. However, section 233.3.2 of the 2010
Standards specifically defers to the Department and to HUD, the
standard-setting agency under the ABA, to decide the appropriate
scoping for those residential dwelling units built by or on behalf
of public entities with the intent that the finished units will be
sold to individual owners. These programs include, for example,
HUD's public housing and HOME programs as well as State-funded
programs to construct units for sale to individuals. In the NPRM,
the Department did not make a specific proposal for this scoping.
Instead, the Department stated that after consultation and
coordination with HUD, the Department would make a determination in
the final rule. The Department also sought public comment on this
issue stating that “[t]he Department would welcome recommendations
from individuals with disabilities, public housing authorities, and
other interested parties that have experience with these programs.
Please comment on the appropriate scoping for residential dwelling
units built by or on behalf of public entities with the intent that
the finished units will be sold to individual owners.” 73 FR 34466,
34492 (June 17, 2008).
All of the public comments received by the Department in
response to this question were supportive of the Department's
ensuring that the residential standards apply to housing built on
behalf of public entities with the intent that the finished units
would be sold to individual owners. The vast majority of commenters
recommended that the Department require that projects consisting of
five or more units, whether or not the units are located on one or
multiple locations, comply with the 2004 ADAAG requirements for
scoping of residential units, which require that 5 percent, and no
fewer than one, of the dwelling units provide mobility features,
and that 2 percent, and no fewer than one, of the dwelling units
provide communication features. See 2004 ADAAG Section
233.3. These commenters argued that the Department should not defer
to HUD because HUD has not yet adopted the 2004 ADAAG and there is
ambiguity on the scope of coverage of pre-built for sale units
under HUD's current section 504 regulations. In addition, these
commenters expressed concern that HUD's current regulation, 24 CFR
8.29, presumes that a prospective buyer is identified before design
and construction begins so that disability features can be
incorporated prior to construction. These commenters stated that
State and Federally funded homeownership programs typically do not
identify prospective buyers before construction has commenced. One
commenter stated that, in its experience, when public entities
build accessible for-sale units, they often sell these units
through a lottery system that does not make any effort to match
persons who need the accessible features with the units that have
those features. Thus, accessible units are often sold to persons
without disabilities. This commenter encouraged the Department to
make sure that accessible for-sale units built or funded by public
entities are placed in a separate lottery restricted to
income-eligible persons with disabilities.
Two commenters recommended that the Department develop rules for
four types of for-sale projects: single family pre-built (where
buyer selects the unit after construction), single family
post-built (where the buyer chooses the model prior to its
construction), multi-family pre-built, and multi-family post-built.
These commenters recommended that the Department require pre-built
units to comply with the 2004 ADAAG 233.1 scoping requirements. For
post-built units, the commenters recommended that the Department
require all models to have an alternate design with mobility
features and an alternate design with communications features in
compliance with 2004 ADAAG. Accessible models should be available
at no extra cost to the buyer. One commenter recommended that, in
addition to required fully accessible units, all ground floor units
should be readily convertible for accessibility or for sensory
impairments technology enhancements.
The Department believes that consistent with existing
requirements under title II, housing programs operated by public
entities that design and construct or alter residential units for
sale to individual owners should comply with the 2010 Standards,
including the requirements for residential facilities in sections
233 and 809. These requirements will ensure that a minimum of 5
percent of the units, but no fewer than one unit, of the total
number of residential dwelling units will be designed and
constructed to be accessible for persons with mobility
disabilities. At least 2 percent, but no fewer than one unit, of
the total number of residential dwelling units shall provide
communication features.
The Department recognizes that there are some programs (such as
the one identified by the commenter), in which units are not
designed and constructed until an individual buyer is identified.
In such cases, the public entity is still obligated to comply with
the 2010 Standards. In addition, the public entity must ensure that
pre-identified buyers with mobility disabilities and visual and
hearing disabilities are afforded the opportunity to buy the
accessible units. Once the program has identified buyers who need
the number of accessible units mandated by the 2010 Standards, it
may have to make reasonable modifications to its policies,
practices, and procedures in order to provide accessible units to
other buyers with disabilities who request such units.
The Department notes that the residential facilities standards
allow for construction of units with certain features of
adaptability. Public entities that are concerned that fully
accessible units are less marketable may choose to build these
units to include the allowable adaptable features, and then adapt
them at their own expense for buyers with mobility disabilities who
need accessible units. For example, features such as grab bars are
not required but may be added by the public entity if needed by the
buyer at the time of purchase and cabinets under sinks may be
designed to be removable to allow access to the required knee space
for a forward approach.
The Department agrees with the commenters that covered entities
may have to make reasonable modifications to their policies,
practices, and procedures in order to ensure that when they offer
pre-built accessible residential units for sale, the units are
offered in a manner that gives access to those units to persons
with disabilities who need the features of the units and who are
otherwise eligible for the housing program. This may be
accomplished, for example, by adopting preferences for accessible
units for persons who need the features of the units, holding
separate lotteries for accessible units, or other suitable methods
that result in the sale of accessible units to persons who need the
features of such units. In addition, the Department believes that
units designed and constructed or altered that comply with the
requirements for residential facilities and are offered for sale to
individuals must be provided at the same price as units without
such features.
Section 35.151(k) Detention and correctional facilities
The 1991 Standards did not contain specific accessibility
standards applicable to cells in correctional facilities. However,
correctional and detention facilities operated by or on behalf of
public entities have always been subject to the nondiscrimination
and program accessibility requirements of title II of the ADA. The
2004 ADAAG established specific requirements for the design and
construction and alterations of cells in correctional facilities
for the first time.
Based on complaints received by the Department, investigations,
and compliance reviews of jails, prisons, and other detention and
correctional facilities, the Department has determined that many
detention and correctional facilities do not have enough accessible
cells, toilets, and shower facilities to meet the needs of their
inmates with mobility disabilities and some do not have any at all.
Inmates are sometimes housed in medical units or infirmaries
separate from the general population simply because there are no
accessible cells. In addition, some inmates have alleged that they
are housed at a more restrictive classification level simply
because no accessible housing exists at the appropriate
classification level. The Department's compliance reviews and
investigations have substantiated certain of these allegations.
The Department believes that the insufficient number of
accessible cells is, in part, due to the fact that most jails and
prisons were built long before the ADA became law and, since then,
have undergone few alterations that would trigger the obligation to
provide accessible features in accordance with UFAS or the 1991
Standards. In addition, the Department has found that even some new
correctional facilities lack accessible features. The Department
believes that the unmet demand for accessible cells is also due to
the changing demographics of the inmate population. With thousands
of prisoners serving life sentences without eligibility for parole,
prisoners are aging, and the prison population of individuals with
disabilities and elderly individuals is growing. A Bureau of
Justice Statistics study of State and Federal sentenced inmates
(those sentenced to more than one year) shows the total estimated
count of State and Federal prisoners aged 55 and older grew by
36,000 inmates from 2000 (44,200) to 2006 (80,200). William J.
Sabol et al., Prisoners in 2006, Bureau of Justice
Statistics Bulletin, Dec. 2007, at 23 (app. table 7), available at
http://bjs.ojp.usdoj.gov/index.cfm?ty=pbdetail&iid=908
(last visited July 16, 2008); Allen J. Beck et al., Prisoners in
2000, Bureau of Justice Statistics Bulletin, Aug. 2001, at 10
(Aug. 2001) (Table 14), available at
bjs.ojp.usdoj.gov/index.cfm?ty=pbdetail&iid=927 (last
visited July 16, 2008). This jump constitutes an increase of 81
percent in prisoners aged 55 and older during this period.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed a new section, § 35.152,
which combined a range of provisions relating to both program
accessibility and application of the proposed standards to
detention and correctional facilities. In the final rule, the
Department is placing those provisions that refer to design,
construction, and alteration of detention and correction facilities
in a new paragraph (k) of § 35.151, the section of the rule that
addresses new construction and alterations for covered entities.
Those portions of the final rule that address other issues, such as
placement policies and program accessibility, are placed in the new
§ 35.152.
In the NPRM, the Department also sought input on how best to
meet the needs of inmates with mobility disabilities in the design,
construction, and alteration of detention and correctional
facilities. The Department received a number of comments in
response to this question.
New Construction. The NPRM did not expressly propose that
new construction of correctional and detention facilities shall
comply with the proposed standards because the Department assumed
it would be clear that the requirements of § 35.151 would apply to
new construction of correctional and detention facilities in the
same manner that they apply to other facilities constructed by
covered entities. The Department has decided to create a new
section, § 35.151(k)(1), which clarifies that new construction of
jails, prisons, and other detention facilities shall comply with
the requirements of 2010 Standards. Section 35.151(k)(1) also
increases the scoping for accessible cells from the 2 percent
specified in the 2004 ADAAG to 3 percent.
Alterations. Although the 2010 Standards contain
specifications for alterations in existing detention and
correctional facilities, section 232.2 defers to the Attorney
General the decision as to the extent these requirements will apply
to alterations of cells. The NPRM proposed at § 35.152(c) that
“[a]lterations to jails, prisons, and other detention and
correctional facilities will comply with the requirements of §
35.151(b).” 73 FR 34466, 34507 (June 17, 2008). The final rule
retains that requirement at § 35.151(k)(2), but increases the
scoping for accessible cells from the 2 percent specified in the
2004 ADAAG to 3 percent.
Substitute cells. In the ANPRM, the Department sought
public comment about the most effective means to ensure that
existing correctional facilities are made accessible to prisoners
with disabilities and presented three options: (1) Require all
altered elements to be accessible, which would maintain the current
policy that applies to other ADA alteration requirements; (2)
permit substitute cells to be made accessible within the same
facility, which would permit correctional authorities to meet their
obligation by providing the required accessible features in cells
within the same facility, other than those specific cells in which
alterations are planned; or (3) permit substitute cells to be made
accessible within a prison system, which would focus on ensuring
that prisoners with disabilities are housed in facilities that best
meet their needs, as alterations within a prison environment often
result in piecemeal accessibility.
In § 35.152(c) of the NPRM, the Department proposed language
based on Option 2, providing that when cells are altered, a covered
entity may satisfy its obligation to provide the required number of
cells with mobility features by providing the required mobility
features in substitute cells (i.e., cells other than those where
alterations are originally planned), provided that each substitute
cell is located within the same facility, is integrated with other
cells to the maximum extent feasible, and has, at a minimum,
physical access equal to that of the original cells to areas used
by inmates or detainees for visitation, dining, recreation,
educational programs, medical services, work programs, religious
services, and participation in other programs that the facility
offers to inmates or detainees.
The Department received few comments on this proposal. The
majority who chose to comment supported an approach that allowed
substitute cells to be made accessible within the same facility. In
their view, such an approach balanced administrators' needs, cost
considerations, and the needs of inmates with disabilities. One
commenter noted, however, that with older facilities, required
modifications may be inordinately costly and technically
infeasible. A large county jail system supported the proposed
approach as the most viable option allowing modification or
alteration of existing cells based on need and providing a flexible
approach to provide program and mobility accessibility. It noted,
as an alternative, that permitting substitute cells to be made
accessible within a prison system would also be a viable option
since such an approach could create a centralized location for
accessibility needs and, because that jail system's facilities were
in close proximity, it would have little impact on families for
visitation or on accessible programming.
A large State department of corrections objected to the
Department's proposal. The commenter stated that some very old
prison buildings have thick walls of concrete and reinforced steel
that are difficult, if not impossible to retrofit, and to do so
would be very expensive. This State system approaches accessibility
by looking at its system as a whole and providing access to
programs for inmates with disabilities at selected prisons. This
commenter explained that not all of its facilities offer the same
programs or the same levels of medical or mental health services.
An inmate, for example, who needs education, substance abuse
treatment, and sex offender counseling may be transferred between
facilities in order to meet his needs. The inmate population is
always in flux and there are not always beds or program
availability for every inmate at his security level. This commenter
stated that the Department's proposed language would put the State
in the position of choosing between adding accessible cells and
modifying paths of travel to programs and services at great expense
or not altering old facilities, causing them to become in states of
disrepair and obsolescent, which would be fiscally
irresponsible.
The Department is persuaded by these comments and has modified
the alterations requirement in § 35.151(k)(2)(iv) in the final rule
to allow that if it is technically infeasible to provide substitute
cells in the same facility, cells can be provided elsewhere within
the corrections system.
Number of accessible cells. Section 232.2.1 of the 2004
ADAAG requires at least 2 percent, but no fewer than one, of the
cells in newly constructed detention and correctional facilities to
have accessibility features for individuals with mobility
disabilities. Section 232.3 provides that, where special holding
cells or special housing cells are provided, at least one cell
serving each purpose shall have mobility features. The Department
sought input on whether these 2004 ADAAG requirements are
sufficient to meet the needs of inmates with mobility disabilities.
A major association representing county jails throughout the
country stated that the 2004 ADAAG 2 percent requirement for
accessible cells is sufficient to meet the needs of county jails.
Similarly, a large county sheriff's department advised that the 2
percent requirement far exceeds the need at its detention facility,
where the average age of the population is 32. This commenter
stressed that the regulations need to address the differences
between a local detention facility with low average lengths of stay
as opposed to a State prison housing inmates for lengthy periods.
This commenter asserted that more stringent requirements will raise
construction costs by requiring modifications that are not needed.
If more stringent requirements are adopted, the commenter suggested
that they apply only to State and Federal prisons that house
prisoners sentenced to long terms. The Department notes that a
prisoner with a mobility disability needs a cell with mobility
features regardless of the length of incarceration. However, the
length of incarceration is most relevant in addressing the needs of
an aging population.
The overwhelming majority of commenters responded that the 2
percent ADAAG requirement is inadequate to meet the needs of the
incarcerated. Many commenters suggested that the requirement be
expanded to apply to each area, type, use, and class of cells in a
facility. They asserted that if a facility has separate areas for
specific programs, such as a dog training program or a substance
abuse unit, each of these areas should also have 2 percent
accessible cells but not less than one. These same commenters
suggested that 5-7 percent of cells should be accessible to meet
the needs of both an aging population and the larger number of
inmates with mobility disabilities. One organization recommended
that the requirement be increased to 5 percent overall, and that at
least 2 percent of each type and use of cell be accessible. Another
commenter recommended that 10 percent of cells be accessible. An
organization with extensive corrections experience noted that the
integration mandate requires a sufficient number and distribution
of accessible cells so as to provide distribution of locations
relevant to programs to ensure that persons with disabilities have
access to the programs.
Through its investigations and compliance reviews, the
Department has found that in most detention and correctional
facilities, a 2 percent accessible cell requirement is inadequate
to meet the needs of the inmate population with disabilities. That
finding is supported by the majority of the commenters that
recommended a 5-7 percent requirement. Indeed, the Department
itself requires more than 2 percent of the cells to be accessible
at its own corrections facilities. The Federal Bureau of Prisons is
subject to the requirements of the 2004 ADAAG through the General
Services Administration's adoption of the 2004 ADAAG as the
enforceable accessibility standard for Federal facilities under the
Architectural Barriers Act of 1968. 70 FR 67786, 67846-47 (Nov. 8,
2005). However, in order to meet the needs of inmates with mobility
disabilities, the Bureau of Prisons has elected to increase that
percentage and require that 3 percent of inmate housing at its
facilities be accessible. Bureau of Prisons, Design Construction
Branch, Design Guidelines, Attachment A: Accessibility Guidelines
for Design, Construction, and Alteration of Federal Bureau of
Prisons (Oct. 31, 2006).
The Department believes that a 3 percent accessible requirement
is reasonable. Moreover, it does not believe it should impose a
higher percentage on detention and corrections facilities than it
utilizes for its own facilities. Thus, the Department has adopted a
3 percent requirement in § 35.151(k) for both new construction and
alterations. The Department notes that the 3 percent requirement is
a minimum. As corrections systems plan for new facilities or
alterations, the Department urges planners to include numbers of
inmates with disabilities in their population projections in order
to take the necessary steps to provide a sufficient number of
accessible cells to meet inmate needs.
Dispersion of Cells. The NPRM did not contain express
language addressing dispersion of cells in a facility. However,
Advisory 232.2 of the 2004 ADAAG recommends that “[a]ccessible
cells or rooms should be dispersed among different levels of
security, housing categories, and holding classifications
(e.g., male/female and adult/juvenile) to facilitate
access.” In explaining the basis for recommending, but not
requiring, this type of dispersal, the Access Board stated that
“[m]any detention and correctional facilities are designed so that
certain areas (e.g., ‘shift’ areas) can be adapted to serve
as different types of housing according to need” and that
“[p]lacement of accessible cells or rooms in shift areas may allow
additional flexibility in meeting requirements for dispersion of
accessible cells or rooms.”
The Department notes that inmates are typically housed in
separate areas of detention and correctional facilities based on a
number of factors, including their classification level. In many
instances, detention and correctional facilities have housed
inmates in inaccessible cells, even though accessible cells were
available elsewhere in the facility, because there were no cells in
the areas where they needed to be housed, such as in administrative
or disciplinary segregation, the women's section of the facility,
or in a particular security classification area.
The Department received a number of comments stating that
dispersal of accessible cells together with an adequate number of
accessible cells is necessary to prevent inmates with disabilities
from placement in improper security classification and to ensure
integration. Commenters recommended modification of the scoping
requirements to require a percentage of accessible cells in each
program, classification, use or service area. The Department is
persuaded by these comments. Accordingly, § 35.151(k)(1) and (k)(2)
of the final rule require accessible cells in each classification
area.
Medical facilities. The NPRM also did not propose
language addressing the application of the 2004 ADAAG to medical
and long-term care facilities in correctional and detention
facilities. The provisions of the 2004 ADAAG contain requirements
for licensed medical and long-term care facilities, but not those
that are unlicensed. A disability advocacy group and a number of
other commenters recommended that the Department expand the
application of section 232.4 to apply to all such facilities in
detention and correctional facilities, regardless of licensure.
They recommended that whenever a correctional facility has a
program that is addressed specifically in the 2004 ADAAG, such as a
long-term care facility, the 2004 ADAAG scoping and design features
should apply for those elements. Similarly, a building code
organization noted that its percentage requirements for accessible
units is based on what occurs in the space, not on the building
type.
The Department is persuaded by these comments and has added §
35.151(k)(3), which states that “[w]ith respect to medical and
long-term care facilities in jails, prisons, and other detention
and correctional facilities, public entities shall apply the 2010
Standards technical and scoping requirements for those facilities
irrespective of whether those facilities are licensed.”
Section 35.152 Detention and correctional facilities - program
requirements
As noted in the discussion of § 35.151(k), the Department has
determined that inmates with mobility and other disabilities in
detention and correctional facilities do not have equal access to
prison services. The Department's concerns are based not only on
complaints it has received, but the Department's substantial
experience in investigations and compliance reviews of jails,
prisons, and other detention and correctional facilities. Based on
that review, the Department has found that many detention and
correctional facilities have too few or no accessible cells,
toilets, and shower facilities to meet the needs of their inmates
with mobility disabilities. These findings, coupled with statistics
regarding the current percentage of inmates with mobility
disabilities and the changing demographics of the inmate population
reflecting thousands of prisoners serving life sentences and
increasingly large numbers of aging inmates who are not eligible
for parole, led the Department to conclude that a new regulation
was necessary to address these concerns.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed a new section, § 35.152,
which combined a range of provisions relating to both program
accessibility and application of the proposed standards to
detention and correctional facilities. As mentioned above, in the
final rule, the Department is placing those provisions that refer
to design, construction, and alteration of detention and correction
facilities in new paragraph (k) in § 35.151 dealing with new
construction and alterations for covered entities. Those portions
of the final rule that address other program requirements remain in
§ 35.152.
The Department received many comments in response to the program
accessibility requirements in proposed § 35.152. These comments are
addressed below.
Facilities operated through contractual, licensing, or other
arrangements with other public entities or private entities.
The Department is aware that some public entities are confused
about the applicability of the title II requirements to
correctional facilities built or run by other public entities or
private entities. It has consistently been the Department's
position that title II requirements apply to correctional
facilities used by State or local government entities, irrespective
of whether the public entity contracts with another public or
private entity to build or run the correctional facility. The power
to incarcerate citizens rests with the State or local government,
not a private entity. As the Department stated in the preamble to
the original title II regulation, “[a]ll governmental activities of
public entities are covered, even if they are carried out by
contractors.” 28 CFR part 35, app. A at 558 (2009). If a prison is
occupied by State prisoners and is inaccessible, the State is
responsible under title II of the ADA. The same is true for a
county or city jail. In essence, the private builder or contractor
that operates the correctional facility does so at the direction of
the government entity. Moreover, even if the State enters into a
contractual, licensing, or other arrangement for correctional
services with a public entity that has its own title II
obligations, the State is still responsible for ensuring that the
other public entity complies with title II in providing these
services.
Also, through its experience in investigations and compliance
reviews, the Department has noted that public entities contract for
a number of services to be run by private or other public entities,
for example, medical and mental health services, food services,
laundry, prison industries, vocational programs, and drug treatment
and substance abuse programs, all of which must be operated in
accordance with title II requirements.
Proposed § 35.152(a) in the NPRM was designed to make it clear
that title II applies to all State and local detention and
correctional facilities, regardless of whether the detention or
correctional facility is directly operated by the public entity or
operated by a private entity through a contractual, licensing, or
other arrangement. Commenters specifically supported the language
of this section. One commenter cited Department of Justice
statistics stating that of the approximately 1.6 million inmates in
State and Federal facilities in December 2006, approximately
114,000 of these inmates were held in private prison facilities.
See William J. Sabol et al., Prisoners in 2006,
Bureau of Justice Statistics Bulletin, Dec. 2007, at 1, 4,
available at
http://bjs.ojp.usdoj.gov/index.cfm?ty=pbdetail&iid=908.
Some commenters wanted the text “through contracts or other
arrangements” changed to read “through contracts or any other
arrangements” to make the intent clear. However, a large number of
commenters recommended that the text of the rule make explicit that
it applies to correctional facilities operated by private
contractors. Many commenters also suggested that the text make
clear that the rule applies to adult facilities, juvenile justice
facilities, and community correctional facilities. In the final
rule, the Department is adopting these latter two suggestions in
order to make the section's intent explicit.
Section 35.152(a) of the final rule states specifically that the
requirements of the section apply to public entities responsible
for the operation or management of correctional facilities, “either
directly or through contractual, licensing, or other arrangements
with public or private entities, in whole or in part, including
private correctional facilities.” Additionally, the section
explicitly provides that it applies to adult and juvenile justice
detention and correctional facilities and community correctional
facilities.
Discrimination prohibited. In the NPRM, § 35.152(b)(1)
proposed language stating that public entities are prohibited from
excluding qualified detainees and inmates from participation in, or
denying, benefits, services, programs, or activities because a
facility is inaccessible to persons with disabilities “unless the
public entity can demonstrate that the required actions would
result in a fundamental alteration or undue burden.” 73 FR 34446,
34507 (June 17, 2008). One large State department of corrections
objected to the entire section applicable to detention and
correctional facilities, stating that it sets a higher standard for
correctional and detention facilities because it does not provide a
defense for undue administrative burden. The Department has not
retained the proposed NPRM language referring to the defenses of
fundamental alteration or undue burden because the Department
believes that these exceptions are covered by the general language
of 35.150(a)(3), which states that a public entity is not required
to take “any action that it can demonstrate would result in a
fundamental alteration in the nature of a service, program, or
activity, or in undue financial and administrative burdens.” The
Department has revised the language of § 35.152(b)(1)
accordingly.
Integration of inmates and detainees with disabilities.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed language in § 35.152(b)(2)
specifically applying the ADA's general integration mandate to
detention and correctional facilities. The proposed language would
have required public entities to ensure that individuals with
disabilities are housed in the most integrated setting appropriate
to the needs of the individual. It further stated that unless the
public entity can demonstrate that it is appropriate to make an
exception for a specific individual, a public entity:
(1) Should not place inmates or detainees with disabilities in
locations that exceed their security classification because there
are no accessible cells or beds in the appropriate
classification;
(2) should not place inmates or detainees with disabilities in
designated medical areas unless they are actually receiving medical
care or treatment;
(3) should not place inmates or detainees with disabilities in
facilities that do not offer the same programs as the facilities
where they would ordinarily be housed; and
(4) should not place inmates or detainees with disabilities in
facilities farther away from their families in order to provide
accessible cells or beds, thus diminishing their opportunity for
visitation based on their disability. 73 FR 34466, 34507 (June 17,
2008).
In the NPRM, the Department recognized that there are a wide
range of considerations that affect decisions to house inmates or
detainees and that in specific cases there may be compelling
reasons why a placement that does not meet the general requirements
of § 35.152(b)(2) may, nevertheless, comply with the ADA. However,
the Department noted that it is essential that the planning process
initially assume that inmates or detainees with disabilities will
be assigned within the system under the same criteria that would be
applied to inmates who do not have disabilities. Exceptions may be
made on a case-by-case basis if the specific situation warrants
different treatment. For example, if an inmate is deaf and
communicates only using sign language, a prison may consider
whether it is more appropriate to give priority to housing the
prisoner in a facility close to his family that houses no other
deaf inmates, or if it would be preferable to house the prisoner in
a setting where there are sign language interpreters and other sign
language users with whom he can communicate.
In general, commenters strongly supported the NPRM's
clarification that the title II integration mandate applies to
State and local corrections agencies and the facilities in which
they house inmates. Commenters pointed out that inmates with
disabilities continue to be segregated based on their disabilities
and also excluded from participation in programs. An organization
actively involved in addressing the needs of prisoners cited a
number of recent lawsuits in which prisoners allege such
discrimination.
The majority of commenters objected to the language in proposed
§ 35.152(b)(2) that creates an exception to the integration mandate
when the “public entity can demonstrate that it is appropriate to
make an exception for a specific individual.” 73 FR 34466, 34507
(June 17, 2008). The vast majority of commenters asserted that,
given the practice of many public entities to segregate and cluster
inmates with disabilities, the exception will be used to justify
the status quo. The commenters acknowledged that the intent of the
section is to ensure that an individual with a disability who can
be better served in a less integrated setting can legally be placed
in that setting. They were concerned, however, that the proposed
language would allow certain objectionable practices to continue,
e.g., automatically placing persons with disabilities in
administrative segregation. An advocacy organization with extensive
experience working with inmates recommended that the inmate have
“input” in the placement decision.
Others commented that the exception does not provide sufficient
guidance on when a government entity may make an exception, citing
the need for objective standards. Some commenters posited that a
prison administration may want to house a deaf inmate at a facility
designated and equipped for deaf inmates that is several hundred
miles from the inmate's home. Although under the exception
language, such a placement may be appropriate, these commenters
argued that this outcome appears to contradict the regulation's
intent to eliminate or reduce the segregation of inmates with
disabilities and prevent them from being placed far from their
families. The Department notes that in some jurisdictions, the
likelihood of such outcomes is diminished because corrections
facilities with different programs and levels of accessibility are
clustered in close proximity to one another, so that being far from
family is not an issue. The Department also takes note of
advancements in technology that will ease the visitation dilemma,
such as family visitation through the use of videoconferencing.
Only one commenter, a large State department of corrections,
objected to the integration requirement. This commenter stated it
houses all maximum security inmates in maximum security facilities.
Inmates with lower security levels may or may not be housed in
lower security facilities depending on a number of factors, such as
availability of a bed, staffing, program availability, medical and
mental health needs, and enemy separation. The commenter also
objected to the proposal to prohibit housing inmates with
disabilities in medical areas unless they are receiving medical
care. This commenter stated that such housing may be necessary for
several days, for example, at a stopover facility for an inmate
with a disability who is being transferred from one facility to
another. Also, this commenter stated that inmates with disabilities
in disciplinary status may be housed in the infirmary because not
every facility has accessible cells in disciplinary housing.
Similarly the commenter objected to the prohibition on placing
inmates in facilities without the same programs as facilities where
they normally would be housed. Finally, the commenter objected to
the prohibition on placing an inmate at a facility distant from
where the inmate would normally be housed. The commenter stressed
that in its system, there are few facilities near most inmates'
homes. The commenter noted that most inmates are housed at
facilities far from their homes, a fact shared by all inmates, not
just inmates with disabilities. Another commenter noted that in
some jurisdictions, inmates who need assistance in activities of
daily living cannot obtain that assistance in the general
population, but only in medical facilities where they must be
housed.
The Department has considered the concerns raised by the
commenters with respect to this section and recognizes that
corrections systems may move inmates routinely and for a variety of
reasons, such as crowding, safety, security, classification change,
need for specialized programs, or to provide medical care.
Sometimes these moves are within the same facility or prison
system. On other occasions, inmates may be transferred to
facilities in other cities, counties, and States. Given the nature
of the prison environment, inmates have little say in their
placement and administrators must have flexibility to meet the
needs of the inmates and the system. The Department has revised the
language of the exception contained in renumbered § 35.152(b)(2) to
better accommodate corrections administrators' need for flexibility
in making placement decisions based on legitimate, specific
reasons. Moreover, the Department believes that temporary,
short-term moves that are necessary for security or administrative
purposes (e.g., placing an inmate with a disability in a medical
area at a stopover facility during a transfer from one facility to
another) do not violate the requirements of § 35.152(b)(2).
The Department notes that § 35.150(a)(3) states that a public
entity is not required to take “any action that it can demonstrate
would result in a fundamental alteration in the nature of a
service, program, or activity or in undue financial and
administrative burdens.” Thus, corrections systems would not have
to comply with the requirements of § 35.152(b)(1) in any specific
circumstance where these defenses are met.
Several commenters recommended that the word “should” be changed
to “shall” in the subparts to § 35.152(b)(2). The Department agrees
that because the rule contains a specific exception and because the
integration requirement is subject to the defenses provided in
paragraph (a) of that section, it is more appropriate to use the
word “shall” and the Department accordingly is making that change
in the final rule.
Program requirements. In a unanimous decision, the
Supreme Court, in Pennsylvania Department of Corrections v.
Yeskey, 524 U.S. 206 (1998), stated explicitly that the ADA
covers the operations of State prisons; accordingly, title II's
program accessibility requirements apply to State and local
correctional and detention facilities. In the NPRM, in addressing
the accessibility of existing correctional and detention
facilities, the Department considered the challenges of applying
the title II program access requirement for existing facilities
under § 31.150(a) in light of the realities of many inaccessible
correctional facilities and strained budgets.
Correctional and detention facilities commonly provide a variety
of different programs for education, training, counseling, or other
purposes related to rehabilitation. Some examples of programs
generally available to inmates include programs to obtain GEDs,
computer training, job skill training and on-the-job training,
religious instruction and guidance, alcohol and substance abuse
groups, anger management, work assignments, work release, halfway
houses, and other programs. Historically, individuals with
disabilities have been excluded from such programs because they are
not located in accessible locations, or inmates with disabilities
have been segregated in units without equivalent programs. In light
of the Supreme Court's decision in Yeskey and the
requirements of title II, however, it is critical that public
entities provide these opportunities to inmates with disabilities.
In proposed § 35.152, the Department sought to clarify that title
II required equal access for inmates with disabilities to
participate in programs offered to inmates without
disabilities.
The Department wishes to emphasize that detention and
correctional facilities are unique facilities under title II.
Inmates cannot leave the facilities and must have their needs met
by the corrections system, including needs relating to a
disability. If the detention and correctional facilities fail to
accommodate prisoners with disabilities, these individuals have
little recourse, particularly when the need is great (e.g.,
an accessible toilet; adequate catheters; or a shower chair). It is
essential that corrections systems fulfill their nondiscrimination
and program access obligations by adequately addressing the needs
of prisoners with disabilities, which include, but are not limited
to, proper medication and medical treatment, accessible toilet and
shower facilities, devices such as a bed transfer or a shower
chair, and assistance with hygiene methods for prisoners with
physical disabilities.
In the NPRM, the Department also sought input on whether it
should establish a program accessibility requirement that public
entities modify additional cells at a detention or correctional
facility to incorporate the accessibility features needed by
specific inmates with mobility disabilities when the number of
cells required by sections 232.2 and 232.3 of the 2004 ADAAG are
inadequate to meet the needs of their inmate population.
Commenters supported a program accessibility requirement,
viewing it as a flexible and practical means of allowing facilities
to meet the needs of inmates in a cost effective and expedient
manner. One organization supported a requirement to modify
additional cells when the existing number of accessible cells is
inadequate. It cited the example of a detainee who was held in a
hospital because the local jail had no accessible cells. Similarly,
a State agency recommended that the number of accessible cells
should be sufficient to accommodate the population in need. One
group of commenters voiced concern about accessibility being
provided in a timely manner and recommended that the rule specify
that the program accessibility requirement applies while waiting
for the accessibility modifications. A group with experience
addressing inmate needs recommended the inmate's input should be
required to prevent inappropriate segregation or placement in an
inaccessible or inappropriate area.
The Department is persuaded by these comments. Accordingly, §
35.152(b)(3) requires public entities to “implement reasonable
policies, including physical modifications to additional cells in
accordance with the 2010 Standards, so as to ensure that each
inmate with a disability is housed in a cell with the accessible
elements necessary to afford the inmate access to safe, appropriate
housing.”
Communication. Several large disability advocacy
organizations commented on the 2004 ADAAG section 232.2.2
requirement that at least 2 percent of the general holding cells
and housing cells must be equipped with audible emergency alarm
systems. Permanently installed telephones within these cells must
have volume control. Commenters said that the communication
features in the 2004 ADAAG do not address the most common barriers
that deaf and hard-of-hearing inmates face. They asserted that few
cells have telephones and the requirements to make them accessible
is limited to volume control, and that emergency alarm systems are
only a small part of the amplified information that inmates need.
One large association commented that it receives many inmate
complaints that announcements are made over loudspeakers or public
address systems, and that inmates who do not hear announcements for
inmate count or other instructions face disciplinary action for
failure to comply. They asserted that inmates who miss
announcements miss meals, exercise, showers, and recreation. They
argued that systems that deliver audible announcements, signals,
and emergency alarms must be made accessible and that TTYs must be
made available. Commenters also recommended that correctional
facilities should provide access to advanced forms of
telecommunications. Additional commenters noted that few persons
now use TTYs, preferring instead to communicate by email, texting,
and videophones.
The Department agrees with the commenters that correctional
facilities and jails must ensure that inmates who are deaf or hard
of hearing actually receive the same information provided to other
inmates. The Department believes, however, that the reasonable
modifications, program access, and effective communications
requirements of title II are sufficient to address the needs of
individual deaf and hard of hearing inmates, and as a result,
declines to add specific requirements for communications features
in cells for deaf and hard of hearing inmates at this time. The
Department notes that as part of its ongoing enforcement of the
reasonable modifications, program access, and effective
communications requirements of title II, the Department has
required correctional facilities and jails to provide communication
features in cells serving deaf and hard of hearing inmates.
Subpart E - Communications Section 35.160 Communications.
Section 35.160 of the 1991 title II regulation requires a public
entity to take appropriate steps to ensure that communications with
applicants, participants, and members of the public with
disabilities are as effective as communications with others. 28 CFR
35.160(a). In addition, a public entity must “furnish appropriate
auxiliary aids and services where necessary to afford an individual
with a disability an equal opportunity to participate in, and enjoy
the benefits of, a service, program, or activity conducted by a
public entity.” 28 CFR 35.160(b)(1). Moreover, the public entity
must give “primary consideration to the requests of the individual
with disabilities” in determining what type of auxiliary aid and
service is necessary. 28 CFR 35.160(b)(2).
Since promulgation of the 1991 title II regulation, the
Department has investigated hundreds of complaints alleging
failures by public entities to provide effective communication, and
many of these investigations resulted in settlement agreements and
consent decrees. From these investigations, the Department has
concluded that public entities sometimes misunderstand the scope of
their obligations under the statute and the regulation. Section
35.160 in the final rule codifies the Department's longstanding
policies in this area and includes provisions that reflect
technological advances in the area of auxiliary aids and
services.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed adding “companion” to the
scope of coverage under § 35.160 to codify the Department's
longstanding position that a public entity's obligation to ensure
effective communication extends not just to applicants,
participants, and members of the public with disabilities, but to
companions as well, if any of them are individuals with
disabilities. The NPRM defined companion as a person who is a
family member, friend, or associate of a program participant, who,
along with the program participant, is “an appropriate person with
whom the public entity should communicate.” 73 FR 34466, 34507
(June 17, 2008).
Many commenters supported inclusion of “companions” in the rule,
and urged even more specific language about public entities'
obligations. Some commenters asked the Department to clarify that a
companion with a disability may be entitled to effective
communication from a public entity even though the applicants,
participants, or members of the general public seeking access to,
or participating in, the public entity's services, programs, or
activities are not individuals with disabilities. Others requested
that the Department explain the circumstances under which auxiliary
aids and services should be provided to companions. Still others
requested explicit clarification that where the individual seeking
access to or participating in the public entity's program,
services, or activities requires auxiliary aids and services, but
the companion does not, the public entity may not seek out, or
limit its communications to, the companion instead of communicating
directly with the individual with a disability when it would be
appropriate to do so.
Some in the medical community objected to the inclusion of any
regulatory language regarding companions, asserting that such
language is overbroad, seeks services for individuals whose
presence is not required by the public entity, is not necessary for
the delivery of the services or participation in the program, and
places additional burdens on the medical community. These
commenters asked that the Department limit the public entity's
obligation to communicate effectively with a companion to
situations where such communications are necessary to serve the
interests of the person who is receiving the public entity's
services.
After consideration of the many comments on this issue, the
Department believes that explicit inclusion of “companions” in the
final rule is appropriate to ensure that public entities understand
the scope of their effective communication obligations. There are
many situations in which the interests of program participants
without disabilities require that their companions with
disabilities be provided effective communication. In addition, the
program participant need not be physically present to trigger the
public entity's obligations to a companion. The controlling
principle is that auxiliary aids and services must be provided if
the companion is an appropriate person with whom the public entity
should or would communicate.
Examples of such situations include back-to-school nights or
parent-teacher conferences at a public school. If the faculty
writes on the board or otherwise displays information in a visual
context during a back-to-school night, this information must be
communicated effectively to parents or guardians who are blind or
have low vision. At a parent-teacher conference, deaf parents or
guardians must be provided with appropriate auxiliary aids and
services to communicate effectively with the teacher and
administrators. It makes no difference that the child who attends
the school does not have a disability. Likewise, when a deaf spouse
attempts to communicate with public social service agencies about
the services necessary for the hearing spouse, appropriate
auxiliary aids and services to the deaf spouse must be provided by
the public entity to ensure effective communication. Parents or
guardians, including foster parents, who are individuals with
disabilities, may need to interact with child services agencies on
behalf of their children; in such a circumstance, the child
services agencies would need to provide appropriate auxiliary aids
and services to those parents or guardians.
Effective communication with companions is particularly critical
in health care settings where miscommunication may lead to
misdiagnosis and improper or delayed medical treatment. The
Department has encountered confusion and reluctance by medical care
providers regarding the scope of their obligation with respect to
such companions. Effective communication with a companion is
necessary in a variety of circumstances. For example, a companion
may be legally authorized to make health care decisions on behalf
of the patient or may need to help the patient with information or
instructions given by hospital personnel. A companion may be the
patient's next-of-kin or health care surrogate with whom hospital
personnel must communicate about the patient's medical condition. A
companion could be designated by the patient to communicate with
hospital personnel about the patient's symptoms, needs, condition,
or medical history. Or the companion could be a family member with
whom hospital personnel normally would communicate.
Accordingly, § 35.160(a)(1) in the final rule now reads, “[a]
public entity shall take appropriate steps to ensure that
communications with applicants, participants, members of the
public, and companions with disabilities are as effective as
communications with others.” Section 35.160(a)(2) further defines
“companion” as “a family member, friend, or associate of an
individual seeking access to a service, program, or activity of a
public entity, who, along with the individual, is an appropriate
person with whom the public entity should communicate.” Section
35.160(b)(1) clarifies that the obligation to furnish auxiliary
aids and services extends to companions who are individuals with
disabilities, whether or not the individual accompanied also is an
individual with a disability. The provision now states that “[a]
public entity shall furnish appropriate auxiliary aids and services
where necessary to afford individuals with disabilities, including
applicants, participants, companions, and members of the public, an
equal opportunity to participate in, and enjoy the benefits of, a
service, program, or activity of a public entity.”
These provisions make clear that if the companion is someone
with whom the public entity normally would or should communicate,
then the public entity must provide appropriate auxiliary aids and
services to that companion to ensure effective communication with
the companion. This common-sense rule provides the guidance
necessary to enable public entities to properly implement the
nondiscrimination requirements of the ADA.
As set out in the final rule, § 35.160(b)(2) states, in
pertinent part, that “[t]he type of auxiliary aid or service
necessary to ensure effective communication will vary in accordance
with the method of communication used by the individual, the
nature, length, and complexity of the communication involved, and
the context in which the communication is taking place. In
determining what types of auxiliary aids and services are
necessary, a public entity shall give primary consideration to the
requests of individuals with disabilities.”
The second sentence of § 35.160(b)(2) of the final rule restores
the “primary consideration” obligation set out at § 35.160(b)(2) in
the 1991 title II regulation. This provision was inadvertently
omitted from the NPRM, and the Department agrees with the many
commenters on this issue that this provision should be retained. As
noted in the preamble to the 1991 title II regulation, and
reaffirmed here: “The public entity shall honor the choice [of the
individual with a disability] unless it can demonstrate that
another effective means of communication exists or that use of the
means chosen would not be required under § 35.164. Deference to the
request of the individual with a disability is desirable because of
the range of disabilities, the variety of auxiliary aids and
services, and different circumstances requiring effective
communication.” 28 CFR part 35, app. A at 580 (2009).
The first sentence in § 35.160(b)(2) codifies the axiom that the
type of auxiliary aid or service necessary to ensure effective
communication will vary with the situation, and provides factors
for consideration in making the determination, including the method
of communication used by the individual; the nature, length, and
complexity of the communication involved; and the context in which
the communication is taking place. Inclusion of this language under
title II is consistent with longstanding policy in this area.
See, e.g., The Americans with Disabilities Act Title II
Technical Assistance Manual Covering State and Local Government
Programs and Services, section II-7.1000, available at
www.ada.gov/taman2.html (“The type of auxiliary aid or
service necessary to ensure effective communication will vary in
accordance with the length and complexity of the communication
involved. * * * Sign language or oral interpreters, for example,
may be required when the information being communicated in a
transaction with a deaf individual is complex, or is exchanged for
a lengthy period of time. Factors to be considered in determining
whether an interpreter is required include the context in which the
communication is taking place, the number of people involved, and
the importance of the communication.”); see also 28 CFR part
35, app. A at 580 (2009). As explained in the NPRM, an individual
who is deaf or hard of hearing may need a qualified interpreter to
communicate with municipal hospital personnel about diagnoses,
procedures, tests, treatment options, surgery, or prescribed
medication (e.g., dosage, side effects, drug interactions,
etc.), or to explain follow-up treatments, therapies, test results,
or recovery. In comparison, in a simpler, shorter interaction, the
method to achieve effective communication can be more basic. An
individual who is seeking local tax forms may only need an exchange
of written notes to achieve effective communication.
Section 35.160(c)(1) has been added to the final rule to make
clear that a public entity shall not require an individual with a
disability to bring another individual to interpret for him or her.
The Department receives many complaints from individuals who are
deaf or hard of hearing alleging that public entities expect them
to provide their own sign language interpreters. Proposed §
35.160(c)(1) was intended to clarify that when a public entity is
interacting with a person with a disability, it is the public
entity's responsibility to provide an interpreter to ensure
effective communication. It is not appropriate to require the
person with a disability to bring another individual to provide
such services.
Section 35.160(c)(2) of the NPRM proposed codifying the
Department's position that there are certain limited instances when
a public entity may rely on an accompanying individual to interpret
or facilitate communication: (1) In an emergency involving a threat
to the public safety or welfare; or (2) if the individual with a
disability specifically requests it, the accompanying individual
agrees to provide the assistance, and reliance on that individual
for this assistance is appropriate under the circumstances.
Many commenters supported this provision, but sought more
specific language to address what they see as a particularly
entrenched problem. Some commenters requested that the Department
explicitly require the public entity first to notify the individual
with a disability that the individual has a right to request and
receive appropriate auxiliary aids and services without charge from
the public entity before using that person's accompanying
individual as a communication facilitator. Advocates stated that an
individual who is unaware of his or her rights may decide to use a
third party simply because he or she believes that is the only way
to communicate with the public entity.
The Department has determined that inclusion of specific
language requiring notification is unnecessary. Section
35.160(b)(1) already states that is the responsibility of the
public entity to provide auxiliary aids and services. Moreover, §
35.130(f) already prohibits the public entity from imposing a
surcharge on a particular individual with a disability or on any
group of individuals with disabilities to cover the costs of
auxiliary aids. However, the Department strongly advises public
entities that they should first inform the individual with a
disability that the public entity can and will provide auxiliary
aids and services, and that there would be no cost for such aids or
services.
Many commenters requested that the Department make clear that
the public entity cannot request, rely upon, or coerce an adult
accompanying an individual with a disability to provide effective
communication for that individual with a disability - that only a
voluntary offer is acceptable. The Department states unequivocally
that consent of, and for, the adult accompanying the individual
with a disability to facilitate communication must be provided
freely and voluntarily both by the individual with a disability and
the accompanying third party - absent an emergency involving an
imminent threat to the safety or welfare of an individual or the
public where there is no interpreter available. The public entity
may not coerce or attempt to persuade another adult to provide
effective communication for the individual with a disability. Some
commenters expressed concern that the regulation could be read by
public entities, including medical providers, to prevent parents,
guardians, or caregivers from providing effective communication for
children or that a child, regardless of age, would have to
specifically request that his or her caregiver act as interpreter.
The Department does not intend § 35.160(c)(2) to prohibit parents,
guardians, or caregivers from providing effective communication for
children where so doing would be appropriate. Rather, the rule
prohibits public entities, including medical providers, from
requiring, relying on, or forcing adults accompanying individuals
with disabilities, including parents, guardians, or caregivers, to
facilitate communication.
Several commenters asked that the Department make absolutely
clear that children are not to be used to provide effective
communication for family members and friends, and that it is the
public entity's responsibility to provide effective communication,
stating that often interpreters are needed in settings where it
would not be appropriate for children to be interpreting, such as
those involving medical issues, domestic violence, or other
situations involving the exchange of confidential or adult-related
material. Commenters observed that children are often hesitant to
turn down requests to provide communication services, and that such
requests put them in a very difficult position vis-a-vis family
members and friends. The Department agrees. It is the Department's
position that a public entity shall not rely on a minor child to
facilitate communication with a family member, friend, or other
individual, except in an emergency involving imminent threat to the
safety or welfare of an individual or the public where there is no
interpreter available. Accordingly, the Department has revised the
rule to state: “A public entity shall not rely on a minor child to
interpret or facilitate communication, except in an emergency
involving imminent threat to the safety or welfare of an individual
or the public where there is no interpreter available.” §
35.160(c)(3). Sections 35.160(c)(2) and (3) have no application in
circumstances where an interpreter would not otherwise be required
in order to provide effective communication (e.g., in simple
transactions such as purchasing movie tickets at a theater). The
Department stresses that privacy and confidentiality must be
maintained but notes that covered entities, such as hospitals, that
are subject to the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability
Act of 1996 (HIPAA), Public Law 104-191, Privacy Rules are
permitted to disclose to a patient's relative, close friend, or any
other person identified by the patient (such as an interpreter)
relevant patient information if the patient agrees to such
disclosures. See 45 CFR parts 160 and 164. The agreement
need not be in writing. Covered entities should consult the HIPAA
Privacy Rules regarding other ways disclosures might be able to be
made to such persons.
With regard to emergency situations, the NPRM proposed
permitting reliance on an individual accompanying an individual
with a disability to interpret or facilitate communication in an
emergency involving a threat to the public safety or welfare.
Commenters requested that the Department make clear that often a
public entity can obtain appropriate auxiliary aids and services in
advance of an emergency by making necessary advance arrangements,
particularly in anticipated emergencies such as predicted dangerous
weather or certain medical situations such as childbirth. These
commenters did not want public entities to be relieved of their
responsibilities to provide effective communication in emergency
situations, noting that the obligation to provide effective
communication may be more critical in such situations. Several
commenters requested a separate rule that requires public entities
to provide timely and effective communication in the event of an
emergency, noting that the need for effective communication
escalates in an emergency.
Commenters also expressed concern that public entities,
particularly law enforcement authorities and medical personnel,
would apply the “emergency situation” provision in inappropriate
circumstances and would rely on accompanying individuals without
making any effort to seek appropriate auxiliary aids and services.
Other commenters asked that the Department narrow this provision so
that it would not be available to entities that are responsible for
emergency preparedness and response. Some commenters noted that
certain exigent circumstances, such as those that exist during and
perhaps immediately after, a major hurricane, temporarily may
excuse public entities of their responsibilities to provide
effective communication. However, they asked that the Department
clarify that these obligations are ongoing and that, as soon as
such situations begin to abate or stabilize, the public entity must
provide effective communication.
The Department recognizes that the need for effective
communication is critical in emergency situations. After due
consideration of all of these concerns raised by commenters, the
Department has revised § 35.160(c) to narrow the exception
permitting reliance on individuals accompanying the individual with
a disability during an emergency to make it clear that it only
applies to emergencies involving an “imminent threat to the safety
or welfare of an individual or the public.” See §
35.160(c)(2)-(3). Arguably, all visits to an emergency room or
situations to which emergency workers respond are by definition
emergencies. Likewise, an argument can be made that most situations
that law enforcement personnel respond to involve, in one way or
another, a threat to the safety or welfare of an individual or the
public. The imminent threat exception in § 35.160(c)(2)-(3) is not
intended to apply to the typical and foreseeable emergency
situations that are part of the normal operations of these
institutions. As such, a public entity may rely on an accompanying
individual to interpret or facilitate communication under the §
35.160(c)(2)-(3) imminent threat exception only where in truly
exigent circumstances, i.e., where any delay in providing immediate
services to the individual could have life-altering or life-ending
consequences.
Many commenters urged the Department to stress the obligation of
State and local courts to provide effective communication. The
Department has received many complaints that State and local courts
often do not provide needed qualified sign language interpreters to
witnesses, litigants, jurors, potential jurors, and companions and
associates of persons participating in the legal process. The
Department cautions public entities that without appropriate
auxiliary aids and services, such individuals are denied an
opportunity to participate fully in the judicial process, and
denied benefits of the judicial system that are available to
others.
Another common complaint about access to State and local court
systems is the failure to provide effective communication in
deferral programs that are intended as an alternative to
incarceration, or for other court-ordered treatment programs. These
programs must provide effective communication, and courts referring
individuals with disabilities to such programs should only refer
individuals with disabilities to programs or treatment centers that
provide effective communication. No person with a disability should
be denied access to the benefits conferred through participation in
a court-ordered referral program on the ground that the program
purports to be unable to provide effective communication.
The general nondiscrimination provision in § 35.130(a) provides
that no individual with a disability shall, on the basis of
disability, be excluded from participation in or be denied the
benefits of the services, programs, or activities of a public
entity. The Department consistently interprets this provision and §
35.160 to require effective communication in courts, jails,
prisons, and with law enforcement officers. Persons with
disabilities who are participating in the judicial process as
witnesses, jurors, prospective jurors, parties before the court, or
companions of persons with business in the court, should be
provided auxiliary aids and services as needed for effective
communication. The Department has developed a variety of technical
assistance and guidance documents on the requirements for title II
entities to provide effective communication; those materials are
available on the Department Web site at:
http://www.ada.gov.
Many advocacy groups urged the Department to add language in the
final rule that would require public entities to provide accessible
material in a manner that is timely, accurate, and private. The
Department has included language in § 35.160(b)(2) stating that
“[i]n order to be effective, auxiliary aids and services must be
provided in accessible formats, in a timely manner, and in such a
way so as to protect the privacy and independence of the individual
with a disability.”
Because the appropriateness of particular auxiliary aids and
services may vary as a situation changes, the Department strongly
encourages public entities to do a communication assessment of the
individual with a disability when the need for auxiliary aids and
services is first identified, and to re-assess communication
effectiveness regularly throughout the communication. For example,
a deaf individual may go to an emergency department of a public
community health center with what is at first believed to be a
minor medical emergency, such as a sore knee, and the individual
with a disability and the public community health center both
believe that exchanging written notes will be effective. However,
during that individual's visit, it is determined that the
individual is, in fact, suffering from an anterior cruciate
ligament tear and must have surgery to repair the torn ligament. As
the situation develops and the diagnosis and recommended course of
action evolve into surgery, an interpreter most likely will be
necessary. A public entity has a continuing obligation to assess
the auxiliary aids and services it is providing, and should consult
with individuals with disabilities on a continuing basis to assess
what measures are required to ensure effective communication.
Public entities are further advised to keep individuals with
disabilities apprised of the status of the expected arrival of an
interpreter or the delivery of other requested or anticipated
auxiliary aids and services.
Video remote interpreting (VRI) services. In § 35.160(d)
of the NPRM, the Department proposed the inclusion of four
performance standards for VRI (which the NPRM termed video
interpreting services (VIS)), for effective communication: (1)
High-quality, clear, real-time, full-motion video and audio over a
dedicated high-speed Internet connection; (2) a clear, sufficiently
large, and sharply delineated picture of the participating
individual's head, arms, hands, and fingers, regardless of his body
position; (3) clear transmission of voices; and (4) persons who are
trained to set up and operate the VRI quickly. Commenters generally
approved of those performance standards, but recommended that some
additional standards be included in the final rule. Some State
agencies and advocates for persons with disabilities requested that
the Department add more detail in the description of the first
standard, including modifying the term “dedicated high-speed
Internet connection” to read “dedicated high-speed, wide-bandwidth
video connection.” These commenters argued that this change was
necessary to ensure a high-quality video image that will not
produce lags, choppy images, or irregular pauses in communication.
The Department agrees with those comments and has amended the
provision in the final rule accordingly.
For persons who are deaf with limited vision, commenters
requested that the Department include an explicit requirement that
interpreters wear high-contrast clothing with no patterns that
might distract from their hands as they are interpreting, so that a
person with limited vision can see the signs made by the
interpreter. While the Department reiterates the importance of such
practices in the delivery of effective VRI, as well as in-person
interpreting, the Department declines to adopt such performance
standards as part of this rule. In general, professional
interpreters already follow such practices - the Code of
Professional Conduct for interpreters developed by the Registry of
Interpreters for the Deaf, Inc. and the National Association of the
Deaf incorporates attire considerations into their standards of
professionalism and conduct. (This code is available at
http://www.vid.org/userfiles/file/pdfs/codeofethics.pdf
(Last visited July 18, 2010). Moreover, as a result of this code,
many VRI agencies have adopted detailed dress standards that
interpreters hired by the agency must follow. In addition,
commenters urged that a clear image of the face and eyes of the
interpreter and others be explicitly required. Because the face
includes the eyes, the Department has amended § 35.160(d)(2) of the
final rule to include a requirement that the interpreter's face be
displayed.
In response to comments seeking more training for users and
non-technicians responsible for VRI in title II facilities, the
Department is extending the requirement in § 35.160(d)(4) to
require training for “users of the technology” so that staff who
would have reason to use the equipment in an emergency room, State
or local court, or elsewhere are properly trained. Providing for
such training will enhance the success of VRI as means of providing
effective communication.
Captioning at sporting venues. In the NPRM at §
35.160(e), the Department proposed that sports stadiums that have a
capacity of 25,000 or more shall provide captioning for safety and
emergency information on scoreboards and video monitors. In
addition, the Department posed four questions about captioning of
information, especially safety and emergency information
announcements, provided over public address (PA) systems. The
Department received many extremely detailed and divergent responses
to each of the four questions and the proposed regulatory text.
Because comments submitted on the Department's title II and title
III proposals were intertwined, because of the similarity of issues
involved for title II entities and title III entities, and in
recognition of the fact that many large sports stadiums are covered
by both title II and title III as joint operations of State or
local governments and one or more public accommodations, the
Department presents here a single consolidated review and summary
of the issues raised in comments.
The Department asked whether requiring captioning of safety and
emergency information made over the public address system in
stadiums seating fewer than 25,000 would create an undue burden for
smaller entities, whether it would be feasible for small stadiums,
or whether a larger threshold, such as sports stadiums with a
capacity of 50,000 or more, would be appropriate.
There was a consensus among the commenters, including disability
advocates as well as venue owners and stadium designers and
operators, that using the stadium size or seating capacity as the
exclusive deciding factor for any obligation to provide captioning
for safety and emergency information broadcast over the PA system
is not preferred. Most disability advocacy organizations and
individuals with disabilities complained that using size or seating
capacity as a threshold for captioning safety and emergency
information would undermine the “undue burden” defense found in
both titles II and III. Many commenters provided examples of
facilities like professional hockey arenas that seat less than
25,000 fans but which, commenters argued, should be able to provide
real-time captioning. Other commenters suggested that some high
school or college stadiums, for example, may hold 25,000 fans or
more and yet lack the resources to provide real-time captioning.
Many commenters noted that real-time captioning would require
trained stenographers and that most high school and college sports
facilities rely upon volunteers to operate scoreboards and PA
systems, and they would not be qualified stenographers, especially
in case of an emergency. One national association noted that the
typical stenographer expense for a professional football game in
Washington, DC is about $550 per game. Similarly, one trade
association representing venues estimated that the cost for a
professional stenographer at a sporting event runs between $500 and
$1,000 per game or event, the cost of which, they argued, would be
unduly burdensome in many cases. Some commenters posited that
schools that do not sell tickets to athletic events would find it
difficult to meet such expenses, in contrast to major college
athletic programs and professional sports teams, which would be
less likely to prevail using an “undue burden” defense.
Some venue owners and operators and other covered entities
argued that stadium size should not be the key consideration when
requiring scoreboard captioning. Instead, these entities suggested
that equipment already installed in the stadium, including
necessary electrical equipment and backup power supply, should be
the determining factor for whether captioning is mandated. Many
commenters argued that the requirement to provide captioning should
only apply to stadiums with scoreboards that meet the National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72).
Commenters reported that NFPA 72 requires at least two independent
and reliable power supplies for emergency information systems,
including one source that is a generator or battery sufficient to
run the system in the event the primary power fails. Alternatively,
some stadium designers and title II entities commented that the
requirement should apply when the facility has at least one
elevator providing firefighter emergency operation, along with
approval of authorities with responsibility for fire safety. Other
commenters argued for flexibility in the requirements for providing
captioning and that any requirement should only apply to stadiums
constructed after the effective date of the regulation.
In the NPRM, the Department also asked whether the rule should
address the specific means of captioning equipment, whether it
should be provided through any effective means (scoreboards, line
boards, handheld devices, or other means), or whether some means,
such as handheld devices, should be eliminated as options. This
question elicited many comments from advocates for persons with
disabilities as well as from covered entities. Advocacy
organizations and individuals with experience using handheld
devices argue that such devices do not provide effective
communication. These commenters noted that information is often
delayed in the transmission to such devices, making them hard to
use when following action on the playing field or in the event of
an emergency when the crowd is already reacting to aural
information provided over the PA system well before it is received
on the handheld device.
Several venue owners and operators and others commented that
handheld technology offers advantages of flexibility and
portability so that it may be used successfully regardless of where
in the facility the user is located, even when not in the line of
sight of a scoreboard or other captioning system. Still other
commenters urged the Department not to regulate in such a way as to
limit innovation and use of such technology now and in the future.
Cost considerations were included in some comments from some
stadium designers and venue owners and operators, who reported that
the cost of providing handheld systems is far less than the cost of
real-time captioning on scoreboards, especially in facilities that
do not currently have the capacity to provide real-time captions on
existing equipment. Others noted that handheld technology is not
covered by fire and safety model codes, including the NFPA, and
thus would be more easily adapted into existing facilities if
captioning were required by the Department.
The Department also asked about providing open captioning of all
public address announcements, and not limiting captioning to safety
and emergency information. A variety of advocates and persons with
disabilities argued that all information broadcast over a PA system
should be captioned in real time at all facilities in order to
provide effective communication and that a requirement only to
provide emergency and safety information would not be sufficient. A
few organizations for persons with disabilities commented that
installation of new systems should not be required, but that all
systems within existing facilities that are capable of providing
captioning must be utilized to the maximum extent possible to
provide captioning of as much information as possible. Several
organizations representing persons with disabilities commented that
all facilities must include in safety planning the requirement to
caption all aurally-provided information for patrons with
communication disabilities. Some advocates suggested that demand
for captions will only increase as the number of deaf and hard of
hearing persons grows with the aging of the general population and
with increasing numbers of veterans returning from war with
disabilities. Multiple comments noted that the captioning would
benefit others as well as those with communication
disabilities.
By contrast, venue owners and operators and others commented
that the action on the sports field is self-explanatory and does
not require captioning and they objected to an explicit requirement
to provide real-time captioning for all information broadcast on
the PA system at a sporting event. Other commenters objected to
requiring captioning even for emergency and safety information over
the scoreboard rather than through some other means. By contrast,
venue operators, State government agencies, and some model code
groups, including NFPA, commented that emergency and safety
information must be provided in an accessible format and that
public safety is a paramount concern. Other commenters argued that
the best method to deliver safety and emergency information would
be television monitors showing local TV broadcasts with captions
already mandated by the FCC. Some commenters posited that the most
reliable information about a major emergency would be provided on
the television news broadcasts. Several commenters argued that
television monitors may be located throughout the facility,
improving line of sight for patrons, some of whom might not be able
to see the scoreboard from their seats or elsewhere in the
facility. Some stadium designers, venue operators, and model code
groups pointed out that video monitors are not regulated by the
NFPA or other agencies, so that such monitors could be more easily
provided. Video monitors may receive transmissions from within the
facility and could provide real-time captions if there is the
necessary software and equipment to feed the captioning signal to a
closed video network within the facility. Several comments
suggested that using monitors would be preferable to requiring
captions on the scoreboard if the regulation mandates real-time
captioning. Some venue owners and operators argued that
retrofitting existing stadiums with new systems could easily cost
hundreds of thousands of dollars per scoreboard or system. Some
stadium designers and others argued that captioning should only be
required in stadiums built after the effective date of the
regulation. For stadiums with existing systems that allow for
real-time captioning, one commenter posited that dedicating the
system exclusively to real-time captioning would lead to an annual
loss of between $2 and $3 million per stadium in revenue from
advertising currently running in that space.
After carefully considering the wide range of public comments on
this issue, the Department has concluded that the final rule will
not provide additional requirements for effective communication or
emergency information provided at sports stadiums at this time. The
1991 title II and title III regulations and statutory requirements
are not in any way affected by this decision. The decision to
postpone rulemaking on this complex issue is based on a number of
factors, including the multiple layers of existing regulation by
various agencies and levels of government, and the wide array of
information, requests, and recommendations related to developing
technology offered by the public. In addition, there is a huge
variety of covered entities, information and communication systems,
and differing characteristics among sports stadiums. The Department
has concluded that further consideration and review would be
prudent before it issues specific regulatory requirements.
Section 35.161 Telecommunications.
The Department proposed to retitle this section
“Telecommunications” to reflect situations in which the public
entity must provide an effective means to communicate by telephone
for individuals with disabilities. First, the NPRM proposed
redesignating § 35.161 as § 35.161(a) and replacing the term
“Telecommunications devices for the deaf (TDD)” with “Text
telephones (TTY).” Public comment was universally supportive of
this change in nomenclature to TTY.
In the NPRM, at § 35.161(b), the Department addressed
automated-attendant systems that handle telephone calls
electronically. Often individuals with disabilities, including
persons who are deaf or hard of hearing, are unable to use such
automated systems. Some systems are not compatible with TTYs or the
telecommunications relay service. Automated systems can and often
do disconnect calls from TTYs or relay calls, making it impossible
for persons using a TTY or relay system to do business with title
II entities in the same manner as others. The Department proposed
language that would require a telecommunications service to permit
persons using relay or TTYs or other assistive technology to use
the automated-attendant system provided by the public entity. The
FCC raised this concern with the Department after the 1991 title II
regulation went into effect, and the Department acted upon that
request in the NPRM. Comments from disability advocates and persons
with disabilities consistently requested the provision be amended
to cover “voice mail, messaging, auto-attendant, and interactive
voice response systems.” The Department recognizes that those are
important features of widely used telecommunications technology
that should be as accessible to persons who are deaf or hard of
hearing as they are to others, and has amended the section in the
final rule to include the additional features.
Many commenters, including advocates and persons with
disabilities, as well as State agencies and national organizations,
asked that all automated systems have an option for the caller to
bypass the automated system and speak to a live person who could
communicate using relay services. The Department understands that
automated telecommunications systems typically do not offer the
opportunity to avoid or bypass the automated system and speak to a
live person. The Department believes that at this time it is
inappropriate to add a requirement that all such systems provide an
override capacity that permits a TTY or relay caller to speak with
a live clerk on a telecommunications relay system. However, if a
system already provides an option to speak to a person, that system
must accept TTY and relay calls and must not disconnect or refuse
to accept such calls.
Other comments from advocacy organizations and individuals urged
the Department to require specifications for the operation of such
systems that would involve issuing technical requirements for
encoding and storage of automated text, as well as controls for
speed, pause, rewind, and repeat, and prompts without any
background noise. The same comments urged that these requirements
should be consistent with a pending advisory committee report to
the Access Board, submitted in April 2008. See
Telecommunications and Electronic Information Technology Advisory
Committee, Report to the Access Board Refreshed Accessibility
Standards and Guidelines in Telecommunications and Electronic and
Information Technology (Apr. 2008) available at
http://www.access-board.gov/sec508/refresh/report/. The
Department is declining at this time to preempt ongoing
consideration of these issues by the Board. Instead, the Department
will monitor activity by the Board. The Department is convinced
that the general requirement to make such automated systems usable
by persons with disabilities is appropriate at this time and title
II entities should evaluate their automated systems in light of
concerns about providing systems that offer effective communication
to persons with disabilities.
Finally, the Department has adopted in § 35.161(c) of the final
rule the requirement that all such systems must not disconnect or
refuse to take calls from all forms of FCC-approved
telecommunications relay systems, including Internet-based relay
systems. (Internet-based relay systems refer to the mechanism by
which the message is relayed). They do not require a public entity
to have specialized computer equipment. Commenters from some State
agencies, many advocacy organizations, and individuals strongly
urged the Department to mandate such action because of the high
proportion of TTY calls and relay service calls that are not
completed because the title II entity's phone system or employees
do not take the calls. This presents a serious obstacle for persons
doing business with State and local government and denies persons
with disabilities access to use the telephone for business that is
typically handled over the phone for others.
In addition, commenters requested that the Department include
“real-time” before any mention of “computer-aided” technology to
highlight the value of simultaneous translation of any
communication. The Department has added “real-time” before
“computer-aided transcription services” in the definition of
“auxiliary aids in § 35.104 and before “communication” in §
35.161(b).
Subpart F - Compliance Procedures Section 35.171 Acceptance of
complaints.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed changing the current
language in § 35.171(a)(2)(i) regarding misdirected complaints to
make it clear that if an agency receives a complaint for which it
lacks jurisdiction either under section 504 or as a designated
agency under the ADA, the agency may refer the complaint to the
appropriate agency with title II or section 504 jurisdiction or to
the Department of Justice. The language of the 1991 title II
regulation only requires the agency to refer such a complaint to
the Department, which in turn refers the complaint to the
appropriate designated agency. The proposed revisions to § 35.171
made it clear that an agency can refer a misdirected complaint
either directly to the appropriate agency or to the Department.
This amendment was intended to protect against the unnecessary
backlogging of complaints and to prevent undue delay in an agency
taking action on a complaint.
Several commenters supported this amendment as a more efficient
means of directing title II complaints to the appropriate enforcing
agency. One commenter requested that the Department emphasize the
need for timeliness in referring a complaint. The Department does
not believe it is appropriate to adopt a specific time frame but
will continue to encourage designated agencies to make timely
referrals. The final rule retains, with minor modifications, the
language in proposed § 35.171(a)(2)(i). The Department has also
amended § 35.171(a)(2)(ii) to be consistent with the changes in the
rule at § 35.190(e), as discussed below.
Section 35.172 Investigations and compliance reviews.
In the NPRM, the Department proposed a number of changes to
language in § 35.172 relating to the resolution of complaints.
Subtitle A of title II of the ADA defines the remedies, procedures,
and rights provided for qualified individuals with disabilities who
are discriminated against on the basis of disability in the
services, programs, or activities of State and local governments.
42 U.S.C. 12131-12134. Subpart F of the current regulation
establishes administrative procedures for the enforcement of title
II of the ADA. 28 CFR 35.170-35.178. Subpart G identifies eight
“designated agencies,” including the Department, that have
responsibility for investigating complaints under title II.
See 28 CFR 35.190(b).
The Department's 1991 title II regulation is based on the
enforcement procedures established in regulations implementing
section 504. Thus, the Department's 1991 title II regulation
provides that the designated agency “shall investigate each
complete complaint” alleging a violation of title II and shall
“attempt informal resolution” of such complaint. 28 CFR 35.172(a).
The full range of remedies (including compensatory damages) that
are available to the Department when it resolves a complaint or
resolves issues raised in a compliance review are available to
designated agencies when they are engaged in informal complaint
resolution or resolution of issues raised in a compliance review
under title II.
In the years since the 1991 title II regulation went into
effect, the Department has received many more complaints alleging
violations of title II than its resources permit it to resolve. The
Department has reviewed each complaint that the Department has
received and directed its resources to resolving the most critical
matters. In the NPRM, the Department proposed deleting the word
“each” as it appears before “complaint” in § 35.172(a) of the 1991
title II regulation as a means of clarifying that designated
agencies may exercise discretion in selecting title II complaints
for resolution.
Many commenters opposed the removal of the term “each,”
requesting that all title II complaints be investigated. The
commenters explained that complaints against title II entities
implicate the fundamental right of access to government facilities
and programs, making an administrative enforcement mechanism
critical. Rather than aligning enforcement discretion of title II
complaints with the discretion under the enforcement procedures of
title III, the commenters favored obtaining additional resources to
address more complaints. The commenters highlighted the advantage
afforded by Federal involvement in complaint investigations in
securing favorable voluntary resolutions. When Federal involvement
results in settlement agreements, commenters believed those
agreements are more persuasive to other public entities than
private settlements. Private litigation as a viable alternative was
rejected by the commenters because of the financial limitations of
many complainants, and because in some scenarios legal barriers
foreclose private litigation as an option.
Several of those opposing this amendment argued that designated
agencies are required to investigate each complaint under section
504, and a departure for title II complaints would be an
inconsistency. The Department believes that § 35.171(a) of the
final rule is consistent with the obligation to evaluate all
complaints. However, there is no statutory requirement that every
title II complaint receive a full investigation. Section 203 of the
ADA, 42 U.S.C. 12133, adopts the “remedies, procedures, and rights
set forth in section 505 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973” (29
U.S.C. 794a). Section 505 of the Rehabilitation Act, in turn,
incorporates the remedies available under title VI of the Civil
Rights Act of 1964 into section 504. Under these statutes, agencies
may engage in conscientious enforcement without fully investigating
each citizen complaint. An agency's decision to conduct a full
investigation requires a complicated balancing of a number of
factors that are particularly within its expertise. Thus, the
agency must not only assess whether a violation may have occurred,
but also whether agency resources are best spent on this complaint
or another, whether the agency is likely to succeed if it acts, and
whether the particular enforcement action requested best fits the
agency's overall policies. Availability of resources will always be
a factor, and the Department believes discretion to maximize these
limited resources will result in the most effective enforcement
program. If agencies are bound to investigate each complaint fully,
regardless of merit, such a requirement could have a deleterious
effect on their overall enforcement efforts. The Department
continues to expect that each designated agency will review the
complaints the agency receives to determine whether further
investigation is appropriate.
The Department also proposed revising § 35.172 to add a new
paragraph (b) that provided explicit authority for compliance
reviews consistent with the Department's longstanding position that
such authority exists. The proposed section stated, “[t]he
designated agency may conduct compliance reviews of public entities
based on information indicating a possible failure to comply with
the nondiscrimination requirements of this part.” Several
commenters supported this amendment, identifying title III
compliance reviews as having been a successful means for the
Department and designated agencies to improve accessibility. The
Department has retained this section. However, the Department has
modified the language of the section to make the authority to
conduct compliance reviews consistent with that available under
section 504 and title VI. See, e.g., 28 CFR 42.107(a). The
new provision reads as follows: “(b) The designated agency may
conduct compliance reviews of public entities in order to ascertain
whether there has been a failure to comply with the
nondiscrimination requirements of this part.” The Department has
also added a provision to § 35.172(c)(2) clarifying the
Department's longstanding view that agencies may obtain
compensatory damages on behalf of complainants as the result of a
finding of discrimination pursuant to a compliance review or in
informal resolution of a complaint.
Finally, in the NPRM, the Department proposed revising the
requirements for letters of findings for clarification and to
reflect current practice. Section 35.172(a) of the 1991 title II
regulation required designated agencies to issue a letter of
findings at the conclusion of an investigation if the complaint was
not resolved informally, and to attempt to negotiate a voluntary
compliance agreement if a violation was found. The Department's
proposed changes to the 1991 title II regulation moved the
discussion of letters of findings to a new paragraph (c) in the
NPRM, and clarified that letters of findings are only required when
a violation is found.
One commenter opposed the proposal to eliminate the obligation
of the Department and designated agencies to issue letters of
finding at the conclusion of every investigation. The commenter
argued that it is beneficial for public entities, as well as
complainants, for the Department to provide a reasonable
explanation of both compliance and noncompliance findings.
The Department has considered this comment but continues to
believe that this change will promote the overall effectiveness of
its enforcement program. The final rule retains the proposed
language.
Subpart G - Designated Agencies Section 35.190 Designated agencies.
Subpart G of the 1991 title II regulation designates specific
Federal agencies to investigate certain title II complaints.
Paragraph 35.190(b) specifies these agency designations. Paragraphs
35.190(c) and (d), respectively, grant the Department discretion to
designate further oversight responsibilities for matters not
specifically assigned or where there are apparent conflicts of
jurisdiction. The NPRM proposed adding a new § 35.190(e) further
refining procedures for complaints filed with the Department of
Justice. Proposed § 35.190(e) provides that when the Department
receives a complaint alleging a violation of title II that is
directed to the Attorney General but may fall within the
jurisdiction of a designated agency or another Federal agency with
jurisdiction under section 504, the Department may exercise its
discretion to retain the complaint for investigation under this
part. The Department would, of course, consult with the designated
agency when the Department plans to retain a complaint. In
appropriate circumstances, the Department and the designated agency
may conduct a joint investigation.
Several commenters supported this amendment as a more efficient
means of processing title II complaints. The commenters supported
the Department using its discretion to conduct timely
investigations of such complaints. The language of the proposed §
35.190(e) remains unchanged in the final rule.
Other Issues Questions Posed in the NPRM Regarding Costs and
Benefits of Complying With the 2010 Standards
In the NPRM, the Department requested comment on various cost
and benefit issues related to eight requirements in the
Department's Initial Regulatory Impact Analysis (Initial RIA),
available at ada.gov/NPRM2008/ria.htm), that were projected
to have incremental costs exceeding monetized benefits by more than
$100 million when using the 1991 Standards as the comparative
baseline, i.e., side reach, water closet clearances in
single-user toilet rooms with in-swinging doors, stairs, elevators,
location of accessible routes to stages, accessible attorney areas
and witness stands, assistive listening systems, and accessible
teeing grounds, putting greens, and weather shelters at golf
courses. 73 FR 34466, 34469 (June 17, 2008). The Department noted
that pursuant to the ADA, the Department does not have statutory
authority to modify the 2004 ADAAG and is required instead to issue
regulations implementing the ADA that are consistent with the
Board's guidelines. In that regard, the Department also requested
comment about whether any of these eight elements in the 2010
Standards should be returned to the Access Board for further
consideration, in particular as applied to alterations. Many of the
comments received by the Department in response to these questions
addressed both titles II and III. As a result, the Department's
discussion of these comments and its response are collectively
presented for both titles.
Side reach. The 1991 Standards at section 4.2.6 establish
a maximum side-reach height of 54 inches. The 2010 Standards at
section 308.3 reduce that maximum height to 48 inches. The 2010
Standards also add exceptions for certain elements to the scoping
requirement for operable parts.
The vast majority of comments the Department received were in
support of the lower side-reach maximum of 48 inches in the 2010
Standards. Most of these comments, but not all, were received from
individuals of short stature, relatives of individuals of short
stature, or organizations representing the interests of persons
with disabilities, including individuals of short stature. Comments
from individuals with disabilities and disability advocacy groups
stated that the 48-inch side reach would permit independence in
performing many activities of daily living for individuals with
disabilities, including individuals of short stature, persons who
use wheelchairs, and persons who have limited upper body strength.
In this regard, one commenter who is a business owner pointed out
that as a person of short stature there were many occasions when he
was unable to exit a public restroom independently because he could
not reach the door handle. The commenter said that often elevator
control buttons are out of his reach and, if he is alone, he often
must wait for someone else to enter the elevator so that he can ask
that person to press a floor button for him. Another commenter, who
is also a person of short stature, said that he has on several
occasions pulled into a gas station only to find that he was unable
to reach the credit card reader on the gas pump. Unlike other
customers who can reach the card reader, swipe their credit or
debit cards, pump their gas and leave the station, he must use
another method to pay for his gas. Another comment from a person of
short stature pointed out that as more businesses take steps to
reduce labor costs - a trend expected to continue - staffed booths
are being replaced with automatic machines for the sale, for
example, of parking tickets and other products. He observed that
the “ability to access and operate these machines becomes ever more
critical to function in society,” and, on that basis, urged the
Department to adopt the 48-inch side-reach requirement. Another
individual commented that persons of short stature should not have
to carry with them adaptive tools in order to access building or
facility elements that are out of their reach, any more than
persons in wheelchairs should have to carry ramps with them in
order to gain access to facilities.
Many of the commenters who supported the revised side-reach
requirement pointed out that lowering the side-reach requirement to
48 inches would avoid a problem sometimes encountered in the built
environment when an element was mounted for a parallel approach at
54 inches only to find afterwards that a parallel approach was not
possible. Some commenters also suggested that lowering the maximum
unobstructed side reach to 48 inches would reduce confusion among
design professionals by making the unobstructed forward and
side-reach maximums the same (the unobstructed forward reach in
both the 1991 and 2010 Standards is 48 inches maximum). These
commenters also pointed out that the ICC/ANSI A117.1 Standard,
which is a private sector model accessibility standard, has
included a 48-inch maximum high side-reach requirement since 1998.
Many jurisdictions have already incorporated this requirement into
their building codes, which these commenters believed would reduce
the cost of compliance with the 2010 Standards. Because numerous
jurisdictions have already adopted the 48-inch side-reach
requirement, the Department's failure to adopt the 48-inch
side-reach requirement in the 2010 Standards, in the view of many
commenters, would result in a significant reduction in
accessibility, and would frustrate efforts that have been made to
harmonize private sector model construction and accessibility codes
with Federal accessibility requirements. Given these concerns, they
overwhelmingly opposed the idea of returning the revised side-reach
requirement to the Access Board for further consideration.
The Department also received comments in support of the 48-inch
side-reach requirement from an association of professional
commercial property managers and operators and from State
governmental entities. The association of property managers pointed
out that the revised side-reach requirement provided a reasonable
approach to “regulating elevator controls and all other operable
parts” in existing facilities in light of the manner in which the
safe harbor, barrier removal, and alterations obligations will
operate in the 2010 Standards. One governmental entity, while fully
supporting the 48-inch side-reach requirement, encouraged the
Department to adopt an exception to the lower reach range for
existing facilities similar to the exception permitted in the
ICC/ANSI A117.1 Standard. In response to this latter concern, the
Department notes that under the safe harbor, existing facilities
that are in compliance with the 1991 Standards, which require a
54-inch side-reach maximum, would not be required to comply with
the lower side-reach requirement, unless there is an alteration.
See § 35.150(b)(2).
A number of commenters expressed either concern with, or
opposition to, the 48-inch side-reach requirement and suggested
that it be returned to the Access Board for further consideration.
These commenters included trade and business associations,
associations of retail stores, associations of restaurant owners,
retail and convenience store chains, and a model code organization.
Several businesses expressed the view that the lower side-reach
requirement would discourage the use of their products and
equipment by most of the general public. In particular, concerns
were expressed by a national association of pay phone service
providers regarding the possibility that pay telephones mounted at
the lower height would not be used as frequently by the public to
place calls, which would result in an economic burden on the pay
phone industry. The commenter described the lower height required
for side reach as creating a new “barrier” to pay phone use, which
would reduce revenues collected from pay phones and, consequently,
further discourage the installation of new pay telephones. In
addition, the commenter expressed concern that phone service
providers would simply decide to remove existing pay phones rather
than incur the costs of relocating them at the lower height. With
regard to this latter concern, the commenter misunderstood the
manner in which the safe harbor obligation will operate in the
revised title II regulation for elements that comply with the 1991
Standards. If the pay phones comply with the 1991 Standards or
UFAS, the adoption of the 2010 Standards does not require
retrofitting of these elements to reflect incremental changes in
the 2010 Standards (see § 35.150(b)(2)). However, pay
telephones that were required to meet the 1991 Standards as part of
new construction or alterations, but do not in fact comply with
those standards, will need to be brought into compliance with the
2010 Standards as of 18 months from the publication date of this
final rule. See § 35.151(c)(5)(ii).
The Department does not agree with the concerns expressed by the
commenter about reduced revenues from pay phones mounted at lower
heights. The Department believes that, while given the choice some
individuals may prefer to use a pay phone that is at a higher
height, the availability of some phones at a lower height will not
deter individuals from making needed calls.
The 2010 Standards will not require every pay phone to be
installed or moved to a lowered height. The table accompanying
section 217.2 of the 2010 Standards makes clear that, where one or
more telephones are provided on a floor, level, or an exterior
site, only one phone per floor, level, or exterior site must be
placed at an accessible height. Similarly, where there is one bank
of phones per floor, level, or exterior site, only one phone per
floor, level, or exterior site must be accessible. And if there are
two or more banks of phones per floor, level, or exterior site,
only one phone per bank must be placed at an accessible height.
Another comment in opposition to the lower reach range
requirement was submitted on behalf of a chain of convenience
stores with fuel stops. The commenter expressed the concern that
the 48-inch side reach “will make it uncomfortable for the majority
of the public,” including persons of taller stature who would need
to stoop to use equipment such as fuel dispensers mounted at the
lower height. The commenter offered no objective support for the
observation that a majority of the public would be rendered
uncomfortable if, as required in the 2010 Standards, at least one
of each type of fuel dispenser at a facility was made accessible in
compliance with the lower reach range. Indeed, the Department
received no comments from any individuals of tall stature
expressing concern about accessible elements or equipment being
mounted at the 48-inch height.
Several convenience store, restaurant, and amusement park
commenters expressed concern about the burden the lower side-reach
requirement would place on their businesses in terms of
self-service food stations and vending areas if the 48-inch
requirement were applied retroactively. The cost of lowering
counter height, in combination with the lack of control businesses
exercise over certain prefabricated service or vending fixtures,
outweighed, they argued, any benefits to persons with disabilities.
For this reason, they suggested the lower side-reach requirement be
referred back to the Access Board.
These commenters misunderstood the safe harbor and barrier
removal obligations that will be in effect under the 2010
Standards. Those existing self-service food stations and vending
areas that already are in compliance with the 1991 Standards will
not be required to satisfy the 2010 Standards unless they engage in
alterations. With regard to prefabricated vending machines and food
service components that will be purchased and installed in
businesses after the 2010 Standards become effective, the
Department expects that companies will design these machines and
fixtures to comply with the 2010 Standards in the future, as many
have already done in the 10 years since the 48-inch side-reach
requirement has been a part of the model codes and standards used
by many jurisdictions as the basis for their construction
codes.
A model code organization commented that the lower side-reach
requirement would create a significant burden if it required
entities to lower the mounting height for light switches,
environmental controls, and outlets when an alteration did not
include the walls where these elements were located, such as when
“an area is altered or as a path of travel obligation.” The
Department believes that the final rule adequately addresses those
situations about which the commenter expressed concern by not
requiring the relocation of existing elements, such as light
switches, environmental controls, and outlets, unless they are
altered. Moreover, under § 35.151(b)(4)(iii) of the final rule,
costs for altering the path of travel to an altered area of primary
function that exceed 20 percent of the overall costs of the
alteration will be deemed disproportionate.
The Department has determined that the revised side-reach
requirement should not be returned to the Access Board for further
consideration, based in large part on the views expressed by a
majority of the commenters regarding the need for, and importance
of, the lower side-reach requirement to ensure access for persons
with disabilities.
Alterations and Water Closet Clearances in Single-User Toilet Rooms
With In-Swinging Doors
The 1991 Standards allow a lavatory to be placed a minimum of 18
inches from the water closet centerline and a minimum of 36 inches
from the side wall adjacent to the water closet, which precludes
side transfers. The 1991 Standards do not allow an in-swinging door
in a toilet or bathing room to overlap the required clear floor
space at any accessible fixture. To allow greater transfer options,
section 604.3.2 of the 2010 Standards prohibits lavatories from
overlapping the clear floor space at water closets, except in
residential dwelling units. Section 603.2.3 of the 2010 Standards
maintains the prohibition on doors swinging into the clear floor
space or clearance required for any fixture, except that they
permit the doors of toilet or bathing rooms to swing into the
required turning space, provided that there is sufficient clearance
space for the wheelchair outside the door swing. In addition, in
single-user toilet or bathing rooms, exception 2 of section 603.2.3
of the 2010 Standards permits the door to swing into the clear
floor space of an accessible fixture if a clear floor space that
measures at least 30 inches by 48 inches is available outside the
arc of the door swing.
The majority of commenters believed that this requirement would
increase the number of toilet rooms accessible to individuals with
disabilities who use wheelchairs or mobility scooters, and will
make it easier for them to transfer. A number of commenters stated
that there was no reason to return this provision to the Access
Board. Numerous commenters noted that this requirement is already
included in other model accessibility standards and many State and
local building codes and that the adoption of the 2010 Standards is
an important part of harmonization efforts.
Other commenters, mostly trade associations, opposed this
requirement, arguing that the added cost to the industry outweighs
any increase in accessibility. Two commenters stated that these
proposed requirements would add two feet to the width of an
accessible single-user toilet room; however, another commenter said
the drawings in the proposed regulation demonstrated that there
would be no substantial increase in the size of the toilet room.
Several commenters stated that this requirement would require
moving plumbing fixtures, walls, or doors at significant additional
expense. Two commenters wanted the permissible overlap between the
door swing and clearance around any fixture eliminated. One
commenter stated that these new requirements will result in fewer
alterations to toilet rooms to avoid triggering the requirement for
increased clearances, and suggested that the Department specify
that repairs, maintenance, or minor alterations would not trigger
the need to provide increased clearances. Another commenter
requested that the Department exempt existing guest room bathrooms
and single-user toilet rooms that comply with the 1991 Standards
from complying with the increased clearances in alterations.
After careful consideration of these comments, the Department
believes that the revised clearances for single-user toilet rooms
will allow safer and easier transfers for individuals with
disabilities, and will enable a caregiver, aide, or other person to
accompany an individual with a disability into the toilet room to
provide assistance. The illustrations in Appendix B to the final
title III rule, “Analysis and Commentary on the 2010 ADA Standards
for Accessible Design,” published elsewhere in this volume and
codified as Appendix B to 28 CFR part 36, describe several ways for
public entities and public accommodations to make alterations while
minimizing additional costs or loss of space. Further, in any
isolated instances where existing structural limitations may entail
loss of space, the public entity and public accommodation may have
a technical infeasibility defense for that alteration. The
Department also recognizes that in attempting to create the
required clear floor space pursuant to section 604.3.2, there may
be certain specific circumstances where it would be technically
infeasible for a covered entity to comply with the clear floor
space requirement, such as where an entity must move a plumbing
wall in a multistory building where the mechanical chase for
plumbing is an integral part of a building's structure or where the
relocation of a wall or fixture would violate applicable plumbing
codes. In such circumstances, the required clear floor space would
not have to be provided although the covered entity would have to
provide accessibility to the maximum extent feasible. The
Department has, therefore, decided not to return this requirement
to the Access Board.
Alterations to stairs. The 1991 Standards only require
interior and exterior stairs to be accessible when they provide
access to levels that are not connected by an elevator, ramp, or
other accessible means of vertical access. In contrast, section
210.1 of the 2010 Standards requires all newly constructed stairs
that are part of a means of egress to be accessible. However,
exception 2 of section 210.1 of the 2010 Standards provides that in
alterations, stairs between levels connected by an accessible route
need not be accessible, except that handrails shall be provided.
Most commenters were in favor of this requirement for handrails in
alterations, and stated that adding handrails to stairs during
alterations was not only feasible and not cost-prohibitive, but
also provided important safety benefits. One commenter stated that
making all points of egress accessible increased the number of
people who could use the stairs in an emergency. A majority of the
commenters did not want this requirement returned to the Access
Board for further consideration.
The International Building Code (IBC), which is a private sector
model construction code, contains a similar provision, and most
jurisdictions enforce a version of the IBC as their building code,
thereby minimizing the impact of this provision on public entities
and public accommodations. The Department believes that by
requiring only the addition of handrails to altered stairs where
levels are connected by an accessible route, the costs of
compliance for public entities and public accommodations are
minimized, while safe egress for individuals with disabilities is
increased. Therefore, the Department has decided not to return this
requirement to the Access Board.
Alterations to elevators. Under the 1991 Standards, if an
existing elevator is altered, only that altered elevator must
comply with the new construction requirements for accessible
elevators to the maximum extent feasible. It is therefore possible
that a bank of elevators controlled by a single call system may
contain just one accessible elevator, leaving an individual with a
disability with no way to call an accessible elevator and thus
having to wait indefinitely until an accessible elevator happens to
respond to the call system. In the 2010 Standards, when an element
in one elevator is altered, section 206.6.1 will require the same
element to be altered in all elevators that are programmed to
respond to the same call button as the altered elevator.
Most commenters favored the proposed requirement. This
requirement, according to these commenters, is necessary so a
person with a disability need not wait until an accessible elevator
responds to his or her call. One commenter suggested that elevator
owners could also comply by modifying the call system so the
accessible elevator could be summoned independently. One commenter
suggested that this requirement would be difficult for small
businesses located in older buildings, and one commenter suggested
that this requirement be sent back to the Access Board.
After considering the comments, the Department agrees that this
requirement is necessary to ensure that when an individual with a
disability presses a call button, an accessible elevator will
arrive in a timely manner. The IBC contains a similar provision,
and most jurisdictions enforce a version of the IBC as their
building code, minimizing the impact of this provision on public
entities and public accommodations. Public entities and businesses
located in older buildings need not comply with this requirement
where it is technically infeasible to do so. Further, as pointed
out by one commenter, modifying the call system so the accessible
elevator can be summoned independently is another means of
complying with this requirement in lieu of altering all other
elevators programmed to respond to the same call button. Therefore,
the Department has decided not to return this requirement to the
Access Board.
Location of accessible routes to stages. The 1991
Standards at section 4.33.5 require an accessible route to connect
the accessible seating and the stage, as well as other ancillary
spaces used by performers. The 2010 Standards at section 206.2.6
provide in addition that where a circulation path directly connects
the seating area and the stage, the accessible route must directly
connect the accessible seating and the stage, and, like the 1991
Standards, an accessible route must connect the stage with the
ancillary spaces used by performers.
In the NPRM, the Department asked operators of auditoria about
the extent to which auditoria already provide direct access to
stages and whether there were planned alterations over the next 15
years that included accessible direct routes to stages. The
Department also asked how to quantify the benefits of this
requirement for persons with disabilities, and invited commenters
to provide illustrative anecdotal experiences about the
requirement's benefits. The Department received many comments
regarding the costs and benefits of this requirement. Although
little detail was provided, many industry and governmental entity
commenters anticipated that the costs of this requirement would be
great and that it would be difficult to implement. They noted that
premium seats may have to be removed and that load-bearing walls
may have to be relocated. These commenters suggested that the
significant costs would deter alterations to the stage area for a
great many auditoria. Some commenters suggested that ramps to the
front of the stage may interfere with means of egress and emergency
exits. Several commenters requested that the requirement apply to
new construction only, and one industry commenter requested an
exemption for stages used in arenas or amusement parks where there
is no audience participation or where the stage is a work area for
performers only. One commenter requested that the requirement not
apply to temporary stages.
The final rule does not require a direct accessible route to be
constructed where a direct circulation path from the seating area
to the stage does not exist. Consequently, those commenters who
expressed concern about the burden imposed by the revised
requirement (i.e., where the stage is constructed with no direct
circulation path connecting the general seating and performing
area) should note that the final rule will not require the
provision of a direct accessible route under these circumstances.
The final rule applies to permanent stages, as well as “temporary
stages,” if there is a direct circulation path from the seating
area to the stage. However, the Department does recognize that in
some circumstances, such as an alteration to a primary function
area, the ability to provide a direct accessible route to a stage
may be costly or technically infeasible, the auditorium owner is
not precluded by the revised requirement from asserting defenses
available under the regulation. In addition, the Department notes
that since section 4.33.5 of the 1991 Standards requires an
accessible route to a stage, the safe harbor will apply to existing
facilities whose stages comply with the 1991 Standards.
Several governmental entities supported accessible auditoria and
the revised requirement. One governmental entity noted that its
State building code already required direct access, that it was
possible to provide direct access, and that creative solutions had
been found to do so.
Many advocacy groups and individual commenters strongly
supported the revised requirement, discussing the acute need for
direct access to stages as it impacts a great number of people at
important life events such as graduations and awards ceremonies, at
collegiate and competitive performances and other school events,
and at entertainment events that include audience participation.
Many commenters expressed the belief that direct access is
essential for integration mandates to be satisfied and that
separate routes are stigmatizing and unequal. The Department agrees
with these concerns.
Commenters described the impact felt by persons in wheelchairs
who are unable to access the stage at all when others are able to
do so. Some of these commenters also discussed the need for
performers and production staff who use wheelchairs to have direct
access to the stage and provided a number of examples that
illustrated the importance of the rule proposed in the NPRM.
Personal anecdotes were provided in comments and at the
Department's public hearing on the NPRM. One mother spoke
passionately and eloquently about the unequal treatment experienced
by her daughter, who uses a wheelchair, at awards ceremonies and
band concerts. Her daughter was embarrassed and ashamed to be
carried by her father onto a stage at one band concert. When the
venue had to be changed for another concert to an accessible
auditorium, the band director made sure to comment that he was
unhappy with the switch. Rather than endure the embarrassment and
indignities, her child dropped out of band the following year.
Another father commented about how he was unable to speak from the
stage at a PTA meeting at his child's school. Speaking from the
floor limited his line of sight and his participation. Several
examples were provided of children who could not participate on
stage during graduation, awards programs, or special school events,
such as plays and festivities. One student did not attend his
college graduation because he would not be able to get on stage.
Another student was unable to participate in the class Christmas
programs or end-of-year parties unless her father could attend and
lift her onto the stage. These commenters did not provide a method
to quantify the benefits that would accrue by having direct access
to stages. One commenter stated, however, that “the cost of dignity
and respect is without measure.”
Many industry commenters and governmental entities suggested
that the requirement be sent back to the Access Board for further
consideration. One industry commenter mistakenly noted that some
international building codes do not incorporate the requirement and
that therefore there is a need for further consideration. However,
the Department notes that both the 2003 and 2006 editions of the
IBC include scoping provisions that are almost identical to this
requirement and that these editions of the model code are the most
frequently used. Many individuals and advocacy group commenters
requested that the requirement be adopted without further delay.
These commenters spoke of the acute need for direct access to
stages and the amount of time it would take to resubmit the
requirement to the Access Board. Several commenters noted that the
2004 ADAAG tracks recent model codes and thus there is no need for
further consideration. The Department agrees that no further delay
is necessary and therefore has decided not to return the
requirement to the Access Board for further consideration.
Attorney areas and witness stands. The 1991 Standards do
not require that public entities meet specific architectural
standards with regard to the construction and alteration of
courtrooms and judicial facilities. Because it is apparent that the
judicial facilities of State and local governments have often been
inaccessible to individuals with disabilities, as part of the NPRM,
the Department proposed the adoption of sections 206.2.4, 231.2,
808, 304, 305, and 902 of the 2004 ADAAG concerning judicial
facilities and courtrooms, including requirements for accessible
courtroom stations and accessible jury boxes and witness
stands.
Those who commented on access to judicial facilities and
courtrooms uniformly favored the adoption of the 2010 Standards.
Virtually all of the commenters stated that accessible judicial
facilities are crucial to ensuring that individuals with
disabilities are afforded due process under law and have an equal
opportunity to participate in the judicial process. None of the
commenters favored returning this requirement to the Access Board
for further consideration.
The majority of commenters, including many disability rights and
advocacy organizations, stated that it is crucial for individuals
with disabilities to have effective and meaningful access to our
judicial system so as to afford them due process under law. They
objected to asking the Access Board to reconsider this requirement.
In addition to criticizing the initial RIA for virtually ignoring
the intangible and non-monetary benefits associated with accessible
courtrooms, these commenters frequently cited the Supreme Court's
decision in Tennessee v. Lane, 541 U.S. 509, 531
(2004), 4 as ample justification for the requirement, noting the
Court's finding that “[t]he unequal treatment of disabled persons
in the administration of judicial services has a long history, and
has persisted despite several legislative efforts to remedy the
problem of disability discrimination.” Id. at 531. These
commenters also made a number of observations, including the
following: providing effective access to individuals with mobility
impairments is not possible when architectural barriers impede
their path of travel and negatively emphasize an individual's
disability; the perception generated by makeshift accommodations
discredits witnesses and attorneys with disabilities, who should
not be stigmatized or treated like second-class citizens; the cost
of accessibility modifications to existing courthouses can often be
significantly decreased by planning ahead, by focusing on low-cost
options that provide effective access, and by addressing existing
barriers when reasonable modifications to the courtroom can be
made; by planning ahead and by following best practices,
jurisdictions can avoid those situations where it is apparent that
someone's disability is the reason why ad hoc arrangements have to
be made prior to the beginning of court proceedings; and
accessibility should be a key concern during the planning and
construction process so as to ensure that both courtroom grandeur
and accessibility are achieved. One commenter stated that, in order
for attorneys with disabilities to perform their professional
duties to their clients and the court, it is essential that
accessible courtrooms, conference rooms, law libraries, judicial
chambers, and other areas of a courthouse be made barrier-free by
taking accessible design into account prior to construction.
4 The Supreme Court in Tennessee v. Lane, 541 U.S.
509, 533-534 (2004), held that title II of the ADA constitutes a
valid exercise of Congress' enforcement power under the Fourteenth
Amendment in cases implicating the fundamental right of access to
the courts.
Numerous commenters identified a variety of benefits that would
accrue as a result of requiring judicial facilities to be
accessible. These included the following: maintaining the decorum
of the courtroom and eliminating the disruption of court
proceedings when individuals confront physical barriers; providing
an accessible route to the witness stand and attorney area and
clear floor space to accommodate a wheelchair within the witness
area; establishing crucial lines of sight between the judge, jury,
witnesses, and attorneys - which commenters described as crucial;
ensuring that the judge and the jury will not miss key visual
indicators of a witness; maintaining a witness's or attorney's
dignity and credibility; shifting the focus from a witness's
disability to the substance of that person's testimony; fostering
the independence of an individual with disability; allowing persons
with mobility impairments to testify as witnesses, including as
expert witnesses; ensuring the safety of various participants in a
courtroom proceeding; and avoiding unlawful discrimination. One
commenter stated that equal access to the well of the courtroom for
both attorney and client is important for equal participation and
representation in our court system. Other commenters indicated that
accessible judicial facilities benefit a wide range of people,
including many persons without disabilities, senior citizens,
parents using strollers with small children, and attorneys and
court personnel wheeling documents into the courtroom. One
commenter urged the adoption of the work area provisions because
they would result in better workplace accessibility and increased
productivity. Several commenters urged the adoption of the rule
because it harmonizes the ADAAG with the model IBC, the standards
developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), and
model codes that have been widely adopted by State and local
building departments, thus increasing the prospects for better
understanding and compliance with the ADAAG by architects,
designers, and builders.
Several commenters mentioned the report “Justice for All:
Designing Accessible Courthouses” (Nov. 15, 2006), available at
http://www.access-board.gov/caac/report.htm (Nov. 24, 2009)
(last visited June 24, 2010). The report, prepared by the
Courthouse Access Advisory Committee for the Access Board,
contained recommendations for the Board's use in developing and
disseminating guidance on accessible courthouse design under the
ADA and the ABA. These commenters identified some of the report's
best practices concerning courtroom accessibility for witness
stands, jury boxes, and attorney areas; addressed the costs and
benefits arising from the use of accessible courtrooms; and
recommended that the report be incorporated into the Department's
final rule. With respect to existing courtrooms, one commenter in
this group suggested that consideration be given to ensuring that
there are barrier-free emergency evacuation routes for all persons
in the courtroom, including different evacuation routes for
different classes of individuals given the unique nature of
judicial facilities and courtrooms.
The Department declines to incorporate the report into the
regulation. However, the Department encourages State and local
governments to consult the Committee report as a useful guide on
ways to facilitate and increase accessibility of their judicial
facilities. The report includes many excellent examples of
accessible courtroom design.
One commenter proposed that the regulation also require a
sufficient number of accessible benches for judges with
disabilities. Under section 206.2.4 of the 2004 ADAAG, raised
courtroom stations used by judges and other judicial staff are not
required to provide full vertical access when first constructed or
altered, as long as the required clear floor space, maneuvering
space, and any necessary electrical service for future installation
of a means of vertical access, is provided at the time of new
construction or can be achieved without substantial reconstruction
during alterations. The Department believes that this standard
easily allows a courtroom station to be adapted to provide vertical
access in the event a judge requires an accessible judge's
bench.
The Department received several anecdotal accounts of courtroom
experiences of individuals with disabilities. One commenter
recalled numerous difficulties that her law partner faced as the
result of inaccessible courtrooms, and their concerns that the
attention of judge and jury was directed away from the merits of
case to the lawyer and his disability. Among other things, the
lawyer had to ask the judges on an appellate panel to wait while he
maneuvered through insufficient space to the counsel table; ask
judges to relocate bench conferences to accessible areas; and make
last-minute preparations and rearrangements that his peers without
disabilities did not have to make. Another commenter with extensive
experience as a lawyer, witness, juror, and consultant observed
that it is common practice for a witness who uses mobility devices
to sit in front of the witness stand. He described how
disconcerting and unsettling it has been for him to testify in
front of the witness stand, which allowed individuals in the
courtroom to see his hands or legs shaking because of spasticity,
making him feel like a second-class citizen.
Two other commenters with mobility disabilities described their
experiences testifying in court. One accessibility consultant
stated that she was able to represent her clients successfully when
she had access to an accessible witness stand because it gave her
the ability “to look the judge in the eye, speak comfortably and be
heard, hold up visual aids that could be seen by the judge, and
perform without an architectural stigma.” She did not believe that
she was able to achieve a comparable outcome or have meaningful
access to the justice system when she testified from an
inaccessible location. Similarly, a licensed clinical social worker
indicated that she has testified in several cases in accessible
courtrooms, and that having full access to the witness stand in the
presence of the judge and the jury was important to her
effectiveness as an expert witness. She noted that accessible
courtrooms often are not available, and that she was aware of
instances in which victims, witnesses, and attorneys with
disabilities have not been able to obtain needed disability
accommodations in order to fulfill their roles at trial.
Two other commenters indicated that they had been chosen for
jury duty but that they were effectively denied their right to
participate as jurors because the courtrooms were not accessible.
Another commenter indicated that he has had to sit apart from the
other jurors because the jury box was inaccessible.
A number of commenters expressed approval of actions taken by
States to facilitate access in judicial facilities. A member of a
State commission on disability noted that the State had been
working toward full accessibility since 1997 when the Uniform
Building Code required interior accessible routes. This commenter
stated that the State's district courts had been renovated to the
maximum extent feasible to provide greater access. This commenter
also noted that a combination of Community Development Block Grant
money and State funds are often awarded for renovations of
courtroom areas. One advocacy group that has dealt with court
access issues stated that members of the State legal community and
disability advocates have long been promoting efforts to ensure
that the State courts are accessible to individuals with
disabilities. The comment cited a publication distributed to the
Washington State courts by the State bar association entitled,
“Ensuring Equal Access to the Courts for Persons with
Disabilities.” (Aug. 2006), available at
http://www.wsba.org/ensuringaccessguidebook.pdf (last
visited July 20, 2010). In addition, the commenter also indicated
that the State supreme court had promulgated a new rule governing
how the courts should respond to requests of accommodation based
upon disability; the State legislature had created the position of
Disability Access Coordinator for Courts to facilitate
accessibility in the court system; and the State legislature had
passed a law requiring that all planned improvements and
alterations to historic courthouses be approved by the ADA State
facilities program manager and committee in order to ensure that
the alterations will enhance accessibility.
The Department has decided to adopt the requirements in the 2004
ADAAG with respect to judicial facilities and courtrooms and will
not ask the Access Board to review these requirements. The final
rule is wholly consistent with the objectives of the ADA. It
addresses a well-documented history of discrimination with respect
to judicial administration and significantly increases
accessibility for individuals with disabilities. It helps ensure
that they will have an opportunity to participate equally in the
judicial process. As stated, the final rule is consistent with a
number of model and local building codes that have been widely
adopted by State and local building departments and provides
greater uniformity for planners, architects, and builders.
Assistive listening systems. The 1991 Standards at
sections 4.33.6 and 4.33.7 require assistive listening systems
(ALS) in assembly areas and prescribe general performance standards
for ALS systems. In the NPRM, the Department proposed adopting the
technical specifications in the 2004 ADAAG for ALS that are
intended to ensure better quality and effective delivery of sound
and information for persons with hearing impairments, especially
those using hearing aids. The Department noted in the NPRM that
since 1991, advancements in ALS and the advent of digital
technology have made these systems more amenable to uniform
standards, which, among other things, should ensure that a certain
percentage of required ALS systems are hearing-aid compatible. 73
FR 34466, 34471 (June 17, 2008). The 2010 Standards at section 219
provide scoping requirements and at section 706 address receiver
jacks, hearing aid compatibility, sound pressure level,
signal-to-noise ratio, and peak clipping level. The Department
requested comments specifically from arena and assembly area
administrators on the cost and maintenance issues associated with
ALS, asked generally about the costs and benefits of ALS, and asked
whether, based upon the expected costs of ALS, the issue should be
returned to the Access Board for further consideration.
Comments from advocacy organizations noted that persons who
develop significant hearing loss often discontinue their normal
routines and activities, including meetings, entertainment, and
large group events, due to a sense of isolation caused by the
hearing loss or embarrassment. Individuals with longstanding
hearing loss may never have participated in group activities for
many of the same reasons. Requiring ALS may allow individuals with
disabilities to contribute to the community by joining in
government and public events, and increasing economic activity
associated with community activities and entertainment. Making
public events and entertainment accessible to persons with hearing
loss also brings families and other groups that include persons
with hearing loss into more community events and activities, thus
exponentially increasing the benefit from ALS.
Many commenters noted that when a person has significant hearing
loss, that person may be able to hear and understand information in
a quiet situation with the use of hearing aids or cochlear
implants; however, as background noise increases and the distance
between the source of the sound and the listener grows, and
especially where there is distortion in the sound, an ALS becomes
essential for basic comprehension and understanding. Commenters
noted that among the 31 million Americans with hearing loss, and
with a projected increase to over 78 million Americans with hearing
loss by 2030, the benefit from ALS is huge and growing. Advocates
for persons with disabilities and individuals commented that they
appreciated the improvements in the 2004 ADAAG standards for ALS,
including specifications for the ALS systems and performance
standards. They noted that neckloops that translate the signal from
the ALS transmitter to a frequency that can be heard on a hearing
aid or cochlear implant are much more effective than separate ALS
system headsets, which sometimes create feedback, often
malfunction, and may create distractions for others seated nearby.
Comments from advocates and users of ALS systems consistently noted
that the Department's regulation should, at a minimum, be
consistent with the 2004 ADAAG. Although there were requests for
adjustments in the scoping requirements from advocates seeking
increased scoping requirements, and from large venue operators
seeking fewer requirements, there was no significant concern
expressed by commenters about the technical specifications for ALS
in the 2004 ADAAG.
Some commenters from trade associations and large venue owners
criticized the scoping requirements as too onerous and one
commenter asked for a remand to the Access Board for new scoping
rules. However, one State agency commented that the 2004 ADAAG
largely duplicates the requirements in the 2006 IBC and the 2003
ANSI codes, which means that entities that comply with those
standards would not incur additional costs associated with ADA
compliance.
According to one State office of the courts, the cost to install
either an infrared system or an FM system at average-sized
facilities, including most courtrooms covered by title II, would be
between $500 and $2,000, which the agency viewed as a small price
in comparison to the benefits of inclusion. Advocacy organizations
estimated wholesale costs of ALS systems at about $250 each and
individual neckloops to link the signal from the ALS transmitter to
hearing aids or cochlear implants at less than $50 per unit. Many
commenters pointed out that if a facility already is using
induction neckloops, it would already be in compliance and would
not have any additional installation costs. One major city
commented that annual maintenance is about $2,000 for the entire
system of performance venues in the city. A trade association
representing very large venues estimated annual maintenance and
upkeep expenses, including labor and replacement parts, to be at
most about $25,000 for a very large professional sports
stadium.
One commenter suggested that the scoping requirements for ALS in
the 2004 ADAAG were too stringent and that the Department should
return them to the Access Board for further review and
consideration. Others commented that the requirement for new ALS
systems should mandate multichannel receivers capable of receiving
audio description for persons who are blind, in addition to a
channel for amplification for persons who are hard of hearing. Some
comments suggested that the Department should require a set
schedule and protocol of mandatory maintenance. Department
regulations already require maintenance of accessible features at §
35.133(a) of the title II regulation, which obligates a title II
entity to maintain ALS in good working order. The Department
recognizes that maintenance of ALS is key to its usability.
Necessary maintenance will vary dramatically from venue to venue
based upon a variety of factors including frequency of use, number
of units, quality of equipment, and others items. Accordingly, the
Department has determined that it is not appropriate to mandate
details of maintenance, but notes that failure to maintain ALS
would violate § 35.133(a) of this rule.
The NPRM asked whether the Department should return the issue of
ALS requirements to the Access Board. The Department has received
substantial feedback on the technical and scoping requirements for
ALS and is convinced that these requirements are reasonable and
that the benefits justify the requirements. In addition, the
Department believes that the new specifications will make ALS work
more effectively for more persons with disabilities, which,
together with a growing population of new users, will increase
demand for ALS, thus mooting criticism from some large venue
operators about insufficient demand. Thus, the Department has
determined that it is unnecessary to refer this issue back to the
Access Board for reconsideration.
Accessible teeing grounds, putting greens, and weather
shelters. In the NPRM, the Department sought public input on
the proposed requirements for accessible golf courses. These
requirements specifically relate to accessible routes within the
boundaries of courses, as well as the accessibility of golfing
elements (e.g., teeing grounds, putting greens, weather
shelters).
In the NPRM, the Department sought information from the owners
and operators of golf courses, both public and private, on the
extent to which their courses already have golf car passages, and,
if so, whether they intended to avail themselves of the proposed
accessible route exception for golf car passages. 73 FR 34466,
34471 (June 17, 2008).
Most commenters expressed support for the adoption of an
accessible route requirement that includes an exception permitting
golf car passage as all or part of an accessible route. Comments in
favor of the proposed standard came from golf course owners and
operators, individuals, organizations, and disability rights
groups, while comments opposing adoption of the golf course
requirements generally came from golf courses and organizations
representing the golf course industry.
The majority of commenters expressed the general viewpoint that
nearly all golf courses provide golf cars and have either
well-defined paths or permit golf cars to drive on the course where
paths are not present, thus meeting the accessible route
requirement. Several commenters disagreed with the assumption in
the initial RIA, that virtually every tee and putting green on an
existing course would need to be regraded in order to provide
compliant accessible routes. According to one commenter, many golf
courses are relatively flat with little slope, especially those
heavily used by recreational golfers. This commenter concurred with
the Department that it is likely that most existing golf courses
have a golf car passage to tees and greens, thereby substantially
minimizing the cost of bringing an existing golf course into
compliance with the proposed standards. One commenter reported that
golf course access audits found that the vast majority of public
golf courses would have little difficulty in meeting the proposed
golf course requirements. In the view of some commenters, providing
access to golf courses would increase golf participation by
individuals with disabilities.
The Department also received many comments requesting
clarification of the term “golf car passage.” For example, one
commenter requesting clarification of the term “golf car passage”
argued that golf courses typically do not provide golf car paths or
pedestrian paths onto the actual teeing grounds or greens, many of
which are higher or lower than the car path. This commenter argued
that if golf car passages were required to extend onto teeing
grounds and greens in order to qualify for an exception, then some
golf courses would have to substantially regrade teeing grounds and
greens at a high cost.
After careful consideration of the comments, the Department has
decided to adopt the 2010 Standards specific to golf facilities.
The Department believes that in order for individuals with mobility
disabilities to have an opportunity to play golf that is equal to
golfers without disabilities, it is essential that golf courses
provide an accessible route or accessible golf car passage to
connect accessible elements and spaces within the boundary of the
golf course, including teeing grounds, putting greens, and weather
shelters.
Public Comments on Other NPRM Issues
Equipment and furniture. In the 1991 title II regulation,
there are no specific provisions addressing equipment and
furniture, although § 35.150(b) states that one means by which a
public entity can make its program accessible to individuals with
disabilities is “redesign of equipment.” In the NPRM, the
Department announced its intention not to regulate equipment,
proposing instead to continue with the current approach, under
which equipment and furniture are covered by other provisions,
including those requiring reasonable modifications of policies,
practices, or procedures, program accessibility, and effective
communication. The Department suggested that entities apply the
accessibility standards for fixed equipment in the 2004 ADAAG to
analogous free-standing equipment in order to ensure that such
equipment is accessible, and that entities consult relevant
portions of the 2004 ADAAG and standards from other Federal
agencies to make equipment accessible to individuals who are blind
or have low vision (e.g., the communication-related
standards for ATMs in the 2004 ADAAG).
The Department received numerous comments objecting to this
decision and urging the Department to issue equipment and furniture
regulations. Based on these comments, the Department has decided
that it needs to revisit the issuance of equipment and furniture
regulations and it intends to do so in future rulemaking.
Among the commenters' key concerns, many from the disability
community and some public entities, were objections to the
Department's earlier decision not to issue equipment regulations,
especially for medical equipment. These groups recommended that the
Department list by name certain types of medical equipment that
must be accessible, including exam tables (that lower to 15 inches
above floor or lower), scales, medical and dental chairs, and
radiologic equipment (including mammography equipment). These
commenters emphasized that the provision of medically related
equipment and furniture should also be specifically regulated since
they are not included in the 2004 ADAAG (while depositories, change
machines, fuel dispensers, and ATMs were) and because of their
crucial role in the provision of healthcare. Commenters described
how the lack of accessible medical equipment negatively affects the
health of individuals with disabilities. For example, some
individuals with mobility disabilities do not get thorough medical
care because their health providers do not have accessible
examination tables or scales.
Commenters also said that the Department's stated plan to assess
the financial impact of free-standing equipment on businesses was
not necessary, as any regulations could include a financial
balancing test. Other commenters representing persons who are blind
or have low vision urged the Department to mandate accessibility
for a wide range of equipment - including household appliances
(stoves, washers, microwaves, and coffee makers), audiovisual
equipment (stereos and DVD players), exercise machines, vending
equipment, ATMs, computers at Internet cafes or hotel business
centers, reservations kiosks at hotels, and point-of-sale devices -
through speech output and tactile labels and controls. They argued
that modern technology allows such equipment to be made accessible
at minimal cost. According to these commenters, the lack of such
accessibility in point-of-sale devices is particularly problematic
because it forces blind individuals to provide personal or
sensitive information (such as personal identification numbers) to
third parties, which exposes them to identity fraud. Because the
ADA does not apply directly to the manufacture of products, the
Department lacks the authority to issue design requirements for
equipment designed exclusively for use in private homes. See
Department of Justice, Americans with Disabilities Act, ADA
Title III Technical Assistance Manual Covering Public
Accommodations and Commercial Facilities, III-4.4200, available
at http://www.ada.gov/taman3.
Some commenters urged the Department to require swimming pool
operators to provide aquatic wheelchairs for the use of persons
with disabilities when the swimming pool has a sloped entry. If
there is a sloped entry, a person who uses a wheelchair would
require a wheelchair designed for use in the water in order to gain
access to the pool because taking a personal wheelchair into water
would rust and corrode the metal on the chair and damage any
electrical components of a power wheelchair. Providing an aquatic
wheelchair made of non-corrosive materials and designed for access
into the water will protect the water from contamination and avoid
damage to personal wheelchairs or other mobility aids.
Additionally, many commenters urged the Department to regulate
the height of beds in accessible hotel guest rooms and to ensure
that such beds have clearance at the floor to accommodate a
mechanical lift. These commenters noted that in recent years, hotel
beds have become higher as hotels use thicker mattresses, thereby
making it difficult or impossible for many individuals who use
wheelchairs to transfer onto hotel beds. In addition, many hotel
beds use a solid-sided platform base with no clearance at the
floor, which prevents the use of a portable lift to transfer an
individual onto the bed. Consequently, individuals who bring their
own lift to transfer onto the bed cannot independently get
themselves onto the bed. Some commenters suggested various design
options that might avoid these situations.
The Department intends to provide specific guidance relating to
both hotel beds and aquatic wheelchairs in a future rulemaking. For
the present, the Department reminds covered entities that they have
an obligation to undertake reasonable modifications to their
current policies and to make their programs accessible to persons
with disabilities. In many cases, providing aquatic wheelchairs or
adjusting hotel bed heights may be necessary to comply with those
requirements.
The Department has decided not to add specific scoping or
technical requirements for equipment and furniture in this final
rule. Other provisions of the regulation, including those requiring
reasonable modifications of policies, practices, or procedures,
program accessibility, and effective communication may require the
provision of accessible equipment in individual circumstances. The
1991 title II regulation at § 35.150(a) requires that entities
operate each service, program, or activity so that, when viewed in
its entirety, each is readily accessible to, and usable by,
individuals with disabilities, subject to a defense of fundamental
alteration or undue financial and administrative burdens. Section
35.150(b) specifies that such entities may meet their program
accessibility obligation through the “redesign of equipment.” The
Department expects to undertake a rulemaking to address these
issues in the near future.
Accessible golf cars. An accessible golf car means a
device that is designed and manufactured to be driven on all areas
of a golf course, is independently usable by individuals with
mobility disabilities, has a hand-operated brake and accelerator,
carries golf clubs in an accessible location, and has a seat that
both swivels and raises to put the golfer in a standing or
semi-standing position.
The 1991 title II regulation contained no language specifically
referencing accessible golf cars. After considering the comments
addressing the ANPRM's proposed requirement that golf courses make
at least one specialized golf car available for the use of
individuals with disabilities, and the safety of accessible golf
cars and their use on golf course greens, the Department stated in
the NPRM that it would not issue regulations specific to golf
cars.
The Department received many comments in response to its
decision to propose no new regulation specific to accessible golf
cars. The majority of commenters urged the Department to require
golf courses to provide accessible golf cars. These comments came
from individuals, disability advocacy and recreation groups, a
manufacturer of accessible golf cars, and representatives of local
government. Comments supporting the Department's decision not to
propose a new regulation came from golf course owners,
associations, and individuals.
Many commenters argued that while the existing title II
regulation covered the issue, the Department should nonetheless
adopt specific regulatory language requiring golf courses to
provide accessible golf cars. Some commenters noted that many local
governments and park authorities that operate public golf courses
have already provided accessible golf cars. Experience indicates
that such golf cars may be used without damaging courses. Some
argued that having accessible golf cars would increase golf course
revenue by enabling more golfers with disabilities to play the
game. Several commenters requested that the Department adopt a
regulation specifically requiring each golf course to provide one
or more accessible golf cars. Other commenters recommended allowing
golf courses to make “pooling” arrangements to meet demands for
such cars. A few commenters expressed support for using accessible
golf cars to accommodate golfers with and without disabilities.
Commenters also pointed out that the Departments of the Interior
and Defense have already mandated that golf courses under their
jurisdictional control must make accessible golf cars available
unless it can be demonstrated that doing so would change the
fundamental nature of the game.
While an industry association argued that at least two models of
accessible golf cars meet the specifications recognized in the
field, and that accessible golf cars cause no more damage to greens
or other parts of golf courses than players standing or walking
across the course, other commenters expressed concerns about the
potential for damage associated with the use of accessible golf
cars. Citing safety concerns, golf organizations recommended that
an industry safety standard be developed.
Although the Department declines to add specific scoping or
technical requirements for golf cars to this final rule, the
Department expects to address requirements for accessible golf cars
in future rulemaking. In the meantime, the Department believes that
golfers with disabilities who need accessible golf cars are
protected by other existing provisions in the title II regulation,
including those requiring reasonable modifications of policies,
practices, or procedures, and program accessibility.
Web site accessibility. Many commenters expressed
disappointment that the NPRM did not require title II entities to
make their Web sites, through which they offer programs and
services, accessible to individuals with disabilities, including
those who are blind or have low vision. Commenters argued that the
cost of making Web sites accessible, through Web site design, is
minimal, yet critical to enabling individuals with disabilities to
benefit from the entity's programs and services. Internet Web
sites, when accessible, provide individuals with disabilities great
independence, and have become an essential tool for many Americans.
Commenters recommended that the Department require covered
entities, at a minimum, to meet the section 508 Standard for
Electronic and Information Technology for Internet accessibility.
Under section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, Federal
agencies are required to make their Web sites accessible. 29 U.S.C.
794(d); 36 CFR 1194.
The Department agrees that the ability to access, on an equal
basis, the programs and activities offered by public entities
through Internet-based Web sites is of great importance to
individuals with disabilities, particularly those who are blind or
who have low vision. When the ADA was enacted in 1990, the Internet
was unknown to most Americans. Today, the Internet plays a critical
role in daily life for personal, civic, commercial, and business
purposes. In a period of shrinking resources, public entities
increasingly rely on the web as an efficient and comprehensive way
to deliver services and to inform and communicate with their
citizens and the general public. In light of the growing importance
Web sites play in providing access to public services and to
disseminating the information citizens need to participate fully in
civic life, accessing the Web sites of public entities can play a
significant role in fulfilling the goals of the ADA.
Although the language of the ADA does not explicitly mention the
Internet, the Department has taken the position that title II
covers Internet Web site access. Public entities that choose to
provide services through web-based applications (e.g.,
renewing library books or driver's licenses) or that communicate
with their constituents or provide information through the Internet
must ensure that individuals with disabilities have equal access to
such services or information, unless doing so would result in an
undue financial and administrative burden or a fundamental
alteration in the nature of the programs, services, or activities
being offered. The Department has issued guidance on the ADA as
applied to the Web sites of public entities in a 2003 publication
entitled, Accessibility of State and Local Government Web sites
to People with Disabilities, (June 2003) available at
http://www.ada.gov/websites2.htm. As the Department stated
in that publication, an agency with an inaccessible Web site may
also meet its legal obligations by providing an alternative
accessible way for citizens to use the programs or services, such
as a staffed telephone information line. However, such an
alternative must provide an equal degree of access in terms of
hours of operation and the range of options and programs available.
For example, if job announcements and application forms are posted
on an inaccessible Web site that is available 24 hours a day, seven
days a week to individuals without disabilities, then the
alternative accessible method must also be available 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week. Additional guidance is available in the Web
Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG), (May 5, 1999) available at
http://www.w3.org/TR/WAI-WEBCONTENT (last visited June 24,
2010) which are developed and maintained by the Web Accessibility
Initiative, a subgroup of the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C®).
The Department expects to engage in rulemaking relating to
website accessibility under the ADA in the near future. The
Department has enforced the ADA in the area of website
accessibility on a case-by-case basis under existing rules
consistent with the guidance noted above, and will continue to do
so until the issue is addressed in a final regulation.
Multiple chemical sensitivities. The Department received
comments from a number of individuals asking the Department to add
specific language to the final rule addressing the needs of
individuals with chemical sensitivities. These commenters expressed
concern that the presence of chemicals interferes with their
ability to participate in a wide range of activities. These
commenters also urged the Department to add multiple chemical
sensitivities to the definition of a disability.
The Department has determined not to include specific provisions
addressing multiple chemical sensitivities in the final rule. In
order to be viewed as a disability under the ADA, an impairment
must substantially limit one or more major life activities. An
individual's major life activities of respiratory or neurological
functioning may be substantially limited by allergies or
sensitivity to a degree that he or she is a person with a
disability. When a person has this type of disability, a covered
entity may have to make reasonable modifications in its policies
and practices for that person. However, this determination is an
individual assessment and must be made on a case-by-case basis.
Examinations and Courses. The Department received one
comment requesting that it specifically include language regarding
examinations and courses in the title II regulation. Because
section 309 of the ADA 42 U.S.C. 12189, reaches “[a]ny person that
offers examinations or courses related to applications, licensing,
certification, or credentialing for secondary or post secondary
education, professional, or trade purposes,” public entities also
are covered by this section of the ADA. Indeed, the requirements
contained in title II (including the general prohibitions against
discrimination, the program access requirements, the reasonable
modifications requirements, and the communications requirements)
apply to courses and examinations administered by public entities
that meet the requirements of section 309. While the Department
considers these requirements to be sufficient to ensure that
examinations and courses administered by public entities meet the
section 309 requirements, the Department acknowledges that the
title III regulation, because it addresses examinations in some
detail, is useful as a guide for determining what constitutes
discriminatory conduct by a public entity in testing situations.
See 28 CFR 36.309.
Hotel Reservations. In the NPRM, at § 36.302(e), the
Department proposed adding specific language to title III
addressing the requirements that hotels, timeshare resorts, and
other places of lodging make reasonable modifications to their
policies, practices, or procedures, when necessary to ensure that
individuals with disabilities are able to reserve accessible hotel
rooms with the same efficiency, immediacy, and convenience as those
who do not need accessible guest rooms. The NPRM did not propose
adding comparable language to the title II regulation as the
Department believes that the general nondiscrimination, program
access, effective communication, and reasonable modifications
requirements of title II provide sufficient guidance to public
entities that operate places of lodging (i.e., lodges in
State parks, hotels on public college campuses). The Department
received no public comments suggesting that it add language on
hotel reservations comparable to that proposed for the title III
regulation. Although the Department continues to believe that it is
unnecessary to add specific language to the title II regulation on
this issue, the Department acknowledges that the title III
regulation, because it addresses hotel reservations in some detail,
is useful as a guide for determining what constitutes
discriminatory conduct by a public entity that operates a
reservation system serving a place of lodging. See 28 CFR
36.302(e).
[AG Order No. 3180-2010, 75 FR 56184, Sept. 15, 2010; 76 FR 13285,
Mar. 11, 2011]